Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

Digital Arrest – A Serious Threat

We have all been reading about cyber attacks for quite some time now. Siphoning off money from the bank accounts of unsuspecting people is now part and parcel of our lives. With more and more people using digital means for making payments, more and more people are exposing their bank accounts to fraudsters through their mobile phones. Apart from this, even credit cards are being hacked with impunity.

As if all this was not enough, we now have the latest scam that is taking the world by storm — “digital arrest”. As per news reports, in India, citizens lost around ₹120 crore to digital arrest frauds in the first quarter of 2024, and according to the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), digital arrests have become a prevalent method of digital fraud. Many of those carrying out these frauds are based in Myanmar, Laos, and Cambodia.

So, what is “digital arrest”? In simple terms, it is a scam that thrives on the common man’s lack of knowledge and information about how regulators / government agencies work. Most people are not aware of how the police, the CBI, the tax department, or the Enforcement Department operate and how they carry out their investigations. Crooks take advantage of this lack of awareness and play on the human psyche by impersonating such official agencies.

In a “Digital Arrest” scam, the perpetrators leverage technology and fool people by simulating an official arrest scenario online and thereafter exploit the victim. The fraudsters impersonate law enforcement or government officials. They use methods like video calls, falsified documents, and other digital tactics to convince their targets that they are under some form of legal scrutiny.
The incredible thing is that a digital arrest is purely virtual, and there is no physical contact. The crooks create a scenario that resembles a real-life scenario with the help of props, and in the video call, the victim starts to believe that a real policeman or a real CBI officer has called him / her. The digital interrogation is done in such a manner that the room where the “officer” is seated very accurately resembles a real police station or a real government office.

Typically, the fraudster informs the victim that the police or the government has unearthed some wrongdoing by the victim and that he / she needs to remain online and also keep the camera switched on throughout the discussion. In many cases, the fraudster would already have collected some information about you such as Aadhaar, PAN, Bank details, etc. With such information, you will be made to believe that your Aadhaar, PAN, Mobile or Bank account has been used for illegal activities.

Then, the victim is manipulated into believing that immediate action will save him / her from severe consequences, including imprisonment. Initially, the fraudster would talk in legalese and would quote all kinds of laws / sections, etc, to sound very authentic. Then, fear would be induced in the mind of the victim by citing various penal provisions, including imprisonment, raid, etc.

Once the victim is in a state of shock and is scared enough to believe anything, the fraudster would then capitalise on the victim’s fears of legal repercussions. A “solution” would then be offered and the victim would be coaxed into transferring money to the bank account of the fraudster. Of course, the whole chain of transfer of money is arranged in such a way that it would become almost impossible to trace that transfer later. So, once the money is transferred, the victim would invariably lose that money forever.

So, a digital arrest would begin with a phone call from an unknown number. If you pick up that call, the caller would identify himself as a policeman or an investigator and would talk about some urgent matter relating to your bank account or some alleged fraud that is uncovered by the police or the investigating agency. Then, the video call begins, and you will see someone in a policeman’s uniform sitting inside what appears to be a real police station. Obviously, by now, you are scared and are convinced that the call is genuine. As the conversation progresses, you are led into believing that you have committed a crime and that crime has been discovered and that you are likely to face drastic consequences, which could include an arrest.

Then, an “arrest warrant” would be issued to take the victim to a virtual court on a Skype call while in “Digital arrest”.

Then, you would be made to believe you need to transfer the balance in your bank account to another bank account and that the same would be verified by the authorities and then returned in a few minutes. In many cases, receipts are also issued on fake letterheads of various authorities.

Thus, the fraudsters capitalise on the ignorance, fear, anxiety or blind trust of their target and with this kind of mental trauma, the victim loses the ability to think and act rationally. As per news reports, recently, the Chairman and Managing Director of a leading textile group in India was defrauded by a group posing as officials from various government agencies, and they also took him to a virtual court, where the impersonalised Chief Justice of India (CJI) was hearing the case.

Unfortunately, the digital arrest scam has already succeeded in many cases and that too even in cases of high-profile professionals. So, it is not just the common man that is being targeted now. Even educated and/or rich people are also being conned into making large payments.

The government is aware of this kind of fraud and has tried to warn citizens not to fall prey to such fraud.

The Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology, Government of India, has issued an advisory on the matter. The gist of the advisory is:

  1.  To stay calm and not to panic
  2.  To verify the Caller’s Identity
  3.  Not to share personal information with anyone
  4.  To be wary of unsolicited communications from unknown numbers
  5.  To immediately report suspicious activities
  6.  Educate yourself and others

What has the government done so far in the matter?

Government initiatives to tackle Cybercrime

  •  Indian Cyber Coordination Centre (I4C): Under MHA, it coordinates activities related to combating cybercrime in the country.
  •  CERT-In: It is the national nodal agency for responding to computer security incidents.
  •  National Cyber Crime Reporting Portal: Launched as part of I4C to enable the public to report incidents of cybercrimes.
  • National Toll-free Helpline number 1930: Operationalised to provide citizen assistance in lodging online cyber complaints.

Readers would be aware of “CERT-In”. It is the functional organisation of the Ministry with the objective of securing Indian cyberspace. It provides Incident Prevention and Response services as well as Security Quality Management Services.

If you suspect a digital arrest scam, please report it immediately to the National Cyber Crime Reporting Portal at cybercrime.gov.in or call the cybercrime helpline at 1930. Prompt reporting can help authorities take swift action against scammers.

Further, as a preventive measure, the government has launched the Chakshu portal ( https://sancharsaathi.gov.in/sfc/Home/sfc-complaint.jsp ) under the Sanchar Sathi initiative of the Department of Telecom. This portal enables citizens to report a suspected fraud communication with the intention of defrauding telecom service users for cyber-crime, financial frauds, non-bonafide purposes like impersonation or any other misuse through Call, SMS or WhatsApp.

Readers would be doing great service if they educated senior citizens (especially those above the age of 70) about this and help in preventing them from falling prey to such frauds.

Business Succession Planning: The Strategic Role of Chartered Accountants and Creating Value beyond Compliance

Many Indian businesses are family-owned and operated. Statistics suggest that only a few such businesses (and the wealth created through them) survive and thrive for generations to come. Succession Planning thus becomes an important issue in the survival, maintenance and growth of businesses and wealth. The Author of this article highlights some of the critical aspects of Succession Planning and the role of Chartered Accountants in it. Succession Planning can become an attractive area for practice as CAs are trusted business advisors, are close to family members and have the skills to balance legal nuances with commercial acumen and feasibility.

INTRODUCTION

The Indian MSME sector, comprising over 63 million enterprises and contributing approximately 30 per cent to India’s GDP, stands at a critical juncture. As the first-generation entrepreneurs of post-independence India start ageing, the question of business continuity and succession looms large. According to a 2021 survey on Indian Family Businesses, only about 30 per cent of family businesses survive to the second generation, approximately 13 per cent make it to the third generation, and merely 4 per cent survive beyond that.

These statistics become more alarming, considering their economic impact. The Credit Suisse Family 1000 Report 2018 highlights that family-owned businesses account for approximately 79 per cent of India’s organised private sector. Family businesses contribute significantly to India’s GDP and employment generation, as reported by the FICCI and ISB’s ‘Indian Family Business Report 2022’. They employ approximately 49% of the country’s workforce. Family-owned enterprises contribute to 63 per cent of India’s industrial output. These businesses are responsible for 90 per cent of India’s industrial units. Furthermore, the report indicates that 96 per cent of all companies in India are family-owned, underlining their crucial role in the nation’s economic fabric. Despite this outsized impact, the low survival rate across generations poses a significant risk to economic stability and growth. Yet, most entrepreneurs postpone succession planning until it’s too late, often leading to value erosion or complete business dissolution during generational transitions.

The contrast with Japan presents a compelling case for structured succession planning. Japan has over 33,000 businesses that are more than 100 years old. According to research by Shinise (long-established Japanese companies) studies, over 3,100 companies have survived for more than 200 years, with some continuing successfully for over 1,000 years. Remarkably, about 90 per cent of these long-lasting businesses are small and medium-sized enterprises with fewer than 300 employees. The oldest existing independent company in the world is Kongō Gumi, a Japanese construction company founded in 578 AD, which operated continuously for 1,428 years.

This stark contrast in business longevity between Indian and Japanese enterprises can be attributed to several factors, but at the core lies Japan’s systematic approach to succession planning, which is deeply embedded in their business culture. Their concept of ‘shinise’ emphasises preserving business value across generations through well-defined succession practices, strong governance mechanisms, and clear leadership transition protocols.
While large corporations like the Tatas, Birlas, Ambanis, and, more recently, the Adani Group have formalised their succession planning, the vast majority of small and medium enterprises remain unprepared for a leadership transition, potentially risking the very existence of enterprises built through decades of entrepreneurial effort.

For professional practitioners serving these enterprises — chartered accountants and lawyers — this presents both a challenge and an unprecedented opportunity. Having served as trusted advisors, often across generations, these professionals are uniquely positioned to evolve from their traditional role of compliance specialists to strategic consultants in succession planning.

UNDERSTANDING BUSINESS SUCCESSION PLANNING: A STRATEGIC IMPERATIVE

Succession planning transcends the conventional understanding of mere ownership transfer through wills or trusts. For professionals advising SMEs, it is crucial to first internalise and then effectively communicate that succession planning encompasses a comprehensive framework addressing four crucial dimensions: ownership transition, management succession, control mechanisms, and operational continuity.

Professional’s Perspective

From a technical standpoint, succession planning integrates multiple disciplines, including personal laws, corporate restructuring, tax planning, family governance, and business continuity planning. It requires professionals to analyse various legal structures, evaluate the tax implications of different transition mechanisms, and design governance frameworks that separate ownership from management. The complexity increases when dealing with multi-locational businesses, diverse asset classes, and cross-border implications.

The implementation demands a thorough understanding of various tools and techniques, from family constitutions and business governance frameworks to management transition mechanisms and wealth distribution structures. Central to this understanding is the recognition that succession planning isn’t merely a legal or financial exercise, but a complex interplay of business, family, and individual aspirations.

Communicating with Clients

When explaining succession planning to clients, professionals need to translate these technical concepts into relatable business scenarios. The approach begins with fundamental questions about business continuity beyond the promoter’s active involvement, naturally progressing to discussions about the client’s vision for their business and family’s future.

Real-Life Scenarios and Professional Intervention

Scenario 1: The Unequal Siblings

Imagine an established family business where the elder son joined straight out of college, learning the ropes from the ground up over ten years. The younger son, having just completed his MBA, is eager to join but feels he deserves an equal say in decision-making.

Without Succession Planning: Tensions rise as the elder son resents his brother’s equal authority despite less experience. The younger son feels his education is undervalued. Family dinners become battlegrounds for business disputes. The business suffers as operational decisions get delayed and employees receive conflicting instructions.

With Professional Intervention: The professional advisor facilitates structured family discussions to achieve consensus on a clear organisational framework. Their role encompasses conducting individual sessions with both siblings, designing role definitions that acknowledge the elder son’s experience while utilising the younger son’s fresh perspectives, creating objective performance metrics for leadership roles, and establishing a family council for major decisions.

Scenario 2: The Diverging Paths

Consider a family where the daughter has been actively involved in the business while the son pursues a different career path. The business forms the bulk of family assets.

Without Succession Planning: The daughter feels overburdened with business responsibilities, while the son feels disconnected from the family legacy. No clear mechanism exists to “cash out” the son’s share without straining business finances.

With Professional Intervention: The professional advisor architects a balanced solution by structuring ownership and management rights separately, creating a fair valuation methodology, and designing a phased buy-out mechanism that maintains business stability.

Scenario 3: The Reluctant Heirs

A successful entrepreneur’s children have chosen different career paths – one a doctor, another an artist, and the third in tech overseas. None show interest in the family business.

Without Succession Planning: The promoter continues running the business well into their seventies, becoming increasingly stressed. The business stagnates due to delayed investments and decisions. When finally forced to sell, the business receives significantly discounted valuations due to its key-person dependency.

With Professional Intervention: The professional advisor helps implement a comprehensive transition
strategy focusing on developing strong second-line management, documenting systems and processes, and exploring various exit options while maintaining business value.

VALUE CREATION THROUGH STRATEGIC SUCCESSION PLANNING

Transforming Professional Practice

The traditional role of professionals serving SMEs has predominantly centredaround compliance, taxation, and dispute resolution — services that clients often view as necessary obligations rather than
value-adding propositions. Succession planning presents an opportunity to transcend this perception,  positioning professionals as strategic advisors who help preserve and enhance business value across generations.

The Hub and Spoke Model of Service Delivery

In the complex landscape of succession planning, the professional advisor acts as the central hub, coordinating with various specialists who form the spokes of the service delivery wheel. This model recognises that no single professional can possess expertise in all required domains. The primary advisor orchestrates the contributions of legal experts, valuation specialists, family business consultants, wealth managers, and other professionals while maintaining oversight of the entire process and preserving their position as the client’s trusted advisor.

Technical Framework: Integration of Tax and Regulatory Considerations

The Indian regulatory landscape presents both challenges and opportunities in succession planning. Tax considerations span across direct taxes, including income tax, capital gains, and tax impact from gifts, while indirect tax implications, particularly post-GST, add another layer of complexity. The professional must navigate these along with personal laws as applicable to different sections of the society, corporate law requirements, FEMA regulations for international assets, and industry-specific compliance needs.

Creating efficient succession structures requires careful consideration of the following:

– Transfer pricing implications in family business restructuring

– Capital gains optimisation in asset transfers

– GST impact on business reorganisation

– Regulatory approvals in regulated sectors

– Cross-border compliance requirements

– Corporate governance norms

BUILDING A COMPREHENSIVE SUCCESSION PLANNING PRACTICE

In the dynamic landscape of professional services, chartered accountants are uniquely positioned to develop robust succession planning practices, particularly focusing on promoter-driven and family businesses. This specialised field offers significant opportunities for professionals to add value and build long-term relationships with clients while contributing to broader economic stability.

Succession Planning for Promoter-driven and Family Businesses

The cornerstone of a succession planning practice lies in addressing the complex challenges faced by promoter-driven and family businesses. These entities require tailored strategies that balance business continuity with family dynamics and personal aspirations. Professionals in this field must develop expertise in various ownership transfer mechanisms, including share transfers, management buy-outs, and trust structures. They should be adept at creating models for the gradual transition of control while maintaining business stability, a crucial factor in ensuring the longevity of family enterprises.

Establishing effective governance structures is paramount in family businesses. This involves assisting in the creation of family councils and boards of directors, developing comprehensive family constitutions and shareholder agreements, and implementing systems for transparent decision-making and conflict resolution. These structures serve as the foundation for smooth transitions and ongoing business operations.

Financial planning and business valuation form critical components of the succession planning process. Chartered accountants must conduct thorough business valuations to ensure fair distribution among heirs or stakeholders. This process often involves developing complex financial models for various succession scenarios and creating strategies for liquidity management during ownership transitions. The ability to navigate the intricate tax implications of business transfers is equally crucial, ensuring compliance with relevant laws and regulations while optimising tax efficiency for all parties involved.

Navigating the Complexities of Generational Wealth Transfer

The transfer of wealth from one generation to the next presents a unique set of challenges that succession planning professionals must address. This process often involves facilitating intergenerational communication, aligning expectations and values across different age groups, and mediating conflicts arising from
differing perspectives on wealth management. Professionals must develop frameworks for open discussions about wealth transfer and design equitable distribution plans that don’t compromise business operations.

Preserving family legacy while managing the practical aspects of wealth transfer requires a delicate balance. Succession planners should assist in articulating and documenting family values and vision, developing strategies to maintain family unity through the transition, and creating mechanisms for involving the next generation in philanthropy and social responsibility. This approach helps in maintaining the family’s core values and social impact while adapting to changing business environments.

Exploring Diverse Exit Strategy Options

A comprehensive succession planning practice must be well-versed in various exit strategies to cater to the diverse needs of business owners. Family succession, often the preferred route in family businesses, requires assessing family members’ capabilities and interest in taking over the business. Professionals should be capable of developing training programs for potential family successors and creating phased transition plans for the gradual transfer of responsibilities.

Management buy-outs (MBOs) present another viable option, requiring evaluation of the management team’s capacity to take over ownership. This strategy often involves structuring financing options for management to acquire ownership and developing incentive plans to retain key managers during the transition period. For businesses considering external sales, succession planners must prepare the business for sale, conduct market analysis to determine optimal timing and valuation and manage the complex sale process, including due diligence coordination.

Initial Public Offerings (IPOs) and Employee Stock Ownership Plans (ESOPs) represent more complex exit strategies that require specialised knowledge. Assessing a company’s readiness for going public, guiding through the IPO process, and developing strategies for managing family control post-IPO are crucial skills. Similarly, evaluating the suitability of ESOPs, designing structures that balance owner, employee, and business interests, and managing the tax implications and compliance requirements of these plans are essential components of a comprehensive succession planning practice.

The Role of the Trusted Adviser in Family Dynamics and Succession

Navigating complex family dynamics is perhaps one of the most challenging aspects of succession planning. As trusted advisers, chartered accountants must develop a high level of emotional intelligence and soft skills, including expertise in family systems theory, conflict resolution, and mediation. The ability to provide an objective, third-party perspective is invaluable in these situations, offering unbiased assessments of family members’ capabilities and providing a neutral ground for family discussions and negotiations.

Succession readiness assessment forms a critical part of this process. Professionals must be adept at evaluating both the business’s readiness for leadership transition and potential successors’ preparedness for their roles. This involves identifying gaps in skills or experience and developing plans to address them. Facilitating family councils, developing protocols for family decision-making processes, and guiding the creation of family employment policies and codes of conduct are also essential services that a succession planning practice should offer.

Crisis management is an often overlooked but crucial aspect of succession planning. Developing contingency plans for unexpected events, mediating family conflicts that threaten business continuity, and providing stability and guidance during turbulent transition periods are vital services that can significantly impact the success of a succession plan.

Expanding into Shared Family Office Services

As an extension of succession planning, chartered accountants can expand their practice by offering shared family office services. This involves providing comprehensive wealth management services, coordinating investment strategies across multiple family members, managing complex portfolios, including business assets, real estate, and financial investments, and providing regular performance reporting and analysis.

Centralised administration services, including consolidated bookkeeping and financial reporting for family entities, managing bill payments, cash flow, and day-to-day financial operations, and coordinating with legal and tax professionals for compliance and planning, can add significant value to high-net-worth families. Risk management and insurance services, encompassing the assessment and management of risks across family businesses and personal assets, coordination of insurance coverage, and development of crisis management plans, further enhance the service offering.

By developing expertise in these multifaceted areas of succession planning and family business advisory, chartered accountants can position themselves as indispensable partners in ensuring the longevity and success of family enterprises. This comprehensive approach not only adds significant value to clients but also contributes to broader economic stability by facilitating the smooth transition and continued prosperity of family-owned businesses, which often form the backbone of many economies.

CONCLUSION

Succession planning represents a significant opportunity for professionals to elevate their practice from routine compliance to strategic advisory. The professional’s role extends beyond technical expertise to become a trusted advisor who helps preserve both business value and family relationships. Success in this domain requires a commitment to continuous learning, the development of specialised skills, and the ability to coordinate multiple specialists while maintaining primary client relationships.

For professionals serving small and medium businesses, succession planning offers a natural extension of their trusted advisor role. By helping clients address succession planning proactively, professionals not only create substantial value for their clients but also enhance their practice sustainability. The complexity and long-term nature of succession planning engagements provide opportunities for deeper client relationships and premium service offerings.

As India witnesses one of the largest inter-generational transfers of wealth and business assets in its history, professionals who develop expertise in succession planning will be well-positioned to serve this growing need. The journey from being a compliance advisor to a succession planning consultant may be challenging, but it offers rich rewards both professionally and personally.
“The best time to plant a tree was 20 years ago. The second best time is now.” Chinese Proverb

This ancient wisdom perfectly encapsulates the essence of succession planning – both for business families and for professionals aspiring to build expertise in this domain. The opportunity exists today; the choice to seize it rests with us.

Small Steps, Big Impact: Beginning Your AI Journey

For CAs grappling with late hours and an overwhelming workload, it’s time to unlock the transformative power of AI. This article explores how small, thoughtful AI implementations can drive significant efficiency gains, enabling a balanced and more productive professional life.

CA Rahul sat alone in his office. It was 9:15 pm, and the staff had long gone home. The faint hum of the air conditioner was the only sound breaking the stillness of the small office. His eyes drifted to his inbox, overflowing with hundreds of unread emails, while his phone buzzed with a barrage of WhatsApp messages from clients and staff, each demanding his attention.

Rahul sighed. The past years had felt like an endless loop of tax compliances, constantly racing to keep up with changing regulations. Finding capable staff and managing a shortage of article trainees only added to the stress. Then there were the clients — always needing reminders and follow-ups to share their data on time, making the job even more challenging.

He had heard and read a lot about AI in recent months. He recalled a seminar he had attended on AI and how it can improve efficiency at work. On his college-going daughter’s insistence, he had even installed ChatGPT on his mobile. But aside from a few casual attempts, he hadn’t explored its potential seriously.

Can you relate to Rahul’s story?

Rahul’s situation mirrors that of many small and medium-sized CA firms. The daily grind often leaves no time to focus on “important but not urgent” tasks, like finding ways to improve efficiency. While most CAs recognise AI’s potential, the sheer volume of information and multiplicity of solutions creates confusion. Like Rahul, you might be asking:

  •  Where do I begin?
  • With concerns about inaccurate results, should I use it at all?
  • Which tool should I choose among so many options?
  • How do I handle work from younger staff already using AI tools?
  • How do I prepare my firm to collaborate with young, tech-savvy clients?

Basics First

Before diving in, let’s clarify some fundamental concepts and understand some terms which keep appearing in AI related articles and conversations.

Artificial Intelligence

A branch of science concerned with the ability of computers or machines to perform tasks that usually require human intelligence, like learning, problem-solving, and decision-making.

Generative AI

A field of AI that focuses on generating new content (text, images, videos, etc.) based on patterns learned from existing data.

Large Language Model

Large Language Models are a specific category within Generative AI, trained on massive amounts of text data to understand and generate human-like text.

 

ChatGPT by OpenAI is a product of Generative AI that uses a Large Language Model (LLM) to understand context and produce coherent, human-like responses in a conversational format. Similarly, there are other tools in the market, such as Gemini by Google and Claude by Anthropic, which also utilise advanced AI models for similar purposes.

Making of a Large Language Model

A Large language model creation requires the following steps:

1. Collection of Data: Large Language Models (LLMs) are trained on vast amounts of publicly available data, including Wikipedia articles, news reports, educational materials, and legal documents. This diverse dataset helps the model understand human language patterns and usage. During the data selection process, careful filtering is done to minimise harmful or biased content.

2. Pre-processing Data: The collected data is then pre-processed to remove duplicate, irrelevant and low-quality data. The remaining data is then properly formatted and broken down into smaller units like words or sub-words.

3. Model Architecture and Training: At this stage, developers design and build the AI system’s structure, then train it to predict the next word in a sequence of text. This forms the technical foundation of how the model processes and generates language.

https://arxiv.org/abs/2303.18223v14

Is 100 per cent accurate output possible?

  • The content generated by LLMs is not guaranteed to be 100 per cent correct, and the main reasons for these inaccuracies are as follows:
    LLMs are trained on vast public datasets that may contain inaccuracies, outdated information, or biases. The model can unintentionally learn and replicate these errors.
  •  LLMs don’t “understand” the world as humans do. They predict likely sequences of words based on patterns in the data. While these predictions often appear coherent, they may not always be factually correct.
  •  If the user’s input is unclear or lacks detail, the model might make incorrect assumptions and provide an inaccurate response.
  •  LLMs rely on pre-trained data. If not continuously updated, they might lack knowledge about recent events or developments.
  •  While LLMs are versatile, they might provide superficial or generic answers in specialised fields without deep domain-specific knowledge.
  •  LLMs can “hallucinate” information, generating details or facts that seem convincing but are entirely fabricated

Although LLMs have inherent limitations, several scientific approaches can significantly reduce errors in their outputs. Using well-crafted prompts can guide the model to provide more accurate responses. Retrieval Augmented Generation (RAG) enhances accuracy by connecting the model to verified external information sources. Additionally, custom-trained models can be developed for specific domains to improve performance in specialised areas.

Why does a good prompt matter?

A prompt is the input text or query that guides the LLM to generate a response. As mentioned earlier, if the query is vague or not complete, the LLM will make certain assumptions and create output which may not be relevant. While precise, detailed prompts typically yield accurate and relevant responses.

Poor Prompt: “Write about AI.”

Good Prompt: “Write a 500-word article explaining the role of AI in automating repetitive tasks, with examples from the perspective of a tax practitioner, in a conversational tone.”

In fact, prompts are so important that Prompt Engineering is becoming a specialised area of expertise and a valuable skill of crafting and refining prompts to achieve specific, high-quality outputs from AI models.

Rahul makes a beginning.

After understanding the basics of LLMs, their inherent strengths and limitations, Rahul called a brainstorming session with his team. He invited ideas on how to start using AI to improve efficiency.

“Sir let’s use AI for routine drafting,” suggested Zaid, the new article trainee. Other young team members eagerly supported the idea. Alex demonstrated how
ChatGPT could draft client communications and compliance-related documents. The team was impressed.

The discussion continued, and a decision was arrived at to start the use of AI for drafting purposes, starting small but aiming for impactful results.

Standard Operating Procedure

To ensure smooth integration, Rahul outlined an SOP:

Scope: Specify which team members can use AI for drafting and clearly define the tasks AI can assist with.

  •  Routine emails to clients asking for data, payment reminders, etc.
  •  Explaining tax-related queries to a client.
  •  Drafting compliance-related documents, e.g., Minutes of Board Meetings, Resolutions, etc.
  • • Drafting Agreements, e.g., Partnership Deed
  •  Drafting replies to legal notices

Tool Selection: Evaluate various AI tools. Decide between free and paid versions based on usage needs and features.
Each tool comes with a free and paid version. The differentiation is in terms of limit of use, access to better models, access to better features, etc. Here is a brief comparison of a few prominent tools:

Tool Free Version Paid Version
ChatGPT • Access to GPT-4o mini.

• Standard voice mode.

• Limited access to file uploads, advanced data analysis, web browsing, and image generation.

 

• Everything in Free, plus + the following:

• Extended limits on messaging, file uploads, advanced data analysis, and image generation.

• Limited access to o1 and o1-mini.

• Create and use custom GPTs.

• Subscription: USD 20 per month.

Claude • Limited daily message limit, which varies based on demand.

• Access to Claude 3.5 Sonnet model.

• 5x more usage versus the Free plan.

• Access to Claude 3 Opus model.

• Early access to new features.

• Access to Projects to organise. documents and chats.

• USD 20 per month.

Gemini • Access to 1.5 Flash Model.

• Free flowing voice conversation.

• Connect with multiple Google Apps.

• Access to 1.5 Pro model.

• Access to Deep Research.

• Work seamlessly with Gmail, Docs and more.

• Upload up to 1500 pages of text.

• Subscription: INR 1950 per month.

Microsoft
Co-Pilot
• Limited Access during peak hours. • Priority Access.

• Early Access to new features.

• Works seamlessly with Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and OneNote.

• Subscription: USD 30 per month.

Note: These features are highly dynamic and are frequently updated by companies

Training: Basic training to each member for tool usage and effective prompt creation.

Maintaining a library of standard prompts.

Confidentiality Measures: Understand the privacy policy of the AI tool. Set up strict confidentiality protocols for inputting sensitive data. Avoid sharing client-identifiable information unless it is redacted or anonymised.

When uploading files or posting queries, ensure that all Personally Identifiable Information (PII) is deleted. For example, if you are uploading a document that contains details such as the company name, PAN, address, CIN, etc., remove this information before uploading.

Drafting and Review Process: Define the review process for each type of AI-generated output.

What kind of documents can be generated from scratch? What kind of documents require a rough draft to be written by a team member and then improved using an AI tool?

Each document must be reviewed before it goes externally. Some documents may be reviewed by seniors, and other more sensitive documents may require approval by proprietor / senior.

The review must be done to spot inaccuracies and correct them. Case law citations should always be sourced from authoritative and reliable references, not from AI-generated content.

Continuous Improvement: This SOP must be reviewed every quarter and amended for improvements and accuracy

Drafting- AI-Generated vs. Human Generated

As the use of AI tools for content generation continues to grow, various tools have emerged in the market to identify whether the content is human-written or AI-generated. Some of these detection tools include TraceGPT, Hive, and Originality.ai.

AI excels at generating content quickly, with accurate grammar, proper punctuation, and consistent style. However, it often struggles with complex requirements. On the other hand, human-created text, though more time-consuming, stands out for its uniqueness and ability to better convey human emotions. The ideal approach is combining AI efficiency with human creativity and insight.

AI should be used to enhance NI (i.e. Natural Intelligence) and not to substitute the latter. NI should be used to make effective use of AI. Excessive use of AI may kill creativity and natural skills, just as we lost our memory skills of remembering telephone numbers with the advent of cell phones.

Rahul’s office- Two months later

It was 7 pm, and Rahul was packing up to leave for home. Watching his favourite sports event and having dinner with family now felt like a luxury he could afford. The team’s adoption of AI for drafting tasks significantly reduced his workload.

“What’s next?” he wondered. Rahul was ready to explore some more ways AI could transform his practice.

Here’s how you can begin implementing AI in your office:

Ready to take the first step? The possibilities are endless. Start small, think big, and let AI handle the routine while you focus on what truly matters.

Identify a Starting Area: Choose a specific area to begin using AI. For example, Rahul’s firm started with drafting. You could consider areas like research or financial analysis, depending on your comfort level and the potential for time savings.

Select the Right Tool: Research and choose an AI tool that aligns with your chosen area of focus.

Conduct Team Training: Organise a formal training program to ensure team members understand how to use the tool effectively.

Develop a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP): Create a clear and structured SOP to streamline the AI implementation process and maintain consistency.

Note: This article was conceived, structured, and written entirely by a human. However, several sentences were paraphrased with the assistance of AI to enhance clarity and ensure grammatical accuracy.

AI and the Future of Accounting

Applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI) have been around for over five decades. Even my doctoral dissertation some 27 years ago was about the use of AI in helping individuals make asset allocation decisions. My AI model assisted the user by evaluating the complexity of the task (e.g., the cognitive demands of collecting information, framing the problem and generating alternatives), the context (e.g. financial condition of the user and multiplicity of financial objectives) and the user’s background (e.g., the level of experience and expertise of the user in various asset classes). Current incarnations of which are the robo-advisors offered by many financial services companies.

However, the inflection point for AI really happened about a year and a half ago when OpenAI introduced ChatGPT. Since then, AI has proliferated into every aspect of our life. Just as mechanical automation and electric power created the Industrial Revolution and changed many jobs in the last century, this AI revolution is likely to change the nature of jobs in professional services. Accounting will not be spared.

On one side, the integration of AI into accounting services offers many opportunities for increasing the efficiency and effectiveness of services and bringing innovations. AI tools can undertake repetitive tasks with high productivity, so accountants can elevate themselves to strategic thinking and advisory roles, offer analytic intelligence and create differentiating value for clients. AI can also help accounting firms focus more on client service, including providing anytime financial data and customised reports and answer basic client questions through AI chatbots.

On the other side, AI poses a serious threat to traditional careers in accounting. AI is not expected to fully replace humans any time soon in highly diverse and fragmented accounting activities and processes. However, it is likely to replace human accountants in many laborious and routine subtasks that are conventionally performed by accountants in junior positions. This does not necessarily mean that young people will be out of jobs or traditional small accounting firms will disappear. Rather, it means that people and firms that are continuously learning and adapting to the evolving environment will thrive and grow by using AI technologies to their advantage.

AI AND ACCOUNTING

AI is not just one piece of software or an application; it rather consists of a number of varied tools and techniques. They include the identification and processing of repetitive tasks, automation of workflow and cognitive processes, data analytic tools for predictive and prescriptive analytics, neural network algorithms, fuzzy logic, genetic algorithms, expert systems, machine learning, natural language processing and generation, deep learning, large language models, computer vision, etc. Let us look at how these AI tools and techniques can affect various aspects of the professional side of accounting.

ACCOUNTING & BOOKKEEPING

Accountants and bookkeepers spend a lot of time on many repetitive tasks. AI can mimic actions performed by humans and perform these tasks quickly and accurately. Once trained for a specific use case, it can do invoice preparation and processing, transaction data entry, receivable and payable reconciliations, payroll processing, transaction characterisation and categorisation, bank reconciliation and generating reports. It can process large volumes of financial data quickly and liberate accountants to focus on more strategic activities. AI-enabled tools like Booke and UiPath can be integrated into your existing accounting software like Xero or QuickBooks Online to automate your tedious tasks.

AI algorithms can also review large volumes of data for error. They can cross-check information across different systems and reports, such as point-of-sales registers, expense reports, procurement systems and payment approval workflows. They can do this with very high precision compared to humans, minimising errors in financial records and improving the reliability of financial statements. They can help you identify inconsistencies in financial data, reduce human errors and improve the accuracy of financial statements and reports.

Al can also work continuously — day and night — on accounting and bookkeeping tasks at a very high speed. AI can also help manage the workflow involving humans by automating task assignments and tracking progress. This can significantly improve efficiency and reduce operational costs associated with these tasks.

Another benefit of AI is scalability. Every Chartered Accountant knows the crunch she faces at the time of a quarter / fiscal year-end. To help with the additional, and often unexpected, workload, they need to deploy additional temporary accountants and burn the midnight oil. AI-powered systems can help in such seasonal and fluctuating workloads as well as easily scale with the growth of your accounting services business. You can increase the volume of work without a corresponding increase in hiring human resources.

AUDITING & FINANCIAL REPORTING

Government agencies, such as the Comptroller and Auditor General of India (CAG), and professional associations, such as the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI), issue standards and guidance for auditing attestation and quality control. Compliance with these standards and guidance is essential to ensure the authenticity of the audit and financial reporting. These rules are updated frequently. It is often difficult to percolate them to every accountant in every corner of the country. AI tools can easily integrate new rules into your systems and continuously monitor adherence to them in audit procedures. Simultaneously, they can also check for mathematical accuracy, saving time and reducing human error.

A key objective of auditing is to ensure the accuracy of and trust in financial statements. Auditors go through reams of data to spot unusual transactions and flag potentially fraudulent activities. AI tools can help you detect possible fraud by analysing financial data, determining historical patterns and identifying discrepancies in them. Advanced analytics deployed using AI can identify subtle indicators of fraud that might be missed by traditional auditing methods.

Traditional auditing methods involve sampling from a large pool of financial data. This is akin to finding a needle in a haystack. However, AI tools, under the parameters properly set by auditors, can analyse the entire pool of financial data rather than a sample of such data. Even when sampling is needed, AI can help improve sampling by more closely adhering to appropriate sampling methods and reducing human biases in sampling. This can help you focus your auditing efforts on the areas of high risk.

Continuous auditing is often touted to enhance risk management, improve financial reporting quality, increase auditing efficiency and timely detection of financial misconduct. AI tools integrated with automated reconciliation of accounts and transactions can enable continuous auditing without deploying a significant number of human resources. They can offer enhanced planning and efficient use of finite resources. AI can help journal entry testing very early through continuous audit, such that the initial risk assessment is performed immediately, especially for high-risk transactions. So you can identify issues as they arise rather than waiting for periodic audits.

Another tedious aspect of auditing and financial reporting is report generation. AI tools can help generate various types of financial reports automatically by extracting and summarising relevant data from various sources. They can also help provide narrative explanations for financial figures so stakeholders with limited financial expertise can also understand the reports. For internal use in the organisation, AI tools can also create customised reports relevant for various departments, functions and organisational levels. Additionally, you can maintain consistency in financial reporting by standardising report generation using AI tools.

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Chartered Accountants work closely with CFOs of companies to help them in the financial management of companies. They help with cash flow management and reporting. Here, AI can play an important role. AI can determine cash flow patterns, help optimise working capital and improve accounts receivable and payable processes. It can further optimise cash flow by analysing payment terms, invoices and credit lines. It can also automatically categorise and track expenses, reducing errors and improving compliance. In addition, AI algorithms can assess credit risks associated with accounts receivable from customers more effectively than traditional methods — mathematical credit rating formula, as they are better able to incorporate the contextual information and changing economic conditions in creditworthiness assessments.

Another important aspect is forecasting the financial needs of the company in both the near term and long term. AI tools can collect and analyse historical data, market trends and exogenous factors to provide more accurate cash flow predictions. Well-trained AI can even predict future expenses to help companies manage their liquidity requirements. AI can analyse customer data to predict behaviour and preferences and, based on that, predict which customers are likely to pay late or default, allowing for proactive management of accounts receivable. AI can enable better inventory management by predicting demand under various conditions, such as seasonality, economic conditions, and market trends. So, AI can help improve working capital efficiency by optimising the balance between accounts receivable, inventory and accounts payable to improve working capital efficiency.

AI can help in the budgeting processes too. It can aid you in creating more accurate budgets based on historical patterns and need analysis. It can analyse spending patterns and suggest appropriate allocation of budget, potentially improving resource optimisation. It can also develop and analyse multiple financial scenarios and help you develop adaptive budgeting.

AI can assist in complex financially material events like M&A, valuation and revenue recognition. AI can process huge amounts of financial and market data to identify and evaluate potential acquisition targets. It can process multiple variables and scenarios to determine the appropriate level of valuation. AI can also provide real-time analysis of key performance indicators (KPIs), allowing for more timely data-driven decision-making.

TAXATION & TAX ADVISORY

As Benjamin Franklin said more than two centuries ago, there are only two certainties in life — death and taxes. Death is simple; it happens only once in a life, and one does not have to live with it. Taxes are complicated; they happen every day, and we have to live with them.

While AI cannot make taxes go away, it can certainly help reduce the complexity. AI tools can assist you in tax research by identifying relevant regulations across different jurisdictions and help you in optimising tax strategies. AI can keep track of changes in tax laws and regulations and alert you about new requirements and opportunities. It can extract relevant information from complicated tax documents and interpret and summarise them. This ensures compliance and enhances tax planning.

AI can also provide data-driven insights and individualise tax-efficient strategies by interpreting complex tax codes and regulations for individual situations. AI tools can analyse vast amounts of financial data from various sources, identify trends, determine anomalies and come up with potential tax optimisation opportunities. AI algorithms can develop and analyse various tax scenarios to recommend tailored tax strategies for individuals and companies. AI can forecast tax liabilities based on historical data and current financial course. This can assist you in creating much more accurate budgets and financial plans.

In the process of preparing documents for tax filings, AI can extract data from various sources, classify them and organise tax-related documents. This can significantly reduce the time and effort required for manual data entry. AI can quickly process vast amounts of financial data and detect unusual patterns that may indicate errors and anomalies that might be relevant for tax purposes. Identifying potential red flags in a timely manner and evaluating tax positions appropriately can help clients make informed decisions and reduce audit risks and penalties. AI-based co-pilots or assistants can instantaneously offer answers to tax-related queries as well as provide guidance on deductions, credits and other tax matters. Finally, AI tools can automate the preparation and submission of tax returns and compliance reports, ensuring they are accurate and submitted on time.

FINANCIAL ADVISORY

Many companies and high-net-worth individuals rely on chartered accountants for tax-efficient financial advice. AI can help CAs shift from reactive problem-solving to proactive advisory. AI tools, like Fathom and Jirav, can assist you in analysing historical and current financial data to identify trends and patterns that humans may miss. They use historical data to forecast financial trends, budgeting, and cash flow management, providing chartered accountants with actionable insights for financial advisory. They can help you offer predictive insights and strategic guidance to your clients that go beyond traditional accounting.

AI tools can tailor financial advice based on the specific financial situation of a business. They can analyse market data, competitor pricing, supply chain bottlenecks and customer behaviour to suggest optimal pricing and operational strategies. You can use these to help your client optimise financial performance and achieve better business planning.

AI algorithms can help make better financial decisions, specifically related to identifying investment opportunities. They can generate insights on financial performance and forecast future financial performance. They can provide real-time, deeper insights into a target company’s financial health by continuously monitoring transactions and identifying trends, anomalies and potential issues. This enables more informed decision-making for long-term financial needs related to special business activities.

REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

AI compliance tools can assist in understanding and interpreting complex regulatory documents and standards. They can help you keep up with the ever-changing regulatory environment without scouring the websites of relevant government or regulatory agencies. They can track changes in regulations and offer impact analysis. This helps in taking actions about updating compliance protocols in accounting systems and ensuring that reports comply with the latest rules and standards.

AI systems can also periodically and automatically generate compliance reports. This safeguards timely and accurate submissions to regulatory bodies. Also, automated compliance checks can reduce the risk of non-compliance and associated penalties.

RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk assessment and risk management are essential parts of doing business. Missing a predictable risk or overreacting to a small risk can have significant implications on financial and operational performance. AI algorithms and tools like ComplyAdvantage can identify patterns and anomalies in financial data that might indicate the risk of fraud or errors. AI can also assess the risk of financial misstatements, flaws in internal controls and liabilities in processes by analysing historical data and trends.

Once the risk factors are identified, AI tools can help assess the potential impact of the risk and what types of preventive measures you need to undertake. AI tools also provide valuable insights and help you prioritise mitigating actions.

AI tools can prepare multidimensional data visualisations to enable the identification of trends and outliers among key performance indicators. Once identified, you can deeply investigate them to assess the risk they pose. Interactive dashboards facilitated by AI tools allow you to drill down into data for deeper insights.

FORENSIC ACCOUNTING

Forensic accountants are regularly tasked with deciphering and reviewing countless complex financials in any given investigation. AI-powered risk intelligence tools like SymphanyAI, MindBridge and ThetaRay can help forensic accountants filter through vast volumes of data quickly, recognise patterns and detect abnormal transactions that might elude detection in a traditional investigative setting. Data classification techniques can furnish the foundation for forensic accounting to separate clusters of suspicious activities.

AI algorithms utilising natural language processing (NLP) can extract information from structured data sources, such as documents, contracts and invoices, as well as unstructured data sources, such as emails, social media chats and social media posts. They can review millions of lines of text at lightning speed, which would be practically impossible or cost-prohibitive for human reviewers. In addition, these tools can also conduct sentiment analysis on emotional aspects in texts and in identifying collusion among target individuals. All these can immensely help forensic accountants in determining fraudulent activities, their temporal sequence and associated culprits.

HOW DO I PREPARE MYSELF AND MY FIRM?

All these possibilities of using AI in accounting naturally raise the question: how do I prepare myself and my firm to take advantage of AI opportunities? Well, here are some quick suggestions:

  • Data analytics forms the basis for conducting any analysis with AI. Accountants with strong analytical skills will be able to use appropriate AI models to the given need and interpret AI-generated insights to make data-driven decisions. So, learn the basics of AI and data analytics to leverage AI tools effectively.
  • The effectiveness of AI depends on the quality and integrity of the input data. Insights generated by AI algorithms are as good as the data fed into them. Additionally, if the data used for training these AI models are flawed, the models will provide erroneous insights. Therefore, high-quality data are the foundation of good AI systems. So, learn about various data governance standards and data management practices.
  • According to a survey conducted by Thomson Reuters, the adoption rate of AI tools remains very low; only one in ten accounting and tax professionals are currently using them in their work. The lack of training often tops the list of reasons why accounting and audit teams do not use AI. Keep yourself knowledgeable about the latest developments in AI technologies and get trained on how they can help you and your organisation in improving the accounting services you provide.
  • Standalone AI tools are useful. But their real benefits are achieved by integrating them into your existing accounting software and systems. Compatibility and interoperability of these tools are crucial for their effectiveness and seamless utilisation. This can be complicated and may require a significant amount of investment in time and resources. If you understand your accounting systems and are comfortable using them, you will find integrating AI tools much less challenging and highly rewarding.
  • We can deploy AI to automate many tasks, but AI is just another tool. It can malfunction or be misused. Human oversight is essential when using this tool, especially in interpreting results, making decisions and handling exceptions. It is important that you understand the underlying assumptions and the limitations of the AI tools and techniques you are deploying.
  • AI involves the use of confidential financial information. Handling such sensitive proprietary data requires robust measures to protect against security breaches and ensure privacy. Additionally, when a breach does occur, there should be immediate activation of standard protocols to terminate the breach, control the damage and comply with data protection regulations. Learn about cybersecurity principles to ingrain cybersecurity awareness into your thinking and actions.
  • Using AI tools requires a critical thinking and problem-solving mindset. AI tools can provide information and insights but humans will have to interpret them and use them to make decisions. You can get insights using AI tools about some financial weaknesses in your client’s business. But the client has little knowledge about what sound financial management is so you will have to explain various parts of the financial report and implications for the client. There will be a growing need for accountants who can interpret AI-generated insights and apply them to business strategy and operations. So, enhance your analytical and explanatory skills through complex problem-solving exercises and real-world case studies.
  • AI is a double-edged sword which can cut both ways. Responsible use of AI is crucial for professional integrity and sound business practices. Transparency, accountability and compliance of AI tools with legal and ethical standards are essential for maintaining trust in your relationship with your clients and regulators. Learn about and adhere to stringent ethical standards and practices.

As discussed above, AI has the potential to transform accounting into an unprecedented level of efficient, accurate and insightful function. AI can not only help bring innovations and create growth opportunities but also redefine what it means to be an accountant. The Big Four accounting firms are investing billions of dollars in developing their own AI tools, such as KPMG Ingnite, Deloitte Cognitive Advantage, EY.ai, and PwC’s Responsible AI Framework. However, many small and medium-sized accounting firms are also increasingly developing and deploying AI into their systems and processes to remain competitive and create differentiation.

AI is making progress much faster than we think, but still there are kinks to be worked out. Humans will have to remain in the loop to provide oversight against embarrassing hallucinations by AI systems, especially generative AI models. Adopting a new technology like AI will always be a bumpy journey; but if you try to enjoy the ride, you will come out a happy winner.

References and Further Readings

  • “AI In Accounting and Bookkeeping: Braving the New Digital Frontier” by Bo Davis. 11th September, 2023. Forbes. https://www.forbes.com/sites/forbestechcouncil/2023/09/11/ai-in-accounting-and-bookkeeping-braving-the-new-digital-frontier/
  • “AI Use Cases” by Ernst & Young (EY). https://www.ey.com/en_gl/services/ai/use-cases
  • “How will AI affect accounting jobs?” by Thomson Reuters Tax & Accounting. 31st October, 2023. https://tax.thomsonreuters.com/blog/how-will-ai-affect-accounting-jobs/
  • “Latest Version of ChatGPT Passed a Practice CPA Exam” by S. J. Steinhardt. 23rd May, 2023. NYS Society of CPAs. https://www.nysscpa.org/article-content/latest-version-of-chatgpt-passed-a-practice-cpa-exam-052323
  • “PricewaterhouseCoopers to Pour $1 Billion into Generative AI” by Angus Loten. 26th April, 2023. The Wall Street Journal. https://www.wsj.com/articles/pricewaterhousecoopers-to-pour-1-billion-into-generative-ai-cac2cedd
  • “The Dawn of a New Era: AI’s Revolutionary Role In Accounting” by Neil Sahota. 22nd April, 2024. Forbes. https://www.forbes.com/sites/neilsahota/2024/04/22/the-dawn-of-a-new-era-ais-revolutionary-role-in-accounting/
  • “The Impact of Artificial Intelligence on Accounting and Finance” by Qi “Susie” Duong. 29th January, 2024. Institute of Management Accountants. https://www.imanet.org/research-publications/ima-reports/the-impact-of-artificial-intelligence-on-accounting-and-finance.
  • “The Role of Artificial Intelligence in Forensic Accounting and Litigation Consulting: Should Experts Be Concerned?” by David Zweighaft and Clay Kniepmann. Spring 2024. AICPA & CIMA. https://www.aicpa-cima.com/resources/download/the-role-of-artificial-intelligence-in-forensic-accounting-and-litigation
  • “What AI can do for auditors” by Anita Dennis. 1st February, 2024. Journal of Accountancy. https://www.journalofaccountancy.com/issues/2024/feb/what-ai-can-do-for-auditors.html.

Storytelling and Communication The Route to Success, From Fundraising or Financial Analysis

When viewing television, we see hundreds of advertisements that are constantly persuading us to buy or use something. There is something common between them. In the few and costly seconds that they are on air, most advertisements (Ad) tell stories: of a daughter surprising her parents with an expensive gift from her first salary, of an underprivileged child making it big, of obtaining a loan with ease to buy a car or about the memories of a family member in a life insurance Ad. When the target customers actually buy the product or service, their decision is based on its attributes such as price, quantity or other features, but yet, barring some exceptions, Ads seldom talk about these. Instead, the seller tells us stories. Why is this so? Should the Ads not be focussing on the very criteria we use to make the decision?

There’s a reason for this. Stories carry emotions, and people instantly connect with them. A survey by a Stanford University professor showed that at the end of a presentation, stories told were remembered by 63 per cent of the audience, whereas only 5 per cent recollected data or facts. Yet, as finance professionals, we attach huge importance to data. Neuroscientists have confirmed that decisions are often based on emotion, not logic, and people hear statistics but feel stories. Feeling makes an emotional connection with the audience and leads to decisions.

Each time we communicate, whether it is by way of a presentation to a potential investor or in a business review meeting or even when we argue at home, we are always trying to influence the listener. To do or not to do something, to agree with our point of view. Contrary to our perception, no matter how interesting the data, it does not appeal to emotion and so, does not result in action. So, we need to tell more stories when we communicate. The skills of storytelling and good communication show great importance in the success of our work — be it as a businessman or an employee. In the rest of this article, I write on these two activities that we as Chartered Accountants engage in: fundraising and analysing financial performance.

FUNDRAISING

With a booming world of start-ups and business expansion, many of us are engaged in working with investors to raise funds. When a founder wants to raise funds, while he/she will surely carry ideas, plans, facts and forecasts, the pitch’s success depends on how they communicate and tell the story around the idea. The numbers matter, but the story behind the numbers will excite the investor enough to fund the proposal. They first need to tell the story about the customer’s pain point — e.g., cab hire companies told stories of the challenges that were being faced by the customer in owning cars, parking, cash flow, waiting time to get a cab, etc. Such stories are persuasive. Steve Jobs once said: “The most powerful person in the world is the storyteller.” For Silicon Valley behemoths, storytelling has emerged as a powerful tool. They use it to shape the sentiment of their marketing content to attract new investors1.

The founder and their team need to tell stories at two levels: their personal one and their vision of their business. To quote the CEO of foundersuite.com2, “[F]ounders don’t leverage their own journeys nearly enough. That’s a big mistake, because most investors bet on the founders themselves, not just the products or companies.” Their background and the need to identify with it is what makes them special. How did they get to where they are now? Why do they care about the particular problem their product solves? These seem simple questions, but they allow a founder to do really deep and meaningful work. The second level is, of course, the “vision story, which paints the big picture of the idea of the venture. Inevitably, every founder will experience pushback, objections, and scepticism. The anecdote is to appeal to investor’s deeper motivations”.


1 https://longevity.technology/news/how-to-attract-investors-the-role-of-emotional-storytelling-in-longevity-investment/
2 https://www.forbes.com/sites/allbusiness/2023/07/21/how-storytelling-can-help-you-craft-an-investor-pitch-that-stands-out/?sh=6a57091053f1

Ashwath Damodaran, professor of finance and valuations at New York University’s Stern School of Business, who has written over a dozen books, narrates a story on YouTube, of the valuation of Uber in 2014. At the time, when the company was still in a nascent stage of business, he came up with a valuation of $6 Billion based on Uber being an urban car service company. Another expert and investor in Uber, told the story of Uber and the nature of Uber’s business as a global logistics company vs. an urban car service company. The valuation of the very same company was now several times higher. It is not merely about defining the scope of what the product can do or about the market. This story helps connect the idea to the product and to the market.

Good storytelling requires an in-depth understanding of the customer’s problem and preferences. This in turn requires a good amount of research. Studying in the market in a hurry and limiting it to a few customers and use cases does not help. How you tell the story of your product, its application and utility, tells the investor if you understood the customer problem that you are trying to solve. Founders also commit the mistake of trying to prove that their product or solution is unique when, in fact, it may not be so. They sometimes focus on the goodness of their product and invariably categorise it as unique without competition.

Communicating with investors is another critical aspect of fundraising. For one, it is necessary to network with potential investors and communicate with them periodically, even if you’re not raising funds at that point in time. It helps keep the idea of the product alive in the marketplace. The other aspect is the seriousness of every meeting. Every single one of them is important to the investors who have put in their money. I have come across meetings where the founders or their CFOs are sometimes casual about them, more so when they become familiar and comfortable with the investor. They do not come sufficiently prepared for the meeting and sometimes have an approach to a problem raised by saying, “Don’t worry, we will manage it” or “We will solve it”. This is not good communication. It can leave the investors uncomfortable that the investee company has not thought through some important aspects of a problem or are not anticipating events enough. Even if they appear friendly, investors are not friends and every interaction requires the nature of communication to be formal and serious.

FINANCIAL ANALYSIS

Chartered Accountants are very good at analysis. It is one of our core strengths to provide insights to the organisations and businesses with support. But merely providing analysis is no longer sufficient. We have seen that if we want to influence decisions, we need to present it in a way that makes it interesting to the listener and motivates them to take action. For this, we need to package the data and build the skill of presenting our analysis in an interesting way by using stories. Storytelling does not mean that we have to bend facts or change the contents. Finance professionals are the messengers of truth and that expectation of us, which goes with the fiduciary responsibility, will never change. However, we must be able to say it in a way that is consumable, visually appealing and can be actioned upon. To be heard, we have to grab the attention of the audience. Data needs to be woven into stories. It inspires change compared to a general pitch, which may be hard for the audience to visualise.

Think of it this way. We all give gifts. Let’s say it is a wristwatch. Do we ever take a watch in our hand and give it that way to a friend / relative? No. Never. We always put it in a nice box, gift wrap it, maybe add a personal note, and then hand it over. The experience of the receiver is very different. Wrapping a story around data is very similar and very necessary.

We sometimes walk into performance review meetings believing that our data is powerful, will speak for itself and that we won’t really have to do much talking to excite or convince the audience. That, the data will automatically result in quality discussions and lead to necessary actions being taken. The worse the performance, the greater our belief as finance professionals that the listener should feel morally obliged to take quick corrective actions. However, as we read earlier, emotions are what appeal to people, not facts or data. So, we need to build emotions by weaving stories around the data.

DO WE HAVE ENOUGH STORIES TO TELL?

Most certainly, there are stories all around us. There are stories to tell about the difficulty in closing the books in the early years of the company, the struggle of not having enough cash to pay salaries, the journey of reducing Days Sales Outstanding (DSO) from an ugly 120 days to 80 days, an estimate of the market or significant business assumption that went wrong or dealing with a difficult customer or market segment. Using another illustration, we often sensitise people to the need to procure only from empanelled vendors. We can begin such discussions by telling stories of frauds in other companies that made the news, highlighting the ethical risks of using non-empanelled vendors. These stories will help the audience relate to our pitch and connect with the purpose of the company policy. We have to be factual, provide context, focus on the key messages and persuade the listener. So, going forward, before making a presentation, you may want to consider making a quick checklist of these points and ask yourself:

Have I provided context?

Will it help the audience focus on the key message?

Does it appeal to the right Emotions? And so on…

So, building these skills and embedding them into the different activities we perform is not just important but also has a high return on investment. It is time we made the shift from focusing on what we say to how we say it. So go for it!

Why Gen Z Should Be Chartered Accountants?

Born from 1997 to 2012, Gen Z — or Zoomers — have grown up with mobile phones, social media and, of course, the internet. With ease, they hop between the planet Earth, and the Metaverse in their digital ‘avatars’. These ‘digital nagriks (natives)’ are the most globally connected generation in human history. While the world gets older, India is getting younger, with Gen Z comprising 27 per cent of its population — higher than the world’s average of 24 per cent and much higher than the average Gen Z population of China, Europe and North America, at 17 per cent each1. This emerging generation is steering the future of work, in an environment where expectations change rapidly, where careers are being shaped by a multitude of issues, including shifting social behaviours and values.


1. NASSCOM Report – “Gen Z and Millennials: Reshaping the Future of Workforce” – December 2022

UNDERSTANDING GEN Z

The economic and societal backdrop of a developing nation have shaped their behaviours and their views on work. Yes, the remuneration package matter to Gen Z — but other things matter even more. As some members of this generation would be looking out for a professional qualification, it is imperative that we draw their attention towards chartered accountancy — which offers a lifetime of rewarding benefits. So, what does Gen Z expect from a professional career?

Job security

Gen Z is worried for job security, and their concern is certainly understandable. This generation witnessed their parents going through the global financial crisis and also experienced something that none of the previous working generations has ever seen — the full wrath of COVID-19 — which created a domino of mayhem and disruptions. Seeing their parents and families suffer from financial instability, they have a stronger focus on finding stable careers. They would obviously choose a career that would provide long-term employability, allowing them to earn, save, and expand their knowledge.

Continual skill acquisition

Gen Z attacks their stress about job security with a tried and tested strategy, i.e., they would choose a career that can provide them with continuous skill acquisition and opportunities to future proof their professional life. Gen Z would gravitate towards a career option that provides opportunities for continuous learning and aids the acquisition of new capabilities. Gen Z believes that new skills would bring multiple benefits: help generate new and innovative solutions, support the development of a more energised and committed workforce, and foster inter-generational learning opportunities.

Gaining international experience

Experience is the best teacher. As a truly connected global generation, it is not surprising that Gen Z sees opportunities to pursue international career experiences high on the priority list. Gen Z would step outside their comfort zone with ease to gain experience that would give them a competitive advantage, e.g., the experience of advanced business processes / practices, a higher level of confidence, opportunity to develop cross-cultural communication skills.

Technology — an enabler

Nowadays, Gen Zers can frequently be seen interacting with Artificial intelligence (‘AI’) powered conversational chatbots — the smart technology currently in rage. This chatbot learns and grow from the existing database, deliver humanised experiences by delivering bespoke answers to customer queries and providing relevant suggestions. AI technologies, natural language processing and blockchain are further boosting the speed and scale of decision-making and providing the tech architecture for collaborative working and better insights. These digital natives are interested in a professional qualification which will enable them to harness the potential of these smart technologies. Not surprisingly, they are also concerned about the impact of smart technology on their own job opportunities for the future.

Protecting the planet

Gen Z believes that solving today’s environmental/societal issues is just as important as making profits. Gen Zers are highly interested in finding work that is linked with social responsibility and that contributes to the betterment of our planet. They would like to bring their talent and tech know-how to pursue careers with higher purpose and do jobs that make a difference to the planet.

A SHOUTOUT TO GEN Z FOR CHARTERED ACCOUNTANCY

Chartered accountancy is deeply rooted in its strong heritage, and its contribution to Indian businesses and the global economy is indelible. It is purpose-driven with specific opportunities to make a real difference to broader issues. Chartered accountancy provides a breadth of skills and the portability of the finance roles and across industries. These factors can help mitigate Gen-Z concerns about job security and provide a passport to multiple careers and roles in varied businesses. Following broad career opportunities emerge for Gen Z.

Business entrepreneurs

From being the ‘Indian Warren Buffett’ or establishing the world’s fourth largest bank or being the Chairman of one of the largest global conglomerates, chartered accountants have emerged as prominent entrepreneurs. Their success stories not only underscore the value of chartered accountancy qualification but serves as an inspiration for Gen Z. Their professional background enables them to make well-informed decisions, negotiate deals, make strategic investments, manage finances effectively, and ensure the sustainability of businesses.

The explosive growth of digital payments and the success of fintech (start-up) companies are creating newer entrepreneurial opportunities. There has been an uptick in the number of entrepreneurs expressing interest in this field; most happen to be chartered accountants themselves, because they understand the ballgame best. Several chartered accounting aspirants seem to be gravitating towards fintech — being aided by the vibrant start-up culture in the country.

Modern finance leaders

A highly effective modern finance leader is someone who can ‘join the dots’ between functions in their organisation. This quality requires a broad mix of skills such as knowing the business inside out, achieving business agility, driving performance with the right key performance indicators, and ensuring insightful financial reporting to achieve short-term and long-term goals. The field of finance is buzzing — with India leading the adoption of some of the novel trends in financial inclusion, e.g., fintech is spearheading the country’s financial inclusion agenda through hyper-focused products for end consumers and embedded financial products and services like banking, payments, lending, co-branded cards, and more. Career-wise, being a chartered accountant is an ideal pathway to finance leadership roles for Gen Zers in any organisation. Gen Zers, as a Chief Financial Officer, would take a seat at the strategy planning table and help influence the future direction of the company.

Assurance champions

From auditing to risk management, from corporate governance to compliance roles, a dynamic and challenging environment is driving assurance needs across businesses. Increased stakeholder scrutiny of organisation performance and processes and the ever-growing need for reliable information is further fuelling the demand for high-quality assurance professionals.

The assurance profession is transforming the look and experience of roles of the future, with the usage of cutting-edge automated tools and techniques, e.g., anomaly detectors — which uses machine learning and AI for sensing anomalous entries in large databases. Though technology is an enabler, it takes human insight and professional experience to ultimately understand the context underlying the output as well as the causation of the output relative to the inputs provided. The bright future of assurance makes it a compelling career choice for Gen Z in any professional services firm.

Tax advocates

Tax policy plays an important role in any economy — from funding public services to incentivising public and organizational behaviour. The increasing digitalization of the global economy has seen greater focus by the OECD2 and its BEPS 2.03 project to address its impact on direct taxation, particularly when organizations and individuals operate in markets with limited physical presence. Unlike direct taxes, indirect taxes are not a bottom-line cost for many clients, but the compliance requirements can be complex and can impact cash flows.


2. Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development
3. Base Erosion and Profit Shifting

When Gen Z train as tax practitioners, they will acquire skills that can be relevant to almost any domain of their choosing — including working in a firm providing tax advisory services or working as the tax head of an organisation operating in multiple tax jurisdictions. This will not only put their mathematical side of the brain at work but also encourage them to solve complex challenges using logic and tax expertise. Thanks to this, Gen Z won’t have to worry about being stuck in just one or two fields — and can explore as much as they want to.

Data explorers

Growing data sources present exponential analytics-led roles for driving improved and faster insight, formulating competitor strategies, or facing risk challenges. The true value of data analysis comes when decisions are made using insights derived from the data — given impetus by the growth in the volume of data and breakthroughs in technology, e.g., how cab-hailing companies identify demand for cab at any given time or location. Determination of the economic value of businesses using appropriate valuation models — especially for start-ups is an evolving area for chartered accountants. Backed by regulations e.g., the Companies Act, 2013 and valuation standards, the emergence of valuation professionals is on rise.

To uncover the economic value of businesses or provide deeper insights, a professional must first understand the business context. Not only do chartered accountants understand this context, but they also live it. Organisations foresee a great future in these emerging knowledge domains and call upon the tech-savvy Gen Z to plunge into big data analytics/valuation of businesses and leverage the huge opportunities available.

Trusted advisors

Organizations are capitalising on risks caused by disruption. They are updating their risk functions to generate fresh value and provide a competitive advantage. With growing capabilities in tools and technologies to support these changes, business and strategy consulting is a real opportunity.

As a qualified chartered accountant, Gen Z will be able to provide strategic advice to help achieve optimal — and sustainable — results. Whether a business is in crisis or is simply facing an operational challenge, Gen Z would be professionally equipped to help management teams identify and prioritise the most critical issues, stabilise the business, establish a leadership and stakeholder consensus around the solution, and deliver tangible results quickly. Merger and acquisition advisory is another attractive area where Gen Z can refine entity growth strategy, perform deal sourcing, conduct diligence, and achieve greater synergies during merger and acquisition integration.

Technology-centric roles are growing rapidly, and those in Gen Z who want to apply their ‘digital’ skills to help solve real business issues will have lots of opportunities. With increased digitisation comes the risk of cyber security. Gen Z can play a critical role in implementing and executing a strategy and overarching cyber program that allows for rigorous, structured decision-making and financial analysis of cyber risks.

HOW CAN EMPLOYERS HARNESS THE POTENTIAL OF GEN Z?

If an organisation is looking to attract, hire and retain incoming Gen Z talent, it will need a smart strategy in place. They should first try to understand them and then acknowledge the potential and ideas they have that can revolutionise the workplace and leave a mark on the organisation. Some recommendations include the following.

Mentor, but don’t teach

Gen Z expects to be led by example. If you can’t convince them with your approach, Gen Zers won’t follow your word. From their perspective, a title in the corporate hierarchy fails to impress them. An increasing number of CEOs and founders are giving up on the attributes of power (be it a separate office, a tie, or a badge in a gold frame). Humble leadership comes to the forefront for this generation because it matches Gen Z’s values perfectly.

Let them make mistakes

Gen Z sees mistakes more often as experiences and lessons learned. Experienced professionals should support them and observe them — but shouldn’t micromanage. Give feedback right away. When explaining what went wrong, be consistent and patient. Creating a culture of continual feedback and acknowledgement is essential in engaging Gen Z. Identifying new ways of recognising exceptional performance and sharing with peers and across the organisation, as well as articulating what their specific contribution, is essential to motivation. It’s really powerful for an organisation to visibly demonstrate how they have listened to Gen Z feedback by implementing ideas that help shape future strategies and policies.

Employers can create spaces such as “innovation hubs or sandboxes” within their organisations that allow for experimental thinking and flow of ideas that can positively impact the future of their organisation, drive change management and better engagement.

Integrate organisational purpose with individual needs

Gen Z is keen to understand the ‘big picture’ – what their contribution would be to the vision of the enterprise. Gen Z is attracted to organisations that can offer security through long-term career prospects. Strengthening this aspect with interventions that particularly support career development, such as regular career conversations, is powerful. Identifying opportunities for Gen Z to grow in a way that caters to their uniqueness is vital to their engagement and retention.

Exploit their digital mastery

Organisations should create roles that are tech-focused, as Gen Z is known to attack business problems differently by leveraging technology and rapidly creating solutions. Companies must institute a culture of constant innovation using digital solutions to keep pace with the societal changes that are impacting their future business. Boards can help management teams prioritise technology investment and iterative efforts with an eye towards the future. Enterprises should see Gen Z as fantastic ambassadors and early adopters to encourage the rest of the business to use digital.

Rethink learning: short and visual

Gen Z watches YouTube videos, listens to podcasts, and binges shows. Organisations need to create learning content that will grasp their attention. Mobile learning opportunities and new learning platforms continue to evolve, and everything from gamification to simulation and Augmented and Virtual Reality are becoming staple offerings for employers that understand how Gen Z want to acquire knowledge and learn. Peer-to-peer learning opportunities are also powerful.

Don’t forget to have fun!

For Gen Zers, work is part of life — the hard division into 9-5 work is blurred. The younger generation wants to feel good not so much at work as while working. Smile, play, have fun, organise social initiatives, charity runs, and donations etc. This is what interests and engages them. Create an excuse for integration, fun, and joint laughter.

MAKING THE PROFESSION MORE ‘COOL’

With India targeting a USD 5 trillion economy by 2025, many finance professionals (auditors / corporates) are getting extremely jittery4. Reaching this goal would not only require a gargantuan amount of investments – ranging from USD 5 trillion to USD 7 trillion but, more importantly, would definitely require a reliable pipeline of modern financial professionals. Veterans are grappling with a chasm in talent gap as well as skill gap — as professionals lack the ability to support broader business goals across various industries. Addressing these challenges requires a collective effort from industry stakeholders, including firms, educational institutions, professional bodies, and recruiters.


4. The Gap in India’s Economy Worrying an Ex-Deloitte Boss — India edition of Bloomberg on 21st September, 2023

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India — our alma mater — has already formulated the new curriculum in line with International Education Standards and National Education Policy, 2020, after considering the inputs from various stakeholders. The new curriculum comes into effect from 1st July, 2023 and would equip future chartered accountants with the requisite technical knowledge and professional skills to perform well at the workplace. The new curricula emphasise more on the development of higher-order skills of application, analysis and interpretation. A special feature is the multi-disciplinary case study at the Final level, which would help students integrate professional knowledge in different subject areas, analyse and apply such knowledge in problem-solving. While implementing the new curricula, the Institute should make serious efforts to.

Dispel common misconceptions plaguing the profession: It is a very common belief that accountants just have to work on calculations, and creativity is not required for the same. However, this is untrue, as finding tax deductions and constructing a client’s financial portfolio benefit from creativity. Another common belief is that it is extremely difficult to clear the exams. Debunking the misconceptions about the profession would certainly invigorate the much-needed force into the talent pipeline.

Incorporate practical case studies: Case studies are effective ways to get students to practically apply their skills and their understanding of learned facts to a real-world situation. They are particularly useful where situations are complex, real-life case studies in the learning material will provide a more engaging experience for aspiring chartered accountants.

Provide career counselling: Career counselling should include personalised guidance and support to help the students make informed decisions about their career path. It should involve assessing one’s interests, skills, values, and personality traits to help identify potential career paths that align with their goals and aspirations.

Keep the curricula agile: Flexible, innovative and agile curricula offer many advantages over more traditional approaches. Agile curricula would deliver better results by focusing on learners and provide the flexibility to include employability skills matched to the market’s needs. The curriculum would also be open to incremental improvement, ensuring that it gets better and better.

CLOSING ENTRIES

Chartered accountants are the foundation base of the economy. Being nation-builders, the qualification of a chartered accountant would prepare Gen Z with the skills and knowledge to achieve anything they want in the field of finance. In the new world of work, career routes and opportunities for continuous learning and acquiring new capabilities will continue to open up for chartered accountants as pathways diversify further. Irrespective of role, sector, industry, or geography, it’s the application of these vital skills and the sheer diversity of future possibilities afforded by a background in chartered accountancy that be a key attraction for Gen Z. It seems that chartered accountancy remains a pretty good bet for Gen Z and continues to be a gateway to a good career with a positive image.

The Competition that can Beat You!

AI will not replace you. A person using AI will.
– @Svpino

Why an article about AI?

You are reading this article because it is overdue! BCAJ has carried articles on voice commands. We also have a feature called Tech Mantra, which carries short tech quarks. In February 2023, there was a webcast on Chat GPT, which you can view on the BCAS YouTube channel.

However, this article is different. It is from a non-expert stoked by what he is seeing. My sole reason to write is: AI is reaching us faster, and intermingling and integrating with what we do – in its pace and reach. AI has come out from ‘data and code rooms’ to ‘living rooms’ that even accountants are writing about AI. The entire experience for me, which involved looking at the AI landscape and trying different Apps and portals, was like sitting in a magic show. It was so fascinating, that I could not stop myself from writing an article leading to a call for action for fellow BCAJ readers.

Today, our best estimates suggest that at least 2.5 quintillion bytes of data are produced every day (that’s 2.5 followed by 18 zeros!).1  A more reliable report by Statista, said that data created, captured, and replicated on the internet was approximately 64.2 zettabytes2 in 2020. (one zettabyte = one trillion gigabytes).


1. Google Search, cloudtweaks.com
2. equal to 2 to the 70th power or 1 billion terabyte or 1 trillion gigabytes

AI has the potential to transform the way we use such data (obviously parts of it). With that potential, AI can enable us to make better decisions, better analysis, improve performance, make models, automate, make predictions, and help provide better services to customers. Of course, the list is longer, but due to my own limitation and for the sake of focus, I am restricting it to one feature that is emerging today.

AI

AI stands for Artificial Intelligence. A system that acts like humans (Alan Turing). It refers to the development of computer systems that can perform tasks that typically require human intelligence, such as visual perception, speech recognition, decision-making, and natural language understanding.

In its simplest form, artificial intelligence is a field, which combines computer science and robust datasets, to enable problem-solving. It also encompasses sub-fields of machine learning and deep learning, which are frequently mentioned in conjunction with artificial intelligence.

If, all this sounds too unfamiliar – then you are doing too much technical work. You need to catch up!

What can AI do for us?

Why spend time on AI? What can it do for me? Well, today the question is what can it not do for you? You have known Siri, or Speech to Text on WhatsApp. You have seen customer bots / virtual agents on websites, which answer basic questions say on a bank site.

Countless applications today can ease our life. Let us look at one area: content generation. Would you like assistance with drafting a visa application letter? Or use an AI portal that creates instant content in a PPT format. Perhaps write a poem for someone’s birthday!

There is an open AI platform that does all of this plus more. When I used it, it seemed like a Gin (I meant the Ginie in Alladin story) you can summon and get stuff done. All you need to do is give clear instructions as to what you want and how you want it. There are instructions called ‘PROMPTS’ and they trigger suggestions and answers. One needs to learn how to write Prompts. Let’s take an example of you having written an article. Now you want to make it humourous! AI will do that for you. Want to sound like an EXPERT, tell AI to change the tone of the article to make it sound more like an expert. Make that article a bit shorter from 4000 to 2400 words, sure get a draft in seconds. Put an extension on your browser, and it will create a draft response after reading an incoming email. Want to summarise a long decision you are tired of reading, AI will summarise it. Let’s go to the famous and easy-to-reach, AI tool then!

CHAT GPT

While we were busy meeting some timeline, and we read a bit about it in the news in the passing, most people I talked to never used it firsthand. So, do go to chat.openai.com and create a login. Start by asking anything – your next travel plan in Himachal, make it, give it as day-wise literary, tell it how many days you have and what local sightseeing can be done. Well, all the basic stuff you like to test out. See how it gets back with answers and suggestions.

But when you come to content – say a post on a topic or a 1200 words summary from a decision, it starts to roll out magic. It helps with content in many ways: suggestive answers, restyle writing (make it entertaining or educational or sound simpler or like an expert etc.). Want it to translate the entire article – ask for it.

Caveat: This platform accepts inputs only in text format when I checked last. It is also updated till September 2021, but a new version 4 is out in March 2023. You also have to fine-tune and update its first cut content, which in most cases is pretty good for all basic purposes.

The skills you need: you must know how to ASK to get the right output. These are called PROMPTS as I said earlier. Bad questions, trash answers. Prompts are clear instructions about what you want and how you want it. If you need columns then write that you want columns. Look online at effective PROMPTS and learn about them separately. Perhaps the next short article can be on Prompts.

Well, here is some cool stuff it can do for you as a CA (just in case the above para didn’t enthuse you enough). I am giving the first few examples along with PROMPTS.

1. Make a Checklist

PROMPT: make a checklist for the interview of an experienced CA for the tax department

PROMPT: make a checklist of things to carry and things to be prepared for travelling to Madhya Pradesh for seven days in December with a family consisting 2 children between ages 7-9

2. Make a Scorecard

PROMPT: Make a scorecard comparing in a table format years wise comparison of growth of PBT of Reliance Industries Limited versus SENSEX PBT growth from 2000 to 2022.

PROMPT: Can you provide details of the last 5 IPL winners and runners-up? I want the following to include the month, runners-up name, winner name, the score made by the winning team, and stadium name.

3. Rewrite

PROMPT: Rewrite the following paragraph in a more inspiring manner…

4. Creating Replies

PROMPT: Respond to the <<<URL of a post>>>

Those are a few examples of PROMPTS. You can make use of Chat GPT for these actions too followed by PROMPTS in some cases:

a) Summarise – “Summarize this article into a bulleted list of the most important information [paste article]”

b) Brainstorm – “Brainstorm 20 trending ideas for a Twitter thread on recent breaking AI news”

c) Rewrite for a Beginner -”Rewrite the response as if I was a beginner”

d) Create an Outline, and expand outline points thereafter – “Create an outline for an article on Ergonomics at Office and then expand each point with a 100 words’ description”

e) Convert YouTube script into tweets

f) Copy the script, and ask Chat GPT to summarise it for you into tweets.

g) Suggest titles – “Suggest a title for the Article [paste the article]”

h) Ask for Blog Ideas on a topic

i) Create a short training session for example on Ind AS 115

j) Adopt a writing tone (Formal, Sarcastic, Persuasive, Descriptive)

k) Make a Table– Create a table with the 15 biggest Indian temple towns. In the first column put the name of the town, in the second the area of the city, and in the third the state in which it is located.

Caveat: Chat GPT is already outdated although still in use. The next version of sorts, called AUTO GPT is the new IN THING!!! Also, know that there are tools, where your AI generated content can be detected. This means that there is a risk of plagiarism, so check that. Some tools that detect AI generated content are: Contentatscale.ai ; Writer.com; Copyleaks.com ; Smodin.io ; Originality.ai etc..

AI: Present Prospects and Future estimates

Goldman Sachs has estimated that 30 Cr full times jobs may be affected by AI.3 On the other hand, there is some good news: A report said 45000 job openings4 in AI as of February 2023 for data scientists and machine learning engineers. Currently, 400,000 people are employed in AI. Bangalore has the second largest AI talent pool in the world. $136B is the global market. $115B revenue AI can contribute to the global economy. $12.3B in revenue was generated in India in 2022. Salaries are Rs. 10-14 Lac for freshers5.


3. March 30, 2023, NDTV Web Portal
4. Times News Network, 23rd March 2023
5. Teamlease Report, Business Standard 21st March, 2023

Call for action

The above content and thoughts are like peeking into the door. One will need to open the door and step inside. Each one of us will have to make a special effort to see how we can integrate AI into our practice and life. If you are making your firm’s budget, keep a new line item for investments/expenses on AI. Consider adding metrics such as AI-related expenses as a percentage of revenue/total expenses or AI investments as a percentage of total investments/assets. It is important to include these new line items in your budget and track their actual financial impact on your company’s performance and position. There are numerous courses online and the one I did was a lot of fun too! Although you might not get structured CPE for this, but the value you will derive will be extraordinary.

Finally, let me end with the disclosure that what you have read is NOT written by an AI and I have no interest in any website/apps stated earlier nor do I recommend them.

Chatting Up About India: Technology Not Just For a Few, But For All

INDIA UP–STEP CHANGE ACCELERATION
Recently, I had a friend and her family visit us. The next day, she sent a thank you message to convey her enjoyment. She also messaged to say that her eight-year-old son felt our conversation reminded him of Elon Musk, as we talked in an out-of-the-box way about India and many other contemporary topics.

Just last month, the parking contractor near my office changed. When I asked for the new bank details to make an advance payment for the month, he said he didn’t remember his bank account but pulled out a laminated QR code card. He asked, “Why don’t you pay with this; Don’t you have a mobile to pay?”

Both these experiences suggest two points: An eight-year-old knows who Elon Musk is and what he does, and looks up to him, and even the parkingwala carries a laminated QR code card for bank transfers.

These are important changes: how and what children think, who they look up to, and, therefore, what they aspire for have changed. At the street level, the common man wants to receive funds digitally. This is perhaps where we are after 75 years of swaraj looking more ambitious and more confident about the future we want to make. We are using technology that rewards the common man. I haven’t seen this at any time in my life where structural changes at the bottom of the pyramid are visible in how people like things to be done.

SPREAD, SCALE AND SPEED

These are just two examples, but we see this happening all across. Indians are not doing MORE OF SOMETHING, but MORE INDIANS are doing what they did not do previously. This is a MAJOR change. When household loans increase, the newspapers report about Indians taking more loans. Actually, it’s not more finance taken by households; it is more households taking finance.

This is the current “Ubiquitous State of India”, the word used by Mr Nandan Nilekani. What is happening is dramatic for its spread, scale and speed. As an Indian born and brought up in a closed economy and who didn’t know anything better for years, this is the best time I have seen so many people going through. As a 20-year-old, I have stood in line to submit forms at ROC, Mumbai. I have had people come home to make phone calls or STD calls. I have seen my father get a Padmini car after a request to the MD of Premier Auto. I saw the first colour TV come home in 1982 around the Asian Games, and only a couple of people had it in our apartment block. Over the years, I have seen changes in many areas percolate so slowly within society — without scale, with hesitation, with controlled supply. The generation before me saw the White Revolution (and India today is the largest milk producer in the world). In the past, India had to dance to the tunes of America for food grains, while today, India produces record food grain production, and its buffer stocks are higher than they should be consistently. My father went to America in the late 1960s and got a few US dollars for a trip of several weeks as currency was limited. The list is endless.

Despite challenges, the ‘change’ that we are witnessing today is ubiquitous in spread, universal in reach, unifying in consequence, empowering people, and democratising the nation, like never before.

#INDIAUP
We had Mr Sajjan Jindal addressing members on BCAS Founding Day 2023. He spoke about how India used to be like a woman who was pregnant but never delivered. This has changed. We are now seeing DELIVERY.

I use the heading of this paragraph as a hashtag (#) for my social media posts on LinkedIn whenever I am happy about a new statistic about India. I was inspired to write this article only to gather and connect so many data points and articulate some of the orbit-changing movements in celebration of 75 years of Swaraj. Some of these changes will not only nourish the good and desirable and bring prosperity to many in Bharat but will bring well-being to many beyond our borders.
 
For this quarter, BCAS has a theme of Technology. And so, I will cover aspects of the technology spectrum that have and are changing our lives — not just for a few but for all. Here are some of our favourite moments that have transformed the Bharat of our times.

JIO — Connecting Bharat

The JIO revolution is nothing short of magic1. From its launch on 5th September, 2016, India changed. Mr Ambani said in that epic talk: “India and Indians cannot afford to be left behind. Today, India is ranked 155th in the world for mobile broadband internet access out of 230 countries. Jio is conceived to change this.” 4 GB per day of free data for months was a great beginning to penetrate the market. Indians consumed 200 MB of data per month prior to Jio. Within months, India was the world’s top data-consuming nation — 1 billion GB of data per month. Free data calls made those who didn’t have phones buy a handset. Cost-effective handsets enabled crores of people and brought them into the connected world. By 2018, access to the internet in the hinterland went up to 35 per cent. The cost of data which was R250 for 1 GB pre Jio, came down to R13 per GB in 2022, a 95 per cent fall in cost in six years. Tell me one country in our league that has witnessed the same at this scale.

From being telephone short to booking calls and doing telexes, to telephone expensive, we saw free voice and data for months. Data consumption today: from 0.5 GB a month to 0.5 GB a day per person (30X increase in data consumption in 2016–17). Jio revolution cannot be exaggerated. Bharatiya Tech Timeline (if there were to be one) can be named Jio Era — Before Jio Era (BJE) and After Jio Era (AJE)!

Without this moment, the Digital Dream would be just that — a dream. In 2016, only 32.64 Crore transactions were done through UPI. The broadband subscribers across all service providers increased from 1.923 Crores (September 2016) to 80 Crores (June 2022), and the average internet speed increased five times between March 2016 and April 2022 (23.16 MBPS).

Unicorns can also be compared to BJE and AJE: from four unicorns to 100 plus in 2023. Zomato formally thanked Jio2. During lockdowns, Jio Fibre and many others became a lifeline for many people and businesses, from movies to work to studies to ordering groceries to YouTubers making videos … the list is endless. Indian governments and politicians have a special detestation for entrepreneurs and money. I think it’s time someone thanked Jio and others who were forced to join in for enabling this change. Many of the social welfare schemes wouldn’t be possible in their reach and scale without this transformation across the telecom sector! India today has reached a total tele density of 85 per cent, and wireless is 97.65 per cent of the total3.

____________________________________________________________

1   I am a Reliance shareholder, but a Bharatiya
first.

2   23rd July, 2021, livemint.com

3   TRAI Report, 31st May, 2023

UPI — Integration of Bharat by QR
UPI was conceived in 2013. It was implemented in 2016. In October 2016, UPI did 100,000 transactions. In October 2022, it did 865 Crores (8.65 Billion) of transactions a month4. The goal of the National Payments Corporation of India (NPCI) is 1 Billion transactions a day. In 2023, UPI is the world’s largest digital transaction system, with 30 Crore (300 million) Indians using it, and 50 Crore (500 Million) merchants accepting it5. It took decades to reach 50–60 Lac POS machines (Point of Sale — Cards Swiping Machines). POS are costly hardware and have much higher charges by banks / card companies. With UPI, merchants don’t need hardware, just a QR code! Not only that, but anyone can also put in a QR code, and anyone can pay with that QR code (a PhonePe QR code can accept from the Google Pay App). So, from 60 Lac POS machines in 60 years to touching 60 Crores QR codes in six to seven years is a record.

Rs. 14 Trillion is the value of monthly real-time mobile payments6. Imagine the formalisation that has happened due to UPI / wallets. Money that stayed outside the system is now part of the system. UPI is adding voice commands to this in the local language or doing offline transactions of smaller values. In the LIC IPO, more than 50 per cent applications came through UPI.

____________________________________________________________

4   Indiastack.org

5   https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/blogs/voices/the-rise-of-upi-transforming-the-way-indians-transact/

6  
Indiastack.org

The benefits have been phenomenal. It is cost-effective and mostly free. UPI is useful for small purchases, unlike the cash hassles of change to give or take and torn / fake notes. It is instant and secure. It is much easier than using cards. Safety and Privacy have so far been under control. UPI means that money doesn’t leave the bank account, and therefore, one earns interest. All credit goes to NPCI, formed by RBI and IBA.

To my mind, UPI, too, is nothing short of magic. I have lived in a world that sent cheques for collection. Paper clearing was 1 per cent in 2022 and 44.7 per cent in 2013. Retail electronic clearing was 23.6 per cent in 2013; it is now 81.4 per cent in 2022.

In value terms, UPI is 86 per cent of the Indian GDP7 in 2022. 40 per cent of all global digital payments go via UPI8. It is the world’s largest real-time payments network, with $1.2 Trillion transactions on UPI and $1 Billion in FY2016–17 to $560 Billion in 2020–21.

_______________________________________________________

7.https://www.nic.in/blogs/digital-payments-driving-the-growth-of-digital-economy/#:~:text=Interestingly%2C%20the%20total%20UPI%20transaction,volume%20stands%20on%2083.75%20Billion

8 https://government.economictimes.indiatimes.com/news/digital-payments/upi-processes-40-of-global-real-time-payments-nipl-ceo-ritesh-shukla/100840766#:~:text=UPI%20processes%2040%25%20of%20global,CEO%20Ritesh%20Shuk%2C%20ET%20Governmenttransaction,volume%20stands%20on%2083.75%20Billion

Everyone from the chaiwala to paanwala to sandwichwala to taxi wala to bhuttawala to paperwala — every other ‘wala’ — take money via QR codes. QR is the default mode of payment. Today, 15 per cent of Indian businesses and 99 per cent transactions are cleared digitally. Income digitisation means it is impossible to go ‘black’ due to the money trail.

India Embraces Digital Payments Over Cash, Even for a 10-Cent Chai. The size and scale of India’s digital fast payments is enormous. It is 11x of USA & Europe & 4x of China. Mobiles are the virtual bank. – The New York Times.9

Here is a snapshot from the NPCI website:

Year

Volume
in Mn Transactions

Value in Rs crores

2021 – April

2641

4,93, 663

2022 – April

4,617

8,31,993.11

2023 – March

8,651

14,04,950.59

 

___________________________________________________________

9.https://twitter.com/amitabhk87/status/163113899008981401640%25%20of%20global,CEO%20Ritesh%20Shukla%2C%20ET%20Governmenttransaction,volume%20stands%20on%2083.75%20Billion



FASTag
This single step has saved fuel, time and dealing in cash at the toll booth. This is another offering from NPCI. Cars now do not have to stop most of the time. FASTag alone has saved Rs. 70,000 Crores ($8.4 Billion) of fuel10. Toll plazas taking FASTag, as per this report, have gone up from 770 to 1228 as of July 2023. FASTag is also used at several parking lots. The toll revenue has increased, and leakages decreased: from $770 Million in 2013–24 to $5 Billion in 2022–23, as per the same report. FASTag is the UPI for the vehicle.

Now combine the above with GST and good roads. The transporter that took seven days to reach Delhi can manage it in half the time. This improves his capital usage efficiency by 100 per cent as his truck can do twice the work in the same amount of time, and therefore, his ROI also goes up, so does his cash flow, and so does his repayment of loan he may have taken to buy the vehicle.
 
Financial Inclusion — Weaving prosperity
What could have taken 46–47 years happened in nine years11! The bank account opening in 2014 was a magic transformation. There is a Rs. 1.99 Lac Crores12 balance in the Jan Dhan Accounts alone. The pride of a rural sister having a bank account and being able to walk into a bank is priceless. Zero balance accounts have helped people open bank accounts often for the first time. From a hugely unbanked country to one of the most banked countries. RBI announced a composite FI-Index based on three parameters — Access (35 per cent), Usage (45 per cent) and Quality (20 per cent), consisting of 97 parameters.

Amongst the poorest 40 per cent of households, account ownership went up from 27 per cent (2011) to 77 per cent (2017), and the same trend for women account holders. Here, too, availability of mobiles and cheap data helped people reach their bank accounts without reaching the bank.

Some innovative models are under planning to lend money to very small businesses based on their cash flow instead of collaterals, which often a street vendor may not have. Now that she has a record of UPI cash flows, she can prove that she is generating so much cash flows daily, monthly, and yearly.

__________________________________________________

10  https://restofworld.org/2023/south-asia-newsletter-fastag-helped-india-save-fuel-worth-8-4-billion/#:~:text=A%20nifty%20bit%20of%20technology,plazas%20all%20over%20the%20country

11  Nandan Nilekani in his talk in July 2023,
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6hgy3bGaUkY

12             https://pmjdy.gov.in/
on 19th July, 2023


Open Credit Enablement Network (OCEN) will change the credit landscape sitting on India Stack. Private credit to GDP is 67 per cent, and corporate debt to GDP is 46 per cent. Many countries have 100 per cent to 200 per cent of debt to GDP. So even with lower per capita incomes, credit would become available to those who otherwise wouldn’t have got credit. This can lead to acceleration  for the weaker sections to step into a better life Digital Footprint will, therefore, be credit worthiness marker – an Information Collateral of sorts – in the times to come.

Aadhaar — New Identity of India
Just as mobile was a game changer, Aadhaar is the bedrock of the rest of the changes as India now is a biometrically covered nation — perhaps the largest country to be covered and using this to its advantage. Digital identity covers 130 Crore (1.3 Billion) people. It enables them to e-authenticate, digitally sign, get digital records (my driver has a DigiLocker), and a host of other benefits from government schemes. Aadhaar authentications are about 8 Crore (80 Million) times a day. It is done for KYC for MFs, for pensions to bank account openings and much more.

Just like the telephone, internal combustion engine, internet, light bulb, and the like, these megatrends have changed the game completely and irreversibly for Bharat. It is a movement from India to Bharat — from PAN to Aadhaar. (Remember, earlier people wanted to get PAN as an ID, today, it’s Aadhaar.) How we work, how we live, how we pay, how we commute, and how we see ourselves have transformed. From TOILETS to TOWERS to TRANSACTIONS, Technology for all has made India’s landscape different, so fast.

Digital Public Infrastructure
India, today, is the rightful pioneer in Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI) that delivers digital public goods. DPI is a game changer since it is interoperable and open. Much of the Aadhaar and UPI sit on this DPI. India could leapfrog and cover a huge landscape at a mega speed largely because of DPI. This is often known as India Stack — interconnected yet independent blocks where identity data permissions occur seamlessly in real time.

In the US, in 2022, WoPo reported that states in the US are considering Digital Driving Licence13. An Indian can already store his license on a DigiLocker. We had Co-WIN digital certificates for vaccinations, whereas the USA still had paper certificates. This wave of the DIGITAL is sweeping all across.

Today 59 Million learning minutes are on the Diksha Platform14; every textbook printed by the state government is QR-coded, with 20 QR codes per textbook, and 12 Million digitally addressable QR codes in Indian textbooks. Try looking for your childhood Balbharati books online!

India Stack is one of the largest DPI experiments on the planet. We saw its prowess during COVID-19 vaccination via Co-WIN. Not just that, these changes were imagined in India, made in India and implemented by India. What is more critical is that all these are building something in the area of government — which was earlier the sole and exclusive hallmark of corruption, ineffectiveness, inefficiency and low quality. Today this is changing, even if it is not enough, but the process has begun where an infrastructure is in place and a model for everyone to benefit from, to improve his or her lives. DPI reduces barriers also, so people can enter much more easily (take the Zerodha example, which is the biggest discount brokerage beating all the biggies in no time). Consider government benefits reaching, therefore, making a bang for our tax bucks. The government transferred billions of dollars (cumulatively, on 15th August, 2023, it was Rs.30 Lac Crores) into the bank accounts of people who needed those without cuts of corruption.

Take Tax–GDP ratio: With all filings online, 1.3 Crore people registered in GST and 7 Crore ITRs filed online, our Tax to GDP ratio is growing at twice the rate of GDP growth.

Lastly, let’s look at the four megatrends as articulated by Ridham Desai of Morgan Stanley some months ago.
 
1.    Demographics — Population Decline and reduced consumption

2.    De-globalisation

3.    Climate Change & Decarbonisation

4.    Digitalisation

He says most countries will lose on each or most of these counts. However, he says, India is the only large country that will benefit on each of these counts. Some of the talks and interviews bring several researched pointers. India is becoming an increasingly bigger consumer market; more people will consume. India is not over-dependent on globalisation. As a Paris Accord signatory, India’s dependence on external energy sources will reduce even as its consumption in watts will grow exponentially. Digitisation is what we have already looked at in the earlier part of the article from a largely public infra perspective but similar mega trends are happening even in private space. IPL Digital Rights were sold at a higher price than IPL TV Rights. BTW, if you noticed, no one watches cricket matches through glass windows at a store standing on the street as we used to see.

We must mention, ONDC – the E-commerce revolution in the making. Remember, we were told that the winner takes it all in the digital era. That might not happen, and many will be winners. Presently, there is only 4.3 per cent e-retail penetration in India, compared to 23 per cent in the UK or 26 per cent in South Korea. ONDC will unbundle e-commerce transactions and make them platform-agnostic and open. Platforms will no longer be the centre point.

DIGITALL
Friends, I think India will eventually move from a Pyramid structure to more of a square — maybe a kite or trapezium or even rhombus structure. I am glad to be alive at one of the most remarkable times in our history when crores of people will be brought out of pain and poverty by a tsunami of technologies unleashed for the masses. This new tech-led growth model is leading us all towards true democracy, where technology is no longer for a few, but for all. The spelling of DIGITAL in Indian dictionaries should now be DIGITALL! — Jai Hind! 15th August, 2023.

_____________________________________________________________________________________

13  https://www.washingtonpost.com/technology/2021/10/11/digital-drivers-license-mdl/

14  Diksha.gov.in

15  https://dbtbharat.gov.in/

16  Morgan Stanley Report

17  $70 Trillion investments needed to overcome
climate change

 

India Inc’s Struggle with ‘Jamtara’ Moments

You may have guessed what we are talking about
here! The Netflix series — Jamtara — portraying a group of men running a
phishing operation — gave us a good insight into the new and evolving
threat which is looming heavily over India Inc fuelled by advancing
technology, more and more usage of the internet and dependency on
digital banking. An overwhelming 13.91 lakh cyber security incidents1
were reported in India’s cybercrime reporting portal during the year
2022. Cybersecurity risk is relevant to every entity, except entities
that run entirely on manual processes without any technology
intervention or Internet connectivity which is very rare nowadays. It is
unlikely that a company is immune to cybersecurity risk in today’s
environment.

Some of these incidents made headlines. Towards the
end of March 2023, India’s top drug maker informed the stock exchange
that its revenue had been hit due to a ransomware attack. A ransomware
group claimed responsibility for an ‘IT security incident’ that led to
the breach of certain file systems and theft of certain company and
personal data. Appreciating the sensitivity, the auditors of the company
duly reported this matter as a fraud in the Companies (Auditor’s
Report) Order, 2020.

A major airline was hit twice by ransomware
during the year ended March 2022. Several flights were delayed and
cancelled due to the first instance of cyberattack. The subsequent
ransomware attack on its IT systems delayed the company’s submission of
financial results as it affected the completion of the audit process
within the stipulated time.

Common cyberattack techniques:

Malicious software or ransomware, downloaded to a target computer, which can do anything from
stealing data to encrypting files and demanding ransom.

Phishing
emails are crafted to trick victims into giving up passwords and other
credentials or taking some other malicious action.

Denial of Service attacks, which overwhelm a server, system, or network with
bogus traffic.

Man-in-the-middle attacks, fool the target computer into joining a compromised
network.

These techniques can be used in tandem
e.g., the malicious attacker uses phishing emails to trick users into
downloading malware or ransomware in the hope of demanding ransom over
encrypted files

 

___________________________________________________
1.Answer of Minister of State for Electronics and Information Technology
in Rajya Sabha
This leads to
the question of whether cybersecurity risk is relevant to the audits of
financial statements? Do financial statement auditors need to consider
the cybersecurity risk when planning and performing the audits?

BOARD OF DIRECTORS: COMBATING CYBERSECURITY RISK

The Board of Directors2
are responsible for safeguarding the assets of the company and for
preventing and detecting fraud and other irregularities. Such
responsibility is also a critical component of  internal financial
controls3 which the Board of Directors are required to establish. Further, Managing Director4
or other person designated by the Board should provide adequate
protection against unauthorized access, alteration or tampering of
records. Additionally, the Risk Management Committee5 of equity-listed companies are responsible for identifying, monitoring and reviewing cyber security risks.

Timely
disclosure requirements are also triggered for cyberattacks. All
organisations including service providers, intermediaries and body
corporate are required to mandatorily report cybersecurity incidents
within six hours in the stipulated format to the Indian Computer
Emergency Response Team (CERT-In) — a national nodal agency set up by
the Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology under the IT Act,
2000. This nodal agency is responsible for collecting, analysing, and
disseminating information on cybersecurity incidents, and taking
emergency response measures. Similarly, every bank should report
cybersecurity incidents within two to six hours of detection to the
Reserve Bank of India. Equity-listed entities are required to provide
details of cyber security incidents or breaches or loss of data or
documents on a quarterly basis to the stock exchange within 21 days from
the end of the quarter.

___________________________________________________

2.Section 134(5)© of the Companies Act, 2013

3. Section 134(5)(e) of the Companies Act, 2013

4. Rules 28(2)(a) of Companies (Management and Administration) Rules, 2014
prescribed under the Companies Act, 2013

5. Regulation 21 and Schedule II – Part D ©(1)(a) of SEBI (Listing
Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015

UNDERSTANDING FINANCIAL STATEMENT LEVEL RISK
Recognising
and managing risk is a crucial part of the role of management and those
charged with governance (TCWG). The prominence of cybercrime means that
cyber security is a business risk for many entities to consider and
manage. For business risks like cyber security, there can be direct as
well as indirect implications for the financial statements including the
following:

•    Recognition of provisions/ disclosure of
contingent liabilities as a result of a data breach. This may be the
result of fines or penalties from a regulator as well as the possibility
of legal action from impacted parties where sensitive data has been
lost.

•    Change in fair value of assets as a result of a cyber
event, e.g., where a particular industry is being targeted there may be a
hesitancy to transact with those entities.

•    Diminished
future cash flows, thereby requiring consideration of impairment of
certain assets including goodwill, customer-related intangible assets,
trademarks, patents, capitalized software, or other assets associated
with hardware or software, and inventory.

•    Implications for the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern from the matters identified above.


Small organizations that already struggle to manage cash flow may face
crippling rises in insurance premiums or see an increased cost to raise
debt.

EXPECTATIONS OF MANAGEMENT FOR A CYBER BREACH

Having
a robust cybersecurity governance and risk management plan (appropriate
for the size of the organization) is critical to help the organisation
reduce exposure to cyber threats. There are frameworks which can be used
to consider risk assessment and related best practices. For example,
USA can be considered.

As new threats continue to emerge, each
organization need to be sure that it is equipped to deal with a dynamic
threat landscape. Organisations should defend their networks from
cyber-attacks by installing firewalls. Firewalls monitor network traffic
to identify any suspicious activity that could compromise data
integrity. They also prevent complex spyware from gaining access to your
systems and promote data privacy.

Proper IT policies and
controls are critical. Develop and implement policies and controls to
ensure that systems are not misused and ensure that applicable policies
and controls are continually reviewed and updated to reflect the most
current risks. This includes developing incident response policies and
procedures to properly respond to, account for and help mitigate the
cost of a potential breach. Ongoing education to all employees on
technology risks should form part of the organisations risk management
framework, with potential security breaches being mitigated as a result
of education and policies being promulgated to all levels of staff.

Basis
its system and process established, management should conclude whether
or not a cyber breach is reasonably likely to have a material effect on
the financial statements. For a cyber breach that is reasonably likely
to have a material effect on the financial statements, including related
disclosures, management should provide timely access to information
regarding such cyber breach, including information relating to the
entity’s investigation and results to enable the auditor to evaluate the
entity’s conclusions on the effects on the financial statements
thereof. In some cases, entities might be required to share a copy of
the investigation report e.g., Listed entities are required to submit a
copy of the  forensic report6 (which can include an investigation of cyber-attacks) to the stock exchange.

__________________________________________________________

6.schedule III – Part A (A)17 of SEBI (Listing Obligations and disclosure
Requirements) Regulations, 2015

Investigations of cyber breaches can often involve an entity’s legal
counsel and questions related to matters such as legal privilege can
hinder accessibility of the reports to auditors. The assertion of
attorney-client, or other, legal privilege is not a valid ground to
prevent access of information to auditors. Considering their
professional obligations, management should allow access of information
to auditor throughout the investigation and the results of the
investigation.


ROLE OF THE AUDITOR

The
auditor’s responsibility in relation to cyber security, like other
risks, is to first consider the risk of material misstatement to the
financial statement as part of risk assessment procedures.  As a part of
the risk assessment7 process, auditors should obtain an
understanding of the entity and its environment, and internal controls
relevant to the audit, and through this, identify and assess risks of
material misstatement. This encompasses understanding the entity’s use
of Information Technology (IT) including automated controls, the IT
general controls, identification of IT-related risks, and the
reliability of data and reports used in the financial reporting process.

_______________________________________________________

7. Standard on Auditing 315, Identifying and Assessing the Risks of
Material Misstatement Through Understanding the Entity and its Environment

The auditor’s primary focus is on the controls and systems
that are relevant to the audit of the financial statements and the
internal financial controls. Those layers if breached, may allow access
to the systems and applications that house financial statement–related
data. Audit procedures should then be developed to address each
company’s unique IT environment.

When a cyber breach comes to
the auditor’s attention, irrespective of its source, the auditor should
assess its relative significance to the financial statements and related
disclosures. Audit teams might work with other professionals e.g., IT
professionals, forensic professionals, cyber subject matter experts, and
legal experts as each of them brings a different perspective, and the
assessment of a cyber breach requires coordinated efforts between these
groups.

For each cyber breach, including when an entity paid or
is contemplating paying ransom in a ransomware attack, the auditor
should determine whether the cyber breach is reasonably likely to have a
material effect on the financial statements. Certain ransomware
payments may constitute non-compliance with laws and regulations (e.g.,
when made to sanctioned persons or to sanctioned jurisdictions).
Auditors should consider this aspect while determining their audit
strategy.

With respect to the company’s cybersecurity
disclosures, if the disclosure is included in the financial statements,
the auditor should perform procedures to assess whether the financial
statements, taken as a whole, are true and fair. In contrast, if the
cybersecurity disclosure is presented outside the financial statements,
such as the Directors Report, the auditor is required to read such
disclosures and consider  whether such information8 or the
manner of its presentation is materially inconsistent with information
appearing in the audited financial statements or contains a material
misstatement of fact.

______________________________________________________

8.Standard on Auditing 720, The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating in
other Information

EVALUATING THE ADEQUACY OF ENTITY’S ACTION
Because
the auditors would use the results of management’s investigation in
forming audit conclusions, the auditor should discuss the approach with
management early in the entity’s investigation process and provide his
views on the proposed scope. At this juncture, the auditor considers
whether the involvement of other professionals is warranted to assist in
these discussions with management. Forensics and cyber professionals’
involvement could range from providing guidance on the matter to
performing a “shadow investigation” designed to follow the activities of
the entity’s investigation team, which may include reperforming certain
procedures in an entity’s investigation.

When evaluating the
adequacy of actions undertaken in response to a cyber breach, the
auditor should consider the timeliness of the entity’s response, the
level of management involved and whether the actions are responsive to
the cyber breach. Determining whether the entity has taken appropriate
actions in response to a cyber breach involves judgment based on the
facts and circumstances of the cyber breach and the entity’s actions.
After the entity’s response has occurred, the auditor may choose to
retest certain security settings or the functioning of other controls
that were either updated or implemented. When the auditor determines
that management did not respond appropriately to a cyber  breach, he
should treat this event as a non-compliance act involving management.

EFFECT ON AUDIT REPORT

It is possible for a cyber breach to be determined as a Key Audit Matter9
(i.e., matters that, in the auditor’s professional judgment, were of
most significance in the audit of the current period) to be included in
the auditor’s report. In other circumstances, the auditor may determine
to draw attention to management’s disclosure by including an
emphasis-of-matter paragraph in the auditor’s report.
_________________________________________________

9. Standard on Auditing 701 – Communicating Key Audit Matters in the
Independent Auditor’s Report

In some
instances, the auditor may be unable to determine whether a cyber breach
has a material effect on the financial statements, because the entity
has not completed its investigation or has not reached a stage at which
it is reasonable to conclude that the cyber breach did not have a
material effect on the financial statements or the effect of the breach
has been appropriately accounted for and disclosed. In such a situation
auditor should base his judgment regarding the sufficiency of the
evidence that is, or should be, available.

When, after
considering the existing conditions and available evidence, auditor
concludes that sufficient evidence supports management’s assertions
about the nature of a matter involving uncertainty and its presentation
or disclosure in the financial statements, an unmodified opinion should
be expressed. Otherwise, depending on the pervasiveness of the effects
of the limitation on audit, a qualified opinion or disclaimer of opinion
should be issued.

CLOSING ENTRIES:

Auditors
should consider and assess cybersecurity risk as part of risk
assessment for every audit. New information or audit evidence may be
obtained during the audit which would change the auditor’s risk
assessment. The auditor should revise the assessment and modify the
audit plan and procedures accordingly. When a cyber incident has
occurred, the auditor would have to understand the nature and cause,
determine whether additional audit procedures or an alteration in the
audit approach is necessary, and evaluate the impact on the financial
statements. Where necessary, the auditor should also consider involving
subject matter experts.

Personal Data Protection: Tighten Your Belts, It’s Time to Take Off

The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023 received the assent of the President of India on 11th August, 2023, after it was passed by both houses of the parliament. The Act provides for the processing of digital personal data in a manner that recognises both the rights of individuals to protect their personal data and the need to process such personal data for lawful purposes and matters incidental thereto. The Act addresses the need to protect the fundamental rights of a citizen that “no person shall be deprived of his or her personal liberty, except according to established legal procedures”. To achieve the objective, the Act creates significant obligations on Data Fiduciaries and imposes severe penal actions for non-compliance. It’s time to align and make an honest effort, with a genuine posture to invest in infrastructure and comply.

BACKGROUND

Personal Data Protection, a matter of focus, globally and in India, has been fuelled by sensitive terms like ‘privacy being fundamental and constitutional right of an individual’. Upheld in the matter of Justice K S Puttaswami vs. Union of India, the Apex Court in 2017, impressed upon the Legislature to establish a robust data protection regime.

Certain developed economies have already adopted stringent data privacy regulations, with wider coverage, beyond geographical boundaries, due to obvious commercial and other reasons. Besides an inevitable growth in the digital economy, social media interactions are only rising, both fuelling the matter further. The Government, recognising the importance of safeguarding citizens’ rights, has focused towards a comprehensive framework. All stakeholders dealing with personal data would have to invest in a much-needed eco-system towards personal data protection. Penal actions are scaringly significant.

GLOBAL TRENDS AND BENCHMARK: EUROPEAN UNION GENERAL DATA PROTECTION REGULATION (‘EU GDPR’) AND OTHERS

As a major benchmark, the EU, in 2018, implemented the GDPR, not just for EU entities, but also, for organisations across the globe, so long as such organisations deal with EU citizens’ data. Penalties under GDPR may go up to Euro 20 million or 4 per cent of the consolidated annual turnover of an organisation. EU GDPR is considered a comprehensive framework, dealing with personal data processing and the rights and obligations of the parties involved. Even the USA and China have followed stringent personal data privacy regulations.

NEED FOR A ROBUST DATA PROTECTION FRAMEWORK

Limitations in the existing regulation
The current Information Technology Act, 2000, and related Rules of 2011 (SPD Rules) (together with the 2000 Act) are outdated. In any case, the safeguards around personal data protection in the 2000 Act are unable to deal with the scalability, the data explosion and digital transformation, social media behaviour, ever-changing modes of communications, security threats and enforcing penal actions for non-compliance. The committees formed to evaluate a legal framework realised that the existing law has little to protect individuals against privacy-related harms in India. Also, the definition of Sensitive Personal Data is unduly narrow, and limitations are apparently visible.

The Puttaswamy judgement of 2017 and principles to frame a robust regulation

The Court declared that any invasion of privacy must satisfy the triple test, i.e., Legitimate Aim, Proportionality, and Legality, being the fundamental principles for a regulation. The judgement upheld that “no person shall be deprived of his / her personal liberty, except according to established legal procedures”.

A much-needed debate
The Government, in 2017, constituted the Srikrishna Committee to examine the data protection-related issues and to create a regulatory framework. This was followed by various draft bills, challenges in Cabinet meetings and Parliament, consideration of public comments and global best practices, and the P. P. Chaudhary Committee to evaluate further, before finally framing the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023 (the Bill). The Bill was passed by both houses of the Parliament, and it received the assent of the President on 11th August, 2023, and is called The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023 (the Act).

Principles followed in framing the Act

The Act is based on certain principles regarding personal data, i.e., (i) collection of minimum / necessary data; (ii) only lawful usage, and for the desired purpose; (iii) reasonable effort to ensure accuracy and updation of data; (iv) data storage only for the necessary duration; (v) safeguards to avoid unauthorised collection, processing or breach; and (vi) accountability of the person who decides the purpose and means of data processing.

THE DIGITAL PERSONAL DATA PROTECTION ACT, 2023

While the Act was published in the Official Gazette on 11th August, 2023, the effective date would be decided by the Central Government by notification. Different dates may be appointed for different provisions of the Act.

The Act would apply to digital personal data within India, relating to Data Principals (or the individuals to whom the personal data relates, and includes the parents or lawful guardian, in the case of a child or a person with a disability). It would also be applicable if the personal data is collected in non-digital form and is digitised later. Processing outside India will also be covered if it is in connection with the activities of Data Principals within India.

Personal data

The Act defines “personal data” as any data about an individual who is identifiable by or in relation to such data. This would not include personal data that is made or caused to be made publicly available. This seems to have a very wide coverage, considering that the Act does not separately define or classify any data as sensitive personal data. There is a stark difference with the earlier regulations, which did recognise the additional importance of sensitive personal data (say password; financial information such as bank account or credit / debit cards; physical, physiological and mental health conditions; sexual orientation; medical records / history; biometric information, and similar items). The government may prescribe guidelines to deal with or differentiate between different types of data, though the Act has not clarified anything in this regard.

Obligations of the most important stakeholder — the Data Fiduciary

The Act creates significant obligations of a Data Fiduciary (any person who alone or in conjunction with other persons, determines the purpose and means of processing personal data) and the Data Processor (any person who processes personal data on behalf of or as per the instructions of a Data Fiduciary).

While processing personal data, the obligations of a Data Fiduciary (and for certain activities, of a Data Processor) would include: (i) giving a clear notice with respect to personal data being collected, and its purpose; (ii) seeking consent of the Data Principal for processing; (iii) processing data for lawful purpose for which Data Principal has given consent; (iv) making reasonable efforts to ensure accuracy and completeness of the data; (v) implementing appropriate technical and organisational measures to safeguard, and to prevent personal data breach; (vi) notifying a personal data breach to the Data Protection Board of India (the Board, as discussed later in the note) and each affected Data Principal; (vii) ensuring appropriate disposal of data once the purpose for which such data was collected is no longer necessary for legal or business purposes; (viii) appointing a Data Protection Officer, in case of a Significant Data Fiduciary, or a person able to answer Data Principals’ questions about processing of related personal data; (ix) putting in place a procedure and effective mechanism to redress the grievances of Data Principals.

Additional obligations before processing any personal data of a child

The Act imposes additional obligations in case of processing any personal data of a child, e.g., obtaining verifiable parental consent. Such processing would be prohibited if it is likely to harm or involves tracking / behavioural monitoring, or targeted advertising towards children.

The government would carry significant powers and flexibility, and related concerns

The Act provides for significant powers, by notification, with the Government to impose additional regulations on Significant Data Fiduciaries (as may be notified as such based-on assessment of risk factors made by the Government). However, on the other hand, the Government may, having regard to the volume and nature of personal data processed, notify certain Data Fiduciaries or class of Data Fiduciaries, including startups, to whom certain provisions of the Act shall not apply.

There are visible concerns keeping in view the wide exemptions by which the Government may notify, in the interests of sovereignty and integrity of India, security of the State, friendly relations with foreign States, maintenance of public order and the processing by the Government of any personal data, within or outside India, for research needs, archiving or statistical purposes, or for any other purpose, as it may deem fit. The Government has yet to notify the rules, which may address related concerns.

Rights and duties of Data Principals, in line with the objectives of the Act

The Act secures the rights of Data Principles in many ways, e.g., the right to access information and the processing activities undertaken, right to correction / updation / erasure; right to withdraw the consent, subject to certain exceptions and also the consequences of withdrawal being borne by such Data Principal, right of Grievance Redressal, and right to complain to the Data Protection Board of India (the Board).

Data Principal will also follow certain basic principles, e.g., complying with the provisions of applicable laws while exercising rights, not registering a frivolous complaint, not impersonating others and not suppressing information.

Cross-border data transfers would be permissible, subject to a negative list

For cross-border data transfers, the Act allows a Data Fiduciary to transfer Personal Data to a jurisdiction or territory outside India for processing. However, the Government may, based on an objective assessment, restrict such transfers to specific jurisdictions. Any other existing regulations, if they are more restrictive, would continue to apply.

Data Protection Board of India (an empowered executive authority)

Board composition and authority: The Act aims to establish a robust management, governance and administrative structure to achieve the objectives. Central to this would be the formation of the Data Protection Board of India (the Board). The Board would comprise a chairperson, appointed by the Central Government, and other Members, as prescribed, with minimum skills and tenure requirements as Board members. Importantly, the Board will possess the authority to take any action under the regulations.

Digital office and independence: The Board will have significant powers and independence. It will be responsible for determining non-compliances, conducting inquiries to address any complaints, imposing penalties, directing Data Fiduciaries to adopt urgent measures to remedy a breach and mitigating any harm caused to Data Principals.

Principles of natural justice: In conducting inquiries, the Board will adhere to the principles of natural justice, offering reasonable opportunity to be heard. It will have the power to summon individuals, conduct examinations under oath, inspect any records, and issue interim orders, as necessary. However, the Board or its officers shall not impede the day-to-day functioning of any individual or organisation.

Discretionary powers, mediation and voluntary undertakings: The Board may, at its discretion, consider resolving any complaints through mediation, directing concerned parties to engage in the process and to resolve. Additionally, the Board may accept voluntary undertakings for any matter, to take or refrain from specified actions. These powers aim to facilitate efficient decision-making and avoid prolonged legal proceedings. The Board will possess the authority to dispose off matters that it deems non-significant or frivolous / devoid of merit, in which case, it may issue a warning or impose costs on the complainant.

Powers of a Civil Court: The Board shall have all powers of the Civil Court to ensure autonomy and independence in its functions. No other Civil Court shall have jurisdiction over the matters within the Board’s purview. Appeals against the Board’s orders shall lie with the Appellate Tribunal. The Board is envisioned as a formidable body with substantial authority to safeguard data protection in the country. It’s powers, independence and adherence to principles of justice are aimed at efficiently addressing data-related concerns and promoting a culture of personal data protection.

The severity of penal actions for data breaches and non-compliance

The Act prescribes severe penalties for non-compliance with Data Protection regulations. For instance:

  •     Up to Rs. 250 Crores for failure of Data Fiduciary to take reasonable security safeguards

 

  •     Up to Rs. 200 Crores for failure to notify the Data Protection Board and affected Data Principals of a personal data breach

 

  •     Up to Rs. 200 Crores for non-fulfilment of additional obligations in relation to children

 

  •     Up to Rs. 150 Crores for non-fulfilment of additional obligations as Significant Data Fiduciary

Instances of global data breaches that attracted severe penal actions

In the past, there have been several data breach incidents that attracted severe penal actions in different jurisdictions. These included:

  •     Some of the largest social media platforms for transferring data to different countries without adequate data protection. In another incident, the data breach involving an unauthorised transfer of data, for political purposes, was also penalised.

 

  •     An overseas law firm faced a penalty from a financial regulator for leaking the personal financial information of many wealthy individuals, public officials, world leaders, politicians, celebrities, businessmen and others.

 

  •     One of the largest online shopping platform companies was fined for processing the personal data of its customers, including for infringements of the target advertising system, without proper consent of such customers.

Clearly, there is enhanced scrutiny towards data breaches, and regulators are active in safeguarding the rights of Data Principals.

A balanced approach

It is heartening to note that the Act follows a balanced approach, creating a moral, though subjective, responsibility on the Board to consider various aspects before determining penalties, e.g.: (i) nature, gravity and duration of the breach or type and nature of the data affected; (ii) repetitive nature of breach; (iii) breach resulting in any gain realised or loss avoided; (iv) mitigating actions, including timeliness and effectiveness; (v) whether penalty is proportionate and effective; and (vi) likely impact of the financial penalty on the person.

Few other aspects

The Act does not recognise any difference between “Personal Data” and “Sensitive Personal Data,” which was not the position in earlier regulations. There is a stark difference in terms of the level of sensitivities involved between the two. The Board, as mentioned above, would exercise discretion in exercising its powers while dealing with related situations and the nature of any data breach. The Act also refers to various procedural matters, which would require framing appropriate rules. Timeliness of such rules and clarity around the same would be important.

PROFESSIONAL SERVICES FIRMS

Professional services / consultancy firms, that often use personal data in the normal course of their activities, both in their capacity as Data Fiduciaries and Data Processors, need to deep dive and carry out a gap assessment to align with the Act. Such firms will have obligations as:

•    a Data Fiduciary, e.g., in respect of:

  •        data collected from individual clients, their directors, shareholders, etc., for evaluation (say KYC) purposes.

 

  • data collected from employees of the firm for purposes such as pre-employment background checks, payroll processing, group medical insurance plans or compliance with statutory requirements.

• a Data Processor, e.g., in respect of:

  •  balances collected for audit confirmation in respect of advances or bank balances of individuals.

 

  •  compensation details of directors, collected as audit evidence for verifying managerial remuneration.

 

  • personal data collected from an organisation under outsourced payroll processing engagement.

These firms are usually bound by confidentiality obligations, either due to contractual arrangements (say under an engagement letter / service contract with the client) or by regulations (say by the Code of Ethics of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India or similar professional bodies). The Act, in addition, would require enhancing the overall data protection framework to comply with the requirements of the Act. These would include certain focus areas, e.g., gap assessment; adequate technical and organisational controls and technology solutions; appropriate contractual clauses with clients, employees and third parties, clearly defining obligations to be complied with; re-evaluating document retention requirements, both contractual and by regulation; devising a mechanism to provide notice to and managing consent requirements from Data Principals for personal data already collected in the past; mechanism for timely reporting of data breaches, both internally and externally; and responding to the requests made by Data Principals. An illustrative overview would be as under:

 A wide coverage of professionals and professional services firms, including chartered accountants

Besides industrial organisations, various professionals and professional services firms, including firms of chartered accountants, very often carry and process personal data relating to clients / individuals, as a custodian or forprofessional and other engagements, e.g.:

–    auditors, collecting data in relation to KYC of stakeholders; managerial remuneration; listing of loans and advances of customers / vendors; and similar such areas,
–    payroll processing of employees as an outsourced service,
–    assistance in filing tax returns and assessments of individuals,

–    personal wealth management services for high-net-worth individuals,

–    acting as custodians in dispute resolution services,

–    broking firms, keeping personal data of clients / investors,

–    medical practitioners, hospitals and pathology labs, wellness, and healthcare centres, keeping extremely sensitive medical backgrounds of their patients / customers,

–    direct sales / marketing agents / lending firms, carrying data of loans given to individuals,

–    data of individuals attending knowledge-sharing events / seminars, etc.,

–    educational institutions, carrying personal data and family background of students,

–    insurance brokers, carrying significant and sensitive personal data of individuals,

–    matrimonial service providers, carrying sensitive details of individuals,

–    telecom and network service providers,

–    online platforms, tracking habits / preferences, and carrying personal data of consumers,

–    social media platforms, carrying members’ preferences and other details,

–    hotels and clubs, carrying sensitive personal data of their guests,

–    recruitment professionals, carrying sensitive personal data of prospective candidates,

–    real estate agents, carrying property details and title documents on behalf of individuals,

–    law firms, carrying sensitive personal information of clients, and

–    several other establishments that carry and process personal data.

In addition, such firms would possess the personal data of their employees, vendors and other third parties as well. In that context, all such organisations and professionals would be covered by the Act. They would be Data Fiduciaries and / or processors, and the obligations of the Act would apply.

Minimum obligations of professionals and professional services firms

In all these cases, processing of personal data would mean a set of operations performed on digital personal data and would include activities such as data collection, recording, organising, structuring, storing, retrieval, sharing / disclosing, erasure or final destruction. Accordingly, it is important to identify personal data across functions / applications and policies for compliance, based on gap assessment and data protection impact assessment. At the minimum, they would need (i) a data protection policy and tone at the top; (ii) process and accountability to deal with consent from Data Principals; (iii) reasonable security, storage and recording measures; (iv) adequate internal communication and training; (v) data minimisation and disposal process; (vi) grievance redressal mechanism; (vii) disciplinary mechanism to deal with non-compliance; and (viii) reporting mechanism in respect of breaches.

In addition, the significant Data Fiduciaries may have additional obligations, including the appointment of a Data Protection Officer, data protection impact assessment and periodic audits by an external auditor. Some of the aforementioned organisations (say medical practitioners, hospitals, lawyers, etc.) may possess personal data of children, in which case, there would be additional measures to protect the same.

Each professional is likely to be both a Data Fiduciary and a Data Processor unless processing data exclusively on behalf of a Data Fiduciary. Despite the increased costs involved in a privacy compliance program, such professionals are obligated to follow and would need to invest in developing a robust privacy framework. This would also be necessary to avoid huge penalties, which could be levied in case of non-compliance. Organisations need to focus on “Privacy by Design” and adopt technical measures such as encryption, data leakage solutions / tools and appropriate incident management protocols to minimise the occurrence of any breach.

IN SUMMARY

Significant obligations of Data Fiduciaries

The monetary penalties for non-compliance / breach are huge and may lead to significant brand and reputation issues. An honest effort and a genuine posture may help in avoiding penal actions. Data Fiduciary (and in many cases, Data Processors) would assume several obligations and would require to invest in processes, e.g., to review and enhance privacy policy and the tone at the top; to create infrastructure and technical and security measures; to provide notice to Data Principals; to manage rights of Data Principals by adopting enhanced processes to address continuing requests (data correction, updation, deletion, processing activities undertaken, etc.); to establish a robust mechanism to capture and address grievances; to review data retention requirements on a “keep only as necessary” basis; to establish incremental controls and processes, in case of processing of personal data of children, including seeking verifiable consents; additional requirements if notified as a Significant Data Fiduciary (to appoint a Data Protection Officer; carry out Data Protection Impact Assessment; and periodic audits by an independent auditor); timely identification of possible or suspected non-compliance, in which case voluntary undertaking and commitments may be provided to avoid severe penal actions; to build in process for timely notification of data breaches to the Board and Data Principals; to adopt a disciplinary mechanism for consequence management; a periodical critical analysis and reporting to those charged with governance, so that each level of the organisation understands importance, sensitivities and respective accountability.

An attitude to create awareness and deal with the transition

The Act provides necessary empowerment and brings in a much-needed focus on Personal Data Protection. There would be evolving situations which may need a pragmatic approach by stakeholders, viz., the Regulator — who would need to provide continuous direction, be involved in regular dialogue, and resolve issues; Data Fiduciaries — who would assume significant obligations; and the Data Principals — who would gain significant confidence and relief. In that context, it is worth highlighting a few areas that may be dealt with in a phased manner and based on experiences and incidents in the near future, e.g., several provisions, which are subject to rules, would require timely clarifications and framing an eco-system; compliance with privacy obligations would require investment in skilled resources, administrative and technical set-up and costs, especially for domestic companies initiating the processes for the first time. It may be more challenging for small and medium enterprises, considering that the penal actions would be equally severe for them; reportable incidents may need benchmarking as every case of a data breach may not need reporting unless it is a significant data breach impacting the rights of Data Principal; the readiness to comply with the provisions and establishing related infrastructure, governance, processes, and controls may need time to implement. It may need a consultative approach and a reasonable transition time (say one to two years, depending on the size and nature of an organisation) to build requisite processes and infrastructure.

Penal consequences are to be based on size, situation and severity

There are several micro / small / medium enterprises which would be processing personal data. While penal action is an important deterrent for non-compliance, these may need to be commensurate with the size, situation and severity of the issues involved.

Dealing with subjective and judgmental matters

The Act does not recognise a difference between “Personal Data” and “Sensitive Personal Data”. There is a stark difference in the level of sensitivities involved between the two. Also, the Act does not include directions for regulating non-digitised personal data. Such exemptions may lead to subjectivities and gaps in assessing and resolving the issues. The exemptions to the Government are too wide and may have an adverse implication in achieving the ultimate objective of safeguarding the fundamental rights of a citizen. Ultimately, human beings will deal with the data. Such wide exemptions may enable unchecked data processing by the State. This may be dealt with in a phased manner, based on incidents and experiences in the near future. Also, it would be important that the necessary clarifications by way of Rules are notified, sooner than later.

WAY FORWARD

Personal data is vulnerable and prone to breaches. The Apex Court of the country has upheld and clarified a constitutional objective, that privacy is a fundamental right of an individual. There is a visible focus of the Government to protect the above rights. The growth of the digital economy is inevitable while keeping the citizens’ rights intact. Globally, developed economies have already framed stricter regulations like the EU GDPR. We cannot have cross-border investments (both ways) and do international business and interactions without adopting data protection norms.

It is a welcome move. We need to align and make an honest effort, with a genuine posture. The next step would be to embrace and invest. Also, the success of the regulation would be enhanced with a supportive attitude of the government / Board during the transition, creating awareness and dealing with the evolving matters objectively and in a timely manner.

FREEMIUM BUSINESS MODEL

INTRODUCTION
The term ‘freemium’ is coined by combining the words ‘free’ and ‘premium’. Over the last decade, this business model has become a dominant business model among internet start-ups and smartphone app developers.

Venture capitalist Fred Wilson was the first to describe the Freemium business model back in 2006. He summarized the pattern as follows: ‘Give your service away for free, possibly ad supported but maybe not, acquire a lot of customers very efficiently through word of mouth, referral networks, organic search marketing, etc., then offer premium priced value-added services or an enhanced version of your service to your customer base.’ The term’s coinage goes back to a post that Wilson put on his blog calling for a fitting name for this business model. ‘Freemium’ was chosen as the most appropriate term and has since become firmly established.

In the freemium business model, the users get basic features of the product at no cost and can access the richer functionality of the product for a subscription fee. The basic version of an offering is given away for free to eventually persuade the customers to pay for the premium version. The free offering can attract the highest volume of customers possible for the company. The generally smaller volume of paying ‘premium customers’ generates the revenue, which also cross-finances the free offering.

For a visual representation of the Freemium model readers may refer –

EXAMPLES

The Internet and the digitization of services are the main drivers that have enabled the development of the Freemium business model. Let us explore examples of companies implementing the Freemium business model in their operations.

1. Gmail

Gmail offers a basic inbox and email service for free. However, the inboxes come with limited storage for messages. Users can upgrade their storage by paying a monthly or annual fee beyond the free storage limit.

Hotmail and Dropbox also follow the freemium model.

2. Spotify

Spotify offers its free users access to the music streaming service for a limited number of hours each day, thus providing an incentive to switch to the premium version of the service. Free users are forced to watch and listen to advertisement posts they get during the free time to listen to Spotify music.

 

3. Amazon

Amazon uses the freemium model exclusively for its diversified product ranges. Let us discuss a few popular products of Amazon following the freemium model.

•  Amazon Web Services (popularly known as ‘AWS’) gives away free “credits” to its new customers. The customers can utilize these credits to set up one’s infrastructure on the AWS cloud computers and avail themselves of AWS services. However, as the demand for the company’s product grows and the need for space exceeds the capacity covered by the free credits, the customer becomes a paying customer for the additional use.

• Amazon Kindle: Amazon gives a free 1-month trial for its premium subscription “Kindle Unlimited” or Audibles which allows the customer unlimited access to media such as e-books, magazines, and audiobooks for a flat fee payable every month. This enables customers to test the service and Amazon to upsell the full subscription to the free trial users.

• Audibles is an audiobook and podcast service that allows users to purchase and stream audiobooks and other forms of spoken word content following the Amazon Kindle model or the Freemium Model.

 

4. Video Conferencing Apps
Video Conferencing App companies have taken the Freemium business model a notch up by offering various plans, thereby addressing the needs of a wider customer base.

• Skype founded in 2003 (now owned by Microsoft) offers its users a Voice-over-Internet Protocol (VoIP) program that enables them to call anywhere in the world over the Internet. In addition, Skype offers its customers the option to purchase call credits for use with landlines and mobile phones.

 

• Zoom video conferencing platform gained popularity in the Covid era. This enabled Zoom to have a large base of free users in a short period. To leverage a free user base, Zoom’s direct salesforce undertakes funnelling and filtering activities to identify business users from the database of its free users. Thereby, converting its free user to paying customers.

5. Gaming – Zynga Farmville

Zynga games are free to play. Let us take the example of Farmville. Here the basic game is available for free download. However, if gamers wish to expand their virtual farm and progress quickly through the game, they either invite their friends to the game or purchase virtual goods by spending real money. From the Company’s perspective, the basic version is used to engage the audience, hook them and thereby funnel them into paying customers.

 

MAKING A FREEMIUM BUSINESS MODEL SUCCESSFUL

To make a freemium business model successful, the following parameters are to be considered from an operational point of view:

• The free user must be continuously supported so that in the future, they can be converted into a paying customer.

• The conversion ratio of paying to non-paying customers is an important indicator of the business performance of the Freemium Model.

• Considering that the vast majority of people will continue to use the free version of the product, the cost of offering the basic product must be very low, ideally zero.

• The business must be profitable along with supporting free users.

POINTS TO BE CONSIDERED BY PROFESSIONAL SERVICE FIRMS FOR APPLYING FREEMIUM MODEL IN THEIR PRACTICE

Virtually every Chartered Accountant firm prices its work, bills its clients, compensates its employees, and rewards its owners based on the amount of time and effort required to produce and deliver professional accounting, taxation or consulting services.

1. Chartered Accountant in Practice

Writing articles/posts (on LinkedIn, Medium or blog post), and speaking at industry events, thereby educating clients in your area of expertise (e.g. latest updates in corporate laws and taxation laws) is one of the easiest way to attract potential clients and build trust and credibility in a market. If your posts or seminars are valuable, your customers and clients will tweet, share, blog, update and like it publicly, and do the marketing for you.

During the process, other fellow Chartered Accountants will also learn something from you that puts you in a position of authority and may offer work through referrals.

2. Following on Social Media

Social media platforms allow you to provide enormous value to the world for free. You may offer some services to your client for free and ask them to Pay With a Tweet. By this, your customers are actings as your Brand Ambassadors.

3. Slack periods

During slow revenue months, invest more in research, training and pro bono work. During the off period, CAs can connect with incubators, co-working spaces, accelerators etc. and offer services on a pro bono basis. This will enable many practising CAs to establish a relationship with start-ups at their early stage and participate in evolving needs of the start-ups.

We would like to read or listen to your views about the freemium business model. Where have you noticed the application of the freemium business model or any variant of this business model? We look forward to your views.

Note: All images reproduced in this article are sourced from the respective company websites and are depicted herein solely for informational and educational purposes.

AMENDMENTS IN THE CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS ACT

The Chartered Accountants, The Cost and Works Accountants and The Company Secretaries (Amendment) Bill, 2021, was introduced in Parliament on 17th December, 2021. This Bill was referred to the Standing Committee on Finance, which submitted its Report in March, 2022. The Bill has been passed by Parliament on 5th April, 2022. Now, The Chartered Accountants, The Cost and Works Accountants and The Company Secretaries (Amendment) Act, 2022, has received the assent of the President on 18th April, 2022. This Act will come into force on such date as the Central Government may notify. Some amendments have come into force from 10th May, 2022 by a Notification dated 10th May, 2022. Some of the important amendments made in the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949, are discussed in this article.

1. SECTION 4 – CAP ON ENTRANCE FEES
At present, entrance fees for those eligible to register as members cannot exceed Rs 3,000. This can be increased up to Rs 6,000 with the permission of the Central Government. This cap on the entrance fee has now been removed from 10th May, 2022 and the Central Council can fix such fees.

2. SECTION 5 – CAP ON FEES FOR FELLOW MEMBERS
Under this section, on the admission of an Associate Member as a Fellow Member, a fee up to Rs 5,000 (Which can be increased up to R10,000 with Central Government approval) can be charged. This cap on fees has been removed from 10th May, 2022 and the Central Council can decide the amount of fees to be charged.

3. SECTION 6 – CAP ON FEES FOR CERTIFICATE OF PRACTICE (COP)
Section 6(2) is amended in line with the amendment to Section 4. Here also the cap of Rs 3,000 (which can be increased up to Rs 6,000 with Central Government approval) has been removed from 10th May, 2022.  Hence, the Central Council can now fix the fees for COP.

4. NEW SECTION 9A – CO-ORDINATION COMMITTEE
New Section 9A has been inserted in the Act effective from 10th May, 2022. This section provides that a Co-ordination Committee of the three Institutes shall be constituted. The constitution and functions of this committee shall be as under:

(i) The Co-ordination Committee shall consist of the Presidents, Vice-Presidents and Secretaries of each of the three Institutes of Chartered  Accountants, Cost Accountants and Company Secretaries.

(ii) The Meetings of the Co-ordination Committee shall be Chaired by the Secretary of Ministry of Corporate Affairs.

(iii) The objective of the formation of this Committee is the development and harmonisation of the professions of Chartered Accountants, Cost Accountants and Company Secretaries.

(iv) This Committee shall meet once in every quarter of the year.

(v) The Committee shall be responsible for the effective coordination of the functions assigned to each Institute and shall perform the following functions:

(a) Ensure quality improvement of the academics, infrastructure, research and all related works of the Institute.

(b) Focus on the coordination and collaboration among the professions to make the profession more effective and robust.

(c) Align the cross-disciplinary regulatory mechanisms for inter-professional development.

(d) Make recommendation in matters relating to the regulatory policies for the professions.

(e) Perform such other functions incidental to the above functions.

5. SECTION 10 – RE-ELECTION OR RE-NOMINATION TO COUNCIL
(i) At present, the term of the Central Council is three years, and a Council Member can seek election for three consecutive terms. In other words, no Council Member can be a member of the Council for more than 9 consecutive years. This provision also applies to Regional Council Members and Nominated Members.

(ii) Now, the amendment provides, effective from 10th May, 2022, that the term of the Council (including the Regional Council) shall be Four Years. Further, it is also provided that no Member can continue to be a member of the Council for more than two consecutive terms. In other words, no council Member can be a member of the Council for more than 8 consecutive years.

(iii) However, if a Council Member is holding office at present for the first term of 3 years, he can contest election for two more terms of 4 years each. Similarly, if a Council Member is holding office at present for the second term of 3 years, he can contest election for one more term of 4 years.

6. SECTION 12 – PRESIDENT AND VICE-PRESIDENT
(i) At present, the President of the Institute is the “Chief Executive Authority” of the Central Council. By the amendment of Section 12, effective from 10th May, 2022, it is now provided that the Secretary of the Institute shall be the “Chief Executive Officer” of the Institute.

(ii) The President will now be the “Head” of the Council. It is further provided as under:    

(a) The President shall preside at the meeting of the Council.

(b) The President and the Vice-President shall exercise such powers and perform such duties and functions as may be prescribed.

(c)  It shall be the duty of the President to ensure that the decisions taken by the Council are implemented.

(d) In the absence of the President, the Vice-President shall act in his place and exercise the powers and perform the duties of the President.

7. SECTION 15 – FUNCTIONS OF THE COUNCIL
Besides the existing functions, effective from 10th May, 2022, the Council has to discharge the following functions:

(i) The Council shall conduct investor education and awareness programmes.

(ii) The Council can enter into any Memorandum or Arrangement, with the prior approval of the Central Government, with any agency of a foreign country, for the purpose of performing its functions under the Act.

8. SECTION 16 – OFFICERS OF THE INSTITUTE
As stated earlier, it is now provided that the Secretary of the Institute shall be the “Chief Executive Officer” of the Institute. He shall perform the administrative functions of the Institute. Further, the Director (Discipline) and Joint Directors (Discipline), not below the rank of Deputy Secretary of the Institute, shall perform their functions as per the Rules and Regulations framed under the Act. It may be noted that the appointment of Joint Directors (Discipline) is provided for the first time by the Amendment Act.

Further, it is also provided that the appointment, re-appointment or termination of appointment of Director or Joint Director (Discipline) shall be subject to prior approval of the Central Government.

9. SECTION 18 – FINANCES OF THE COUNCIL
At present, the Auditors to audit the accounts of the Council can be appointed by the Council. This provision is amended, effective from 10th May, 2022, and it is now provided that the Council can appoint, every year, a Firm of Chartered Accountants which is on the panel of auditors maintained by C&AG as Auditors. However, if any of the partners of a CA Firm is or has been a member of the Council during the last four years, that Firm cannot be appointed as Auditors. The existing provisions for getting the Special Audit under specified circumstances will continue.

10. SECTION 19 – REGISTER OF MEMBERS
In respect of the particulars of members to be stated in the Register of Members, it is now provided that the particulars about any actionable information or complaint pending and particulars of any penalty imposed on the member under Chapter V shall be stated.  This provision comes into force on 10th May, 2022.

11. NEW SECTIONS 20A TO 20D – REGISTER OF FIRMS
New Chapter IVA containing Sections 20A to 20D are inserted. These sections deal with the maintenance of the Register of Firms by the Council. These Sections provide for recording the information about the constitution of the Firm, its partners and other incidental information such as particulars of pending complaints, penalties imposed, etc. If any member or Firm is aggrieved by the removal of the name of any member or Firm, provision is made for review of the decision by the Council.

12. SECTIONS 21 TO 22G – DISCIPLINARY MATTERS
Significant changes are made in the provisions dealing with the Disciplinary Directorate and the procedure to be followed in disciplinary proceedings relating to misconduct by members of the Institute and CA Firms. Existing Sections 21 (Disciplinary Directorate), 21A (Board of Discipline), 21B (Disciplinary Committee), 21D (Transitional Provisions) and 22 (Professional or Other Misconduct), are replaced by new sections 21, 21A, 21B, 21D and 22.  Section 21C is deleted. These new sections make significant changes in dealing with cases of misconduct by members or Firms. In some respects, the powers of the President, Vice-President and Council Members are curtailed, and a strict time limit is fixed for the disposal of cases of misconduct by members. These amended provisions are as under:

12.1 DISCIPLINARY DIRECTORATE
At present, the entire burden is on the Director (Discipline). Now, section 21 provides that the Disciplinary Directorate shall have one Director (Discipline) and at least two Joint Directors (Discipline). The Disciplinary Directorate must make investigations either suo moto or on receipt of an Information or a Complaint. The procedure to be followed by the Director (Discipline) (herein referred to as a “Director”) is as under:

(i)  Within 30 days of the receipt of the information or complaint, he has to decide whether the information or complaint is actionable or is liable to be closed as non-actionable. If required, he may call for additional information from the informant or the complainant by giving 15 days’ time before taking his decision.

(ii) If he decides that the information or the complaint is non-actionable, he must submit the matter to the Board of Discipline (BOD) within 60 days. The BOD, after examining the matter, may direct him to conduct further investigation.

(iii) In respect of the actionable information or complaint, the Director has to give an opportunity to the Member or the Firm calling for a written statement within 21 days. This time limit can be expended up to another 21 days in specified circumstances.

(iv) Upon receipt of the above written statement, the Director has to send a copy of the same to the informant or the complainant for submitting his rejoinder within 21 Days.

(v) Upon receipt of the written statement and the rejoinder, the Director has to submit his preliminary examination report within 30 days if a prima facie case is made out against the Member or the Firm. If the matter relates to Misconduct under the First Schedule, this report is to be submitted to the Board of Discipline. If it relates to the Second Schedule or to both First and Second Schedule, this report is to be submitted to the Disciplinary Committee.

(vi) There is one disturbing provision which is made for the first time. It is now provided that in case of any complaint or information filed by any authorized officer of the Central or State Government or any Statutory Authority duly supported by an investigation report or relevant extract of the investigation report along with supporting evidence, then the Director (Discipline) need not make any inquiry as stated above. Such Government complaint or information will be considered as the preliminary examination report. In other words, the Government complaint or information will be considered as a prima facie case against the Member or the Firm.

(vii) It is now provided that a complaint filed with Disciplinary Directorate shall not be withdrawn under any circumstances.

(viii) The status of actionable complaints or information pending with the Disciplinary Directorate as well as cases pending before the Board of Discipline and the Disciplinary Committee, together with orders passed by these Disciplinary Authorities, shall be made available in the public domain in such manner as may be prescribed.

12.2     BOARD OF DISCIPLINE
(i) At present, the Board of Discipline (BOD) consist of a person who has experience in law and having knowledge of disciplinary matters and profession, is to be appointed by the Council to be the presiding officer of the Board of Discipline. Besides the above, there is one elected Council Member and other Central Government Nominee.

(ii) Now, section 21A is replaced by a new section 21A. Under this section, the presiding officer of the BOD will be nominated by the Central Government. Such person should not be a member of the Institute. He should have experience in law and knowledge of disciplinary matters and of the profession. The selection of such person shall be made by the Central Government from a panel of persons prepared by the Council in such manner as may be prescribed. Further, there will be one member to be nominated by the Central Government and one member to be nominated by the Council from the above panel who shall be members of BOD. It is also provided that there may be more than one Board of Discipline, and the Government Nominees may be common in more than one BOD.

(iii) The BOD, while considering the cases placed before it has to follow such procedure including faceless proceedings and virtual hearing as may be specified.
    
(iv) On receipt of the preliminary examination report from the Director (Discipline) or a Government complaint or information as stated in Para 12.1 (vi) by the BOD, it shall call upon the concerned member or the Firm to submit a written statement within 21 days. This time can be extended up to further 21 days in exceptional circumstances. The BOD has to conclude its inquiry within 90 days of the receipt of the preliminary examination report.

(v) Upon inquiry, if BOD finds that the member is guilty of professional or other misconduct mentioned in the First Schedule, it has to pass an order awarding punishment after affording an opportunity of hearing to the member within 30 days of its finding. This punishment will be in the nature of any one or more of the actions against the member, such as, (a) reprimand the member, (b) remove the name of the member for up to 6 Months, or (c) impose a fine up to Rs 2 lakhs.

(vi) If during the inquiry relating to a member, the BOD finds that the member, who is a partner or owner of a CA Firm, has been repeatedly found guilty of professional or other misconduct as stated in the First Schedule during the last 5 years, the BOD can (a) prohibit the CA Firm from undertaking any activity relating to the CA profession for a period up to one year, or (b) impose fine on the CA Firm up to Rs 25 lakhs. If the fine imposed on the member or the Firm is not paid within the specified time, the Council can remove the name of the member or the Firm from the Register of Members / Firms for such period as the Council may decide. It is not clear whether the period of 5 years stated in the section includes the period before the section comes into force.

12.3    DISCIPLINARY COMMITTEE
This existing section 21B is replaced by a new section 21B. This new section provides about the constitution and functions of the Disciplinary Committee (D.C.) as under:

(i) At present, D.C. is constituted by the council. In this Committee, President or the Vice President is the Presiding Officer. Further, there are two elected members of the Council and two Central Government nominees. The Council can appoint more than one D.C.

(ii) Under the new section 21B, the Presiding Officer of D.C. will be nominated by the Central Government. Such person shall not be a member of the Institute. He should have experience in law and knowledge of disciplinary matters and of the profession. The selection of such person shall be made by the Central Government from a panel of persons prepared by the Council in such manner as may be prescribed. Further, there will be two members having experience in the field of law, economics, business, finance or accountancy, not being a member of the Institute, will be nominated by the Central Government from the above panel prepared by the Council. The Council will be able to nominate two members out of the above panel. In other words, the President, Vice-President or any Council Member will not be a member of the Disciplinary Committee unless the Rules to be framed for constituting the panel, as stated above, permit to include the names of Council Members in the Panel. The section provides that there can be more than one D.C.

(iii) On receipt of the preliminary examination report from the Director (Discipline) or a Government complaint or information as stated in Para 12.1 (vi) above, by the D.C., it shall conduct the inquiry in the case of the concerned member or the Firm in the same manner as stated in Para 12.2 (iii), (iv), (v) and (vi) relating to proceedings before BOD. The only difference between the proceedings before BOD and D.C. is as under:

(a) The D.C. has to complete the inquiry within 180 days from the receipt of the preliminary examination report.

(b) The D.C. can award punishment by way of (i) reprimand, (ii) removal of the name of the member permanently or for such period as it may think fit, or (iii) impose fine upto Rs 10 lakhs.

(c) If the member, who is a partner or owner of a CA Firm, is repeatedly found guilty of professional or other misconduct as stated in the Second Schedule or both the First and Second Schedules during the last 5 years, D.C. can (i) prohibit the CA Firm from undertaking any activity relating to the CA profession for a period up to 2 years, or (ii) suspend or cancel the registration of the Firm and remove the name from the Register of Firms permanently or such period as it thinks fit, or (iii) impose a fine up to Rs 50 lakhs. If the fine is not paid within the specified time, the council can remove the name of such member or Firm from the Register of Members / Firms for such period as it may deem fit.     

12.4 APPEAL TO AUTHORITY
(i) Existing Section 22G provides for Appeal to the Appellate Authority. Sub-Section (3) is added in this section which defines the terms “Member of the Institute” and “Firm” as under:

(a) “Member of the Institute” includes a person who was a member on the date of the alleged misconduct although he has ceased to be a member of the Institute at the time of inquiry.

(b) “Firm” registered with the Institute shall also be held liable for misconduct of a member who was its partner or owner on the date of the alleged misconduct, although he has ceased to be such partner or owner at the time of the inquiry.

(ii) Another disturbing provision introduced in Section 22G states that no action taken under the provisions of chapter V dealing with “Misconduct” will bar a Central Government Department, a State Government, any Statutory Authority or a Regulatory Body from taking action against a member or a CA Firm. This will mean that apart from the disciplinary action faced by a member or a CA Firm by the Council, as stated above, the Central / State Government or any Government Authority can take action against the Member or CA Firm. It may so happen that even if the Council holds a member or CA Firm as not guilty, any Government Department may hold the Member or CA Firm guilty and award punishment under any other applicable law.

13. CA ACT VS. COMPANIES ACT
It may be noted that u/s 132 of the Companies Act, 2013, National Financial Reporting Authority (NFRA) has been constituted. NFRA has power to take action against certain specified Audit Firms. It can also investigate complaints against any such Audit Firm and the concerned partners for misconduct in the performance of their duties. Up to now, the CA Act permitted the Council to take action against misconduct by members. Now, power is given to the Council to take action against the CA Firms also. Section 132 (4) (a) of the Companies Act, 2013 specifically provides that no other Institute or Body shall initiate or continue any proceedings in such matters of misconduct where NFRA has initiated an investigation u/s 132. In view of this provision in the Companies Act, the Board of Discipline or Disciplinary Committee shall not be able to conduct an inquiry in the case of a CA Firm or its Partner if NFRA has started an inquiry against such CA Firm or its Partner. It may be noted that there is no similar provision in the CA Act as now amended. Therefore, if BOD or D.C. has started any inquiry about misconduct against a CA Firm or its partner, it cannot continue the same if the matter is referred to NFRA and it initiates proceeding u/s 132 of the Companies Act 2013.

14. TO SUM UP
14.1 The above article discusses the amendments made in the Chartered Accountants Act. Similar amendments are made by this single Act called “The Chartered Accountants, The Cost and Works Accountants and The Company Secretaries (Amendment) Act, 2022”. Thus, the other two Acts, namely, the Cost Accountants Act and the Company Secretaries Act, also stand amended in a similar manner.

14.2 The Statement of Objects and Reasons appended to the Bill when introduced, stated that the amendments are based on the recommendations of a High-Level Committee constituted by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs. It is also stated that the recent corporate events have put the profession of Charted Accountants under considerable scrutiny. Further, it is stated that the three Acts are amended to (i) strengthen the disciplinary mechanism by augmenting the capacity of the Disciplinary Directorate and providing time-bound disposal of disciplinary cases, (ii) address conflict of interest between the administrative and disciplinary arms of the Institute, (iii) include Firms under the purview of the disciplinary mechanism, (iv) enhance accountability and transparency by providing for the audit of accounts of the three Institutes by a CA Firm to be appointed by the council from the panel of Auditors maintained by the C&AG, and (v) provide autonomy to the Council of the three Institutes to fix various fees to be changed to members, Firms and students.

14.3 Reading the various amendments made in the Chartered Accountants Act, as discussed above, it is evident that most of the powers of the President, Vice-President and Council Members in the matters relating to disciplinary cases are now curtailed. The entire disciplinary mechanism will now be controlled by officers nominated by the Central Government. The only advantage will be that the decisions will be available in a time-bound manner.

14.4 One disturbing provision in the Amendment Act is that any Complaint or Information from any Government Department will have to be considered a prima facie case of misconduct, and an inquiry will have to be conducted. Further, if a Partner of a Firm is found to be guilty of misconduct under the First or Second Schedule, action can be taken against the Firm also.

14.5 By these amendments, an impression is created that the autonomy of the Council of the Institute to regulate the conduct of the Members of CA Profession is curtailed. The power to punish the guilty members will now be in the hands of the officers nominated by the Central Government. If these officers have no experience about the profession, the life of our members will become difficult.

 

YOUTUBE – HOW TO USE IT AS A BRANDING TOOL

HOW YOUTUBE CAN BECOME YOUR DIGITAL BRAND

Since its launch in 2005, YouTube has emerged as a powerhouse of reach and search engine optimisation (SEO). With more than two billion users and 30 million visits a day, YouTube has moved branding from video over static content. Gone are the days when a Facebook post, a tweet or newsletters to clients would suffice. Today, YouTube is no longer regarded as an entertainment site but a portal for self-education and branding.

Let us take a simple example – Your client calls and asks for simple steps to file his GST return. You prepare a four-page document spending a full day writing the same and share it with your client. The client now has to read the document and follow the steps in it and then visit the GST portal and try them out for himself to understand each step.

Alternatively, what can be far more valuable both to you and to the client is a screen recording the steps on the GST portal, making a video and sharing it with the client. You would have spent just ten minutes on it and the client would be more comfortable watching the video.

It is a well-known fact that visuals work better than text for both the consumer and the creator. Taking advantage of the visuals, professionals can build a brand for themselves that will have global reach. And if you are still not convinced that YouTube is ‘the next thing’ that you should choose for branding your firm, the following pointers may help convince you:

* YouTube is great in improving your SEO: The YouTube channel works as a second site and offers room for you to describe yourself. Additionally, you may also describe each video with tags to optimise search results and reach maximum people. Tagging videos for SEO purposes gives an advantage of being found in general.
* Global Audience: YouTube is analogous to Google or Bing where users visit to find useful tutorials, explanation videos, product reviews and so on.
* Posting on YouTube will help people find you on Google, which ultimately does the branding for you without you using any of the pull modes.
* Videos build a brand for you: Videos help humanise your brand. They bring it to life, taking your message from flat and static to dynamic and engaging. Videos help your brand build trust and authority in a unique way. If brands really want to connect with people, videos simply have to be a part of their digital marketing plans because videos capture our attention better than text and images.

Now that we have convinced you how important it is to have a YouTube channel for your brand, let us help you get started with some tips on launching your YouTube channel.

SETTING UP A BUSINESS YOUTUBE ACCOUNT
While almost all social media requires users to create an account to access their content, YouTube does not have any such requirement. A user can view its contents without having an account, but to upload your content you need an account. Membership is only required to view videos flagged as adult content. You can follow these steps to create your business YouTube account:

(i) Sign in to your company’s Google account.
(ii) Click on your Google account’s avatar (profile picture). You’ll find this in the top right corner. It’s a small circle containing your profile picture.
(iii) Click on ‘Your channel.’ It’s the top option in the first batch of icons.
(iv) Choose ‘Use a business or other name.’ You’ll need to select this option to get started with a business YouTube account. You can then enter your company’s name.
(v) Click ‘Create’ – and you have a business YouTube account!

In the top right-hand corner of the page, there are four buttons. The first one is an icon of a video camera that directs you to the page where you upload a video. The next icon is for YouTube apps. After that there is an icon for notifications and messages; it notifies you of your account activity, such as a new like or comment. The one closest to the right-hand side, which is an icon of your profile picture, will direct you to your account information pulled from Google.

CUSTOMISING YOUR YOUTUBE PROFILE AND VERIFYING YOUR CHANNEL
Once you’ve signed up for YouTube, you’ll need to customise your profile with your business’s information. Every user is assigned a channel according to the username and you will be given a specific URL so that other people can find your channel through a direct link – but you will need to do more than the basics to stand out from the competition.

A. Customise your channel
1. Add channel art;
2. Fill in your business info;
3. Create a channel trailer: While optional, a channel trailer (a brief video that introduces viewers to the content they’ll find on your YouTube channel) is an excellent customisation option to increase YouTube viewer engagement. Once you add this trailer, it will appear on your account’s homepage when viewers visit, helping to reel them in and acquaint them with your brand.

B. Interacting with others on YouTube
There are several ways to interact with other YouTube users:
(a) Comments and replies to the comments,
(b) Likes: If the channel likes are public, it works as a playlist for the channel,
(c) Subscription: The best way to get users,
(d) Playlists: You can organise related content together using the site’s playlist feature. If you choose to publicise your playlists, they will appear on your channel’s page below your uploaded content.
(e) Sharing: The site’s social widget allows users to share videos on other social media networks such as Twitter, Facebook, Google Plus, Blogger, Reddit, Tumblr, Pinterest and LinkedIn.

C. Verifying your YouTube channel
How will you know if a channel is verified or not? There will be a small checkbox which indicates a verification badge next to the channel’s name. To apply for verification, your channel must have 100,000 subscribers.

D. YouTube Live
Just like Facebook Live, YouTube has its own live-streaming feature. Broadcasts are usually oriented around news or sports but now many speakers have started taking their sessions on YouTube Live. And, many apps like Zoom allow internal integration where you can simply do a zoom meeting and live-stream it on YouTube.

STRATEGIES FOR BRANDING ON YOUTUBE
YouTube, like almost any other social media, is a lot about how many views you generate and how active is your audience. YouTube promotes channels and videos through its own unique Machine Learning Algorithm. There are no direct hacks available to achieve that but as always there is some smart work and a few tips which you can try to generate more views and create a successful channel.

Share videos on other social media platforms:
Link back to your videos whenever possible on your website and other social media networks. But don’t stop at direct video links. Link back to your channel so that your audience can see what it looks like and have the chance to subscribe.

Just uploading a video and sharing it on social media is not enough. You should have a proper video strategy on how you want to target your audience. For example, a video explaining GST3B around the due date will give you more views than on normal days.

Use relevant keywords in a video’s title, tags and description:
Experiment with different titles and descriptions. Selecting relevant keywords to increase hits is a common SEO strategy of marketers on any social networking site. It helps audiences find content that interests them. A quick exercise would be to watch one of your company’s videos from the beginning and to create a list of relevant words and phrases as you watch it.

Engage with similar content uploaded by other users:
Like and comment on videos uploaded by other users. Not only might those users stumble upon your videos and channel, but anyone else who sees that comment or like might do so as well. Do this with videos that have a similar topic, interest or theme as yours to attract new viewers.

Display content uploaded by other users:

In addition to liking and commenting on other users’ videos, you can highlight featured channels and your liked videos on your own account. In doing so, you show that you’re active in your industry’s YouTube community and direct traffic – a much-needed internet commodity – to other YouTube users in your realm. Be sure to highlight videos that are relevant to your viewer base and not uploads from your direct competitors.

Curate playlist:
If any of your videos follow a consistent theme, organise them together. Perhaps you upload a video every Friday morning; you could compile all those videos into a ‘Friday series’ playlist. Your playlists will appear on your channel’s page, right below your uploaded videos.

Upload content regularly – MOST IMPORTANT:
Especially if you’ve developed a decent pool of subscribers, viewers will be counting on you to create, edit and upload new content. This adds relevance to your brand. This also applies to any other website where users can follow and engage with your content.

Use clickable links to reference other content:
At the end of videos, you’ll notice that many videos reference previous, relevant or even newer content with a clickable link inside the video. You can add these while editing your video in the site’s video manager. This feature can also link to any pages or sites your video covers.

Use YouTube stories:
YouTube recently created YouTube stories, which are similar to Snapchat or Instagram stories. A ‘story’ is a collection of short videos that can remain visible for a day or until they’re deleted. It gives good visibility.

PERSONAL (FIRM) BRANDING ON YOUTUBE
Creating a brand for yourself and your firm is what you should primarily look at when going to YouTube and not to get clients or monetise. In the craving for more reach and gaining clients (which at first shouldn’t be the intent), the essence of branding should not be lost. However, there are still ways in which you may have a personal brand on YouTube.

Stick to your niche:
At first, find people you want to create your brand within. Your content should definitely be curated accordingly. For example, if you wish to showcase yourself as a GST expert, it is very important to regularly post videos on that topic. Diverging topics for the sake of gaining followers will not help in any way. The audience should be relevant and engaging and not more.

Call to action:
The Code of Ethics doesn’t allow us to mention contact or personal details in the educational video. However, the video description section is something that you may use to let people know how to reach you in case they have any queries. You may also use your profile to have contact details and email id or links to your professional social media profiles. This will make it easier for the viewer to reach out to you.

Start and end page:

Having a really good start and end page is as important as the content of the video. This is your chance to brand for yourself. For the end page, you may consider giving references to other videos which makes it convenient for the viewers to know where they will find their answers.

CONCLUSION
If used with correct strategies and efforts (which we have tried and put together in this article), YouTube can do branding for you and your firm (without, of course, in any way violating the Code of Ethics). However, it is also important to note that we do not violate any of the clauses in the COE. [For example, as per Clause 2.14.1.6(iv) – Q, the educational video should not make any reference to the CA firm and should not contain contact details or website in the video. However, your channel page may have such details in the description.]

PERSONAL BRANDING FOR CAs

It is always thought that being the best wins at anything. That might be true for sports but not for life and our profession. When it comes to sports, there is only one place to be – at the top. And to ace the game, you have to be the best. But when it comes to career progression and self-development, it’s different. Instead of being the best, you must strive for competency, credibility, differentiation in a unique and specialised niche.

In their book The Blue Ocean Strategy, authors W. Chan Kim and Renée Mauborgne write that ‘Blue ocean strategy challenges companies to break out of the red ocean of bloody competition by creating uncontested market space that makes the competition irrelevant instead of dividing up existing – and often shrinking – demand and benchmarking competitors. Blue ocean strategy is about growing demand and breaking away from the competition.’

The authors may be talking about businesses, although this thought if applied on a personal level makes one think, ‘But how do I break away from the competition?’ The answer is, Be different. Don’t just ask yourself, ‘What am I better at?’ Ask also, ‘How am I different?’

Anyone who tries can be different in their area of work by developing themselves, not just professionally but by getting better at one or more of the following skills:

  •  Writing – We’re all writers.
  •  Public speaking – Getting over the mental block most of us face. It helps you be a better leader.
  •  Selling – Develop a personal brand. We all have something to sell – our products, services, our ideas or even ourselves. To be able to create the right influence and impact gives an edge. Persuasion and negotiation skills matter.

What is branding? Simply put, your brand is your promise to your customer. It tells him what he can expect from your products and services, and it differentiates your offering from that of your competitors. Your brand is derived from who you are, who you want to be and who people perceive you to be. Similarly, personal branding is the practice of marketing people and their careers as brands. It is an on-going process of developing and maintaining a reputation and impression of an individual, group, or organisation. Your personal brand is how you promote yourself. It is the unique combination of skills, experience and personality that you want your followers to see. It is the telling of your story and the impression people gain from your online reputation.

PRINCIPLES FOR PERSONAL BRANDING
1. Credibility: The foundation for building credibility is trust. To boost credibility, you need to be honest. Keeping your communication open and honest not only sets an example for your co-workers but also shows others that they can trust you.
2. Competence: Building and polishing your core competence is imperative to establish yourself.
3. Values: Values help you establish a sense of purpose and direction for your personal brand. They act as guideposts that assist you in evaluating choices in your life. Values change as you change; they reflect what’s important to you at any given moment.

Strategy to build your brand through a five-step process
1. Brand clarity and strategy. To genuinely make a difference by being helpful, useful and relevant at all times with trust.
2. A website that wows. Updated at all times and within the guidelines of what the Institute regulations permit.
3. Authentic social media engagement that attracts, engages and compels people to do business with visibility and trust by sharing insightful views, dishing out wisdom or perspectives to benefit one and all.
4. Captivating and engaging content that converts, a communication plan that is purposeful and creative based on unique strengths. Communicate not to sell but to serve. Communicate not to advertise but to create meaningful conversations that enrich and enlighten.
5. Marketing to serve people with honesty, encouragement, generosity, compassion, kindness and respect, influence with integrity and transparency.

A Chartered Accountant is bound by his Code of Conduct & Ethics and cannot advertise or solicit for work. Hence, personal branding for a CA has to be done within the framework of this Code. Some guidelines prescribed by the Institute:

1. Website
Ensure that the website is on pull mode and not push mode. The details in the website should be so designed that they do not amount to soliciting clients or professional work. Be aware of the information that can be displayed on your website.

2. Publications
It is not permissible for a member to mention in a book or an article published by him, or a presentation made by him, any professional attainment(s) whether of the member or the firm of chartered accountants with which he is associated. However, he may indicate in a book, article or presentation the designation ‘Chartered Accountant’ as well as the name of the firm.

3. Public interviews
While giving interviews or otherwise furnishing details about themselves or their firms in public interviews or to the press or at any forum, the members should ensure that it should not result in publicity. Due care should be taken to ensure that such interviews or details about the members or their firms are not given in a manner highlighting their professional attainments.

4. Issue of greeting cards / invites
Issue of greeting cards or personal invitations by members indicating their professional designation, status and qualifications, etc., is not allowed. However, the designation ‘Chartered Accountant’ as well as the name of the firm may be used in greeting cards, invitations for marriages and religious ceremonies, etc., provided they are sent only to clients, relatives and friends of the members concerned.

5. Educational videos
While videos of an educational nature may be uploaded on the internet by members, no reference should be made to the chartered accountants’ firm wherein the member is a partner / proprietor. Further, it should not contain any contact details or website address.

6. Use of logo / monogram
The use of logo / monogram of any kind / form / style / design / colour, etc., whatsoever by a CA is prohibited. Members may use the common logo created for the CA profession.

A brand is a simple but complex perception in the minds of the beholder. Brands are built not by accident but by design. A great positioning statement is an opener for any conversation about your business. Know who you are, what you do, what is different about what you do and for whom you do it and how you are a good fit. It is not the client’s job to remember you. It is your job that they do not forget you. You have many options but select the one that works best for you. This is similar to a client having many options but he selects you.

* Don’t create a design without strategy – Strategise
* Don’t try to do everything on your own – Outsource
* Don’t wait for the perfect moment – Speed and agility matters with flexibility.

Have a tagline or a brand manifesto formula in three words you want to be spoken for you
* What action are you doing? Verb
* Which audience are you serving? Noun
* What are you bringing to the table, uniquely, differentiated, unlike anybody else? Noun – Verb (competition has failed to address).

Some questions you should introspect before you start building your brand

* The key messaging, positioning, unique promise or value offered by my competition;
* The gaps seen or the category that can be created or value added that is unique;
* Carving a niche, building, strengthening and dominating it to be out of bounds of competition;
* Top three mistakes / weaknesses of competition that can be leveraged to create exceptional value to be at a different level;
* Perspectives offered that are unique and radically distinct from other industry leaders;
* Key distinguishing factors in personal brand management at a global level.

Social media as a medium for personal branding

Amidst the global lockdowns as a result of the pandemic, we have found a lot more time on our hands. Many of us have actively started building an online presence. It may be the best time to do it – while the global economy is taking a massive hit which will have long-reaching implications, digital platforms are seeing higher engagement rates than ever, with more and more people looking for information and entertainment online and focusing their attention on social platforms and other apps. This could provide an opportunity to get your thoughts out there and to build your profile with a captive audience.

Using LinkedIn effectively
LinkedIn is the older, more responsible sibling of Facebook. The benefits of LinkedIn are endless. With a few clicks, you can find your dream job or your dream client. LinkedIn not only makes it easier for you to find people but also for others to discover you.

A few tips to get you started

  •  Be active on social media.
  •  Tap into your network. Networking is the key.
  • Write a simple but engaging LinkedIn summary or headline – the short, one-line description which readers will first see along with your name.
  1.  Keep your profile updated with skillsets possessed, experience, recommendations, etc.
  •  Post original content.
  •  Network not to sell and market blatantly but develop connects for creating mutual win-wins and helping each other grow and develop as better human beings. The business conducted as a result of the trust and the bonding developed is purely incidental.

A BLUEPRINT TO BUILD A PERSONAL BRAND
1. Serious soul-searching, introspection and brainstorming to find purpose, vision, to get clarity on What am I doing, why am I doing it and for whom?
2. Understanding the competitive landscape to grab opportunities in the external eco-system at play.
3. Thinking like a thought leader to focus outside in, to enrich and add value with personal mastery which no one else is doing.
4. Create your Brand Universe (Strategy) – Thought Leadership Capital – Repurposing and targeting your message to your audience. The new way of thinking is to claim and dominate your niche. Personify your topic so that no one dares to try it.
5. Define and own your Brand Intellectual Property as there is no dearth of copycats or thieves. Ring-fence and protect your idea by all means. You are the brand ambassador of your IP.
6. Define your target audience and what value you give them.
7. Building your network blueprint around those to whom you can add value. It doesn’t matter whom you know but what matters is who knows you and your personal brand. Expand your visibility across three degrees of network.
8. Design a content strategy. Your brand is as good as your content. Context is relevant for your content; know where your audience stays or is visible; have a signature style of expression.
9. Launch your brand – strategise the timing of making your completed profile public and then creating a complimentary engagement strategy to keep the brand vibrant and relevant.
10. Build your speaker brand. Craft a ‘rockstar’ speech with signature topics. Position and craft stellar speeches by presenting them brilliantly. Be awesome, full of energy and enthusiasm, don’t be boring.
11. Build your author brand. Write a book on your niche that showcases your knowledge and is useful to your target audience and helps effectively in solving their pain-points. Don’t just be visible but also relevant.
12. Build a tribe of like-minded professionals who can give quality feedback to fast-track your speed and development whilst earning their trust and love.

Branding takes time. Start now. Massive learnings happen on the way. Integrity, Transparency, Authenticity, Originality, Competency and Credibility matter. Be consistent to leave a legacy that far outlives your physical life. Stay Branded – Stay Blessed – and Serve the World.

Credit share: My Branding Guru – Tanvi Bhatt / My CA colleague – Cynora Lemos.

STRATEGY: THE HEART OF BUSINESS – PART II

Strategy is the heart of running and changing a winning business, as we saw in Part I (BCAJ, March, 2021). Crafting a good strategy is critical for an enterprise to realise its growth and value creation aspirations. This is a capability which successful organisations have in abundance, otherwise they use external experts (aka consultants). What is equally important is Strategy Deployment, i.e. executing the strategy effectively. In many contexts I would say that a higher weightage can be accorded to smart execution. Even a first mover of a strategy may lose out over time if execution does not keep pace. Ford Motor Company, for example, invented cars, but Japanese cars rule the roost in the automobile world now. In this Part II, I will share some aspects about successful execution which I have experienced over the years in running businesses.

The Vision, Mission and Values set, an enterprise typically aspires for a Strategic Target to be achieved in a defined time frame. Towards this goal, a Strategy Map is drawn out which clarifies the strategic objectives and initiatives to be deployed. We have seen how a Strategy Deployment Matrix1 is a great tool to align and integrate individual, team, department and functional goals with that of the enterprise. Now on to some detail on deployment.

LEAD AND LAG

An individual or a Function planning activities by setting goals can use two types – Lead and Lag actions or goals. A Lead action or activity is one which can be executed or influenced and which will result in an outcome or achievement in the desired direction. Lag goals are the ones which are the targeted or intended results. A typical example is the case of a person who wishes to get fitter or become healthier. A Lag goal s/he can have is to lose say five kilograms of weight. The Lead actions or goals which will result in delivering this Lag goal can be (i) eat right, say 2,000 calories per day, and (ii) be active, say walk 10,000 steps daily. The Lag measure is thus the outcome driven by the Lead measure or actions driving the process as indicated in Figure 1 below:

Therefore it is essential to have a healthy mix of Lead and Lag goals while crafting the plan for the year. The goals chosen should be spread over the four perspectives to make a Balanced Scorecard2. With this structure, it lends itself to constructive periodic reviews on how the actions are progressing towards the set goals. This is pictorially depicted in Figure 2 hereunder.

ALIGNMENT AND INTEGRATION
The goals thus planned to be executed in any organisation have to be aligned with the enterprise objectives, at every level and person all the way down. While this will be a vertical flow, it is also important that these are integrated well across functions or departments to make a synergistic impact pulling in the same direction. In all this, robust communication at every level individually or in groups is absolutely critical for the team to comprehend the collective goals and develop a collaborative and committed mind-set. This is outlined in Figure 3.



TOOLS FOR EXECUTION

Having structured and deployed the goals meaningfully, I have utilised a number of effective tools to drive and monitor execution. The purpose is to ensure a discipline in the desired actions being performed as well as to have a structured process in place to review progress. The idea is that attention is given and focused on the exceptions and escalation happens to the appropriate level in time for interventions to help delivery. These are based on two fundamental tenets:

Let us examine some tools which are helpful for the purpose.

ORGANISATIONAL REVIEWS
The strategic target broken down into executable actions on the lines mentioned above will need to be monitored for performance. A broader framework on integrating the review fora and the areas to be covered was touched upon earlier3. This can be detailed out into a review framework as illustrated in Figure 4. The purpose of structuring the review discipline across the organisation is to ensure that not only the right areas are reviewed at the appropriate levels, but also to avoid overlap and superfluous efforts. This process also clarifies the periodicity of each review, the timing, topics as well as the attendance. The team is thus clear on the forum available and the expectation of right feedback.

In these review meetings the agenda being set, it is expected that the concerned will circulate pre-read papers so that the participants can come into the discussion with preparation. That way time is not frittered away in sharing fundamental data and base information. Furthermore, the areas and items which require decision-making in the forum are highlighted. The bulk of the time is therefore focused on decision-making and the team collectively addressing exceptions or areas which record tardy progress.

Performance Review Structure

Review
Forum

Key
Measures / Objectives

Frequency

Probable
date and duration

Participation

Agenda

Board

Strategy
and Operational, Performance Measures

5 times a year

 

Board members, MD & CEO

Policies & Capabilities, Changing Org. Needs, Adherence to
strategic goals

Executive
Committee

Scorecard achievement,
Corporate, Projects, Major issues

Monthly

1st and 2nd week, 3 hrs.

Executive Committee members, MD & CEO, Invitee for specific
session

Performance, capabilities, Comp.,
Performance, Changing Org. needs, LT / ST plans, innovation

ORM (Operational review meeting)

Execution of actions planned, Decision on issues

Monthly

2nd week, full day

MD & CEO, COO, EVP Finance, VP Mfg, EVP-TBD, VP-DS, VP-IBD,
VP-HR, GMs, Mkt Heads, Identified, Functional heads, Other Invitees

Operational performance, EPM measure, KPI, real contribution,
working capital, Customer Feedback / Supplier’s Inputs, People Issues,
Environment Innovation.

Cross Functional Teams reviews     

Result of cross functional Initiatives

Monthly

3rd week, 2-3 hrs.

MD & CEO, COO, EVP-Finance, Cross Functional Team members,
Special Invitees

Operational performance, status of projects,
improvement initiatives, Capital projects, Supply chain, Fund Management

Functional review meetings (Factory / Zones)

Operational performance review

Monthly

1st week, full day

Chiefs, Factory heads, Zonal managers, Other department heads,
Special Invitee

Divisional performance, Project status,
Market / Customer Issues, Finance Issues, Safety & Env.

Dept. Review

Achievement against
projected performance

Weekly / Monthly

Specified day, 2-3 hrs

Dept. Heads & Dept. Staff as required, Cross Functional Team
members

Unit Performance, Capabilities, SHE related
Issues, Initiatives, Supply chain

COLOUR CODE TRACKING VISION (CCTV)
The CCTV is a simple yet powerful mechanism to visually comprehend the problem areas in any project or goal delivery. Equally, it also provides comfort at a glance on the projects or areas which are going well. Thus, it does not require intervention at any senior level and can be left to the person / team responsible to deliver as intended. Such a visual representation as portrayed in Figure 5 is quite helpful in any review meeting for the team to quickly pick up and focus on the areas which deserve collective attention.

As can be seen, the CCTV highlights in the traffic signal colours over a period of time the health of the various interventions. Remarks on sluggish progress where applicable are given along with the suggested actions. Discussion can be forthwith focused on the points highlighted in red as well as yellow items with the result that the meetings conclude with specific actions agreed to get the laggard items back on track.

CCTV (colour code tracking vision)

Project/
Initiative

Original
Target
Date

Status
as of

Remarks

Action
required

01-
Jan
-21

08-
Jan
-21

15-
Jan
-21

22-
Jan
-21

29-
Jan
-21

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ORGANISATIONAL RESPONSIVENESS
In times of uncertainty and volatility, responsiveness in organisations has to be real-time. Often, delayed responses which occur due to blindness in information lead to lost opportunities and may even result in longer-term adverse impact, such as loss of market share. This is being experienced by entities and has been telling since early 2020 due to disruptions from the Covid pandemic.

Businesses can witness significant volatility in terms of cost escalations, supply bottlenecks, changing terms of business, disruption in external environment, etc. This necessitates a change in the way of making business decisions.

An effective way I have experienced in the past is to form a cross-functional team consisting of all key operational departments (vide Figure 6). This team keeps a weekly (even daily) track of changes in the environment and decides appropriate actions to address the changes. For example, the team could introduce a concept of pricing that is based on replacement cost. Based on inputs from the procurement department, the finance team circulates the replacement cost to all the departments, which is used for frequently reviewing pricing decisions in the organisation. This will result in protection from margin erosions in a highly volatile environment. It will also help in timely sourcing of the key materials to cater to the emerging business opportunities.

Cross-functional Action team:
A Weekly feature

Forum for discussion on changing scenario and taking appropriate actions



DRIVING EXECUTION: AGILITY INDEX

It is common to find organisational review fora having a system of making minutes of the meeting. I have found that in doing so some simple tweaks can bring in greater efficiency:
(i) at the end of the meeting, every participant shares the takeaway of his / her actions. Not only does this clarify what each person / team has understood but also instils ownership in delivering actions;
(ii) the secretary of the meeting ensures that the minutes are circulated within 24 hours of the close of the meeting; and
(iii) measuring the speed of execution in terms of ‘Agility Index’.

A score of 9 is assigned to completed actions (Colour Code: Green).
A score of 3 is assigned to actions that are yet to be completed but are in progress (Colour Code: Yellow).
And a score of 1 is assigned to actions that have not been initiated (Colour Code: Red).

The Agility Index (Figure 7) is computed by summing up the item-wise score expressed as a percentage to the total possible, which is the sum of all items times 9 which indicates completion. This, at a glance gives the efficiency of implementation of the agreed actions in an objective manner. This index can also be used to track the action implementation efficiency of Board Meetings as well.

 Agility Index

Action
Agreed

Responsibility
/Owner

Timeline

Status

Tracker
points

 

 

 

 

 

1.  xxx

ABC

15-Apr

 

9

 

 

 

 

 

2.  yyy

PQR

18-Apr

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

3.  zzz

XYZ

21-Apr

 

1

DIGITAL ENABLERS
Digital age now has pervaded all aspects of life at work and in personal domain. Digital technologies such as Cloud, Mobility, Internet of Things, Artificial Intelligence and Virtual Reality are enabling organisations to reimagine and transform businesses. A plethora of tools and information is available through the digital platform greatly enhancing execution capability. In agriculture, for example, gone are those bad old days like the protagonist in Do Bigha Zameen physically labouring away. In advanced agriculture economies such as USA and Brazil, farmers control the entire farming through electronic and mechanical processes using drones, hi-tech machines4, etc. to make the right decisions based on soil and environmental insights and practice precision farming. All this sitting in a control room away from the field! AI and predictive technologies have enabled to customise practices with understanding of future weather and pest changes. Manufacturing operations are guided today by Computer-aided Design, Big Data, Machine Learning, Robotics, etc. which significantly improve productivity and quality. All this, however, has led to an explosion of information available and it is crucial to design internal systems to process and focus these for effective execution.

EXECUTION: A DISCIPLINE
Authors Larry Bossidy and Ram Charan wrote in their remarkable book5 that ‘execution is a specific set of behaviours and techniques that companies need to master in order to have competitive advantage’. Execution is therefore a discipline which ensures that the strategy to achieve the strategic goals of the enterprise is duly deployed and implemented to have sustained competitive advantage. Therefore, we can conclude that Performance is Strategy plus EXECUTION.

This is the last article in this series by Mr. V. Shankar. For the previous five articles, please refer to the BCAJ issues of January 2020, March 2020, June 2020, August 2020 and March 2021

References
1.    Strategy: The Heart of Business – Part I, BCAJ, March, 2021, Page 13
2.     ‘The Balanced Scorecard: Translating Strategy into Action’ by David P. Norton and Robert S. Kaplan
3.     Governance & Internal Controls: The Touchstone of Sustainable Business – Part II, BCAJ, June, 2020, Page 15
4.     https://youtu.be/FNn5DB1Zen4
5.   ‘Execution: The Discipline of Getting Things Done’ by Larry Bossidy and Ram Charan

ROLLING OUT ‘COACHING’ IN PROFESSIONAL SERVICES FIRMS

In today’s world of information overload and entertainment addiction, the attention span of most of the younger generation and our grandkids is going down. They are amazingly tech-savvy, smarter and faster than us and even those before us. The ones joining / doing their professional courses are also very clear on the balance between work and life. Those who are joining these professional courses now are comparatively more affluent with time. They are also clear on the need to set aside space to grow.

The earlier understanding of in-depth knowledge and rattling off the sections, sub-sections, clauses and explanations is no longer in vogue. Practical problem-solving in the shortest time is the call of the day.

The advanced world is adapting rapidly to the needs of being able to empower the students to be able to meet the unknown future. The ability to communicate and present effectively have been the most-sought-after skills in the past decade. This decade is seeing ‘coaching / mentoring’ as the most important key to success in the workplace, be it in services, startups, or in professional firms. Lakhs of life coaches are available today on commercial basis but a few do it out of passion. Mentors are few and far between. Readers may Google for the difference between them. Suffice it to say that mentoring is normally longer term and may not be specific to ‘growth’ or ‘profession’ and could be said to lean towards the ‘gurukul’ system.

There can be different coaches for different aspects like profession, sport, life itself.

This article attempts to provide some thoughts on ‘how to’ take up steps that one can adopt for putting a coaching plan in action in a CA firm. It is based on the exercise undertaken in the past two decades with the concentration being on the last year. (The ongoing pandemic gives us the time for both sides!)

WHO CAN BE COACHED?
Anyone can be coached if they are willing. However, most employees / partners may opt out as they see it as an exercise for additional responsibility, intrusion into their privacy, etc. The advantages of getting coached to be more effective (smart), fast-track their growth and reach their potential early could reduce the resistance.

There can be no coaching without the student / professional (hereinafter called student) being convinced that they need to be coached and by that particular person. Their view that distinguished seniors / friends may not be ideal as they could be carrying baggage which can come in the way of open listening needs to be assuaged. Suggestions would include the need to change their thought process, take on disciplined habits which would need them to step out of their comfort zone. The resistance can come in the implementation of suggestions like ‘deliberate gratitude’ where they may need to have open oral acknowledgements with their parents / others.

The objective could be to be able to reach limitation due to past / present events, reframe the ‘stories’ to recognise that they were mere events and nothing more… rather, they were a guide for a broader ‘world view’. It is important to ensure that it is not mixed up with the objective of being advantageous to the firm.

It may also be important to set (a) the purpose, (b) the limits and (c) have a broad agreement on how it would go along as it is a strong commitment of time and proactive effort on both sides.

If there is too much resistance then the student may have to be encouraged to find out more by watching various coaching videos, read articles / books on the subject and learn like ‘Eklavya’.

WHO CAN COACH?
There is no one born to coach but those having good interpersonal skills and compassion could find it easier. Both these skills can be cultivated and one can learn about them on the internet. The competencies which can be focused on and which are needed to be a coach / mentor could be:

1) Listening deeply to what is being shared without distractions, disturbances and interruptions. The coach should even be able to catch some of the unsaid things.
2) Learning to ask the appropriate questions to understand the student / professional’s mental make-up and possible ‘block’ which they cannot see (reading between the lines, as they say). Avoid judging in the interaction.
3) Be aware of the general characteristics of the generation (a result of the environment) but not to be judgmental while listening. Understand Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs for arriving at the real reasons for decisions taken.
4) Get to understand possible and available ‘tools’ such as workbooks for coaching.
5) Understand that even managers / partners have a need to be loved, belonging, worthiness, constant validation and at times feeling that they are not enough.
6) Dealing with coaching setbacks with the belief that one is striving to make a difference.
7) Need to be self-motivated as well as motivating all the time and avoid blame and complaints about the students.
8) A coach who is in a rush or insists on completion of one stage can get a student disconnected.
9) If possible, the coach should have mindfulness (being aware of his feelings, thoughts and sensations), heartfulness (being sincere and warm in feelings / emotions) and soulfulness (expressing deep feelings and emotions).

ALTERNATE WAYS / MEANS OF COACHING
The need to understand the ways and means (tools) to coach gives us the needed confidence to take up this onerous contributing exercise. Some of the ways could be as under:

I   Learning to be a good coach as explained above is most important;
II  Listen to clients – are they holding back – past, present or future? Where excited, sad, body language, listen for frustrations / challenges / what is holding them back, demotivating factors;
III Thinking to spark ideas / alternatives for them to be even better. Insightful real self-stories along with well-known stories of others could strike a chord. Use of metaphors is found relatable and acceptability is high;
IV Communicating – how we reply (judging vs. empathetic); absolute truth vs. relative truth – circumstances / environment being considered;
V  Long-term habits / behaviour changes and sticking to it by journaling, habit tracker, daily empowering routine can be emphasised;
VI Emotional Awareness / Mapping: +ive / -ive emotions ranked. Those below the average improved (issue may be self-esteem, negative environment, meaning given to events) and those with high marks also sharpened;
VII    Emotional Training.

All emotions to be detailed as and when felt – not vague. Once labelled, suggestions could be:
1. Distance self from the incident / communication – as if it is happening to someone else;
2. If in five years it would not mean anything, do not spend more than five minutes on it;
3. Look at the incident from the other person’s point of view if something keeps coming back.

POSSIBLE METHODOLOGY OF COACHING (HOW TO?)
a) Categorise the professional into the five major types of human beings to be able to customise the coaching. (A = Director; B = Socialiser; C = Thinker; D = Supporter; and X = Combination of two or more.)

b) Understand the past, present with possibly a strength / weakness assessment.

c) Understand / agree on the need for coaching and acceptability of the coach.

d) Establish ‘connect’ by listening actively.

e) Set framework and periodicity as per mutual convenience of the student / professional.

f) In the physical meeting (preferred) or virtual one be open and transparent as a coach and if some resistance is observed, do not hurry or decide, probe sensitively – give time.

g) Getting the understanding of the emotional intelligence which rules each and every one of us by self and later the students’ / professionals’ ranking. This could lead to self-realisation and the beliefs / areas where one may like to focus to be more balanced.

h) Ability to reframe the issue by placing for consideration the possibilities is vital. The shame, incompetence, helplessness expressed to be presented that one is enough, one is as good as the next or the opportunity to grow, respectively.

i) Guide in the setting up of SMART goals by looking at ‘wow’ goals, why that goal is important (three to five reasons), sub-goals to achieve the goal, how one needs to ‘be’ to achieve the goals. Finally, how to achieve to-dos with timelines on yearly, quarterly, monthly, weekly and daily action points.
(a)    This is a crucial part where sharing of incidents in one’s life, being vulnerable connects one better.
(b)    Arriving at achievable goals with areas of ‘higher calling’ may be vital: envisioning a better world, being an inspirational person, believing that small daily acts can lead to the astounding results that one wants.

j) Look at facilitating the goals set with genuine positive celebratory acknowledgements for the improvement as perceived by the student / professional is a key to continuation.

k) Seek out the challenges and see the alternatives as identified by the student. Do not be in a hurry to provide the solutions. Rather, guide them to the answers to ensure ownership of the solution.
l) Proven technologies such as focus on being rather than doing, deliberate gratitude, regular exercise, breathing properly, meditation, journaling, letting go of the past and learning to forgive could be part and parcel of this coaching.

m) Follow through at least for six months to one year on a monthly basis to get the desired results.

n) Much more by involving and growing in coaching.

CONCLUSION
The world, India and our profession, all of them need heroes. Everyone has the capacity and potential to be that in at least one area. One cannot think of a better contribution / legacy than leaving the world better off  with committed, professional global citizens / leaders. Coach yourself and coach all at the office for an empowered and happy office with no limits on growth of the individual or firm.

CREATING YOUR DIGITAL PERSONA ON TWITTER #tweetandgrow

Before we even talk about how Twitter can build a brand for you, let’s take a look at a story. Mr. A has been regularly active on his and his firm’s Twitter account. He shares regular updates, reposts important messages from official handles and is quick to even put up notifications and circulars as and when they are released. He is passionate about staying updated and also keeping others updated. Mr. B, who follows Mr. A on Twitter, gets a notification every time Mr. A posts or tweets. Mr. B has now become so comfortable with all this that he relies on Mr. A for updates and himself doesn’t keep checking Government portals. He even asks his acquaintances to do that. This has indeed helped Mr. A build a brand on social media.

The above-mentioned story is replicating real-life incidents which we would have come across on social media (emphasising Twitter here).

So what exactly is Twitter?

Theoretically, Twitter is a ‘microblogging’ system that allows you to send and receive short posts called tweets. Tweets can be up to 280 characters long and can include links to relevant websites and resources. Interestingly, many had underestimated the power of 140 characters (when it started). However, the way Twitter is changing the world currently is well documented. The US election or influencing movie reviews and its rating speak for it. So when we have such a powerful medium in our hands (Mobile App), is it not wise to utilise it to the fullest extent? As the saying goes, the biggest risk we take is not taking any (‘life me sabse bada jokhim hai, koi jokhim na lena’). We might even say that not being on Twitter during this time is the biggest risk we may face.

Over the past few issues, we have covered various topics on ‘Branding for Chartered Accountants’ in a series of articles. However, Twitter is one of the most important but complex social media, in our opinion. It is powerful, gives you direct access to almost anyone in the world but it is very personalised and needs attention on a real-time basis. For example, your other social media accounts may be managed by your team, and they can post lovely greetings messages on various festivals and give news updates. However, if the same is repeated on Twitter it may be considered as boring and irrelevant. We are not saying that you cannot share the same updates here, too, but sharing only those updates hardly works here and that’s what makes Twitter unique – it needs personalisation.

To keep it crisp and short, let’s look at how we can master this social medium (from scratch):

Step 1: Create an account on Twitter

 
 
Obviously, this is a very basic step but unlike some social media, you can visit tweets and view the comments on Twitter without even having a valid account. Many of the news channels today add links and references to tweets which you can visit on the Twitter page sans an account. So, the first part in Digital Branding is to have your own Twitter account. A good username is a must to start with. A Twitter @name is basically a handle where the ‘@’ sign is followed by words and numbers. Ideally, a professional Twitter handle will use the Twitter user’s name or company. For example, the user account of ICAI is @theicai and it conveys to whom it belongs.

Step 2: Choose profile photo and background


 
As an Individual, use a headshot or candid, doing something related to the message or brand. For example, a public speaker can select a photo with a microphone in hand addressing a gathering. Twitter recommends this photo be roughly 400×400 pixels in size to avoid distortion when the image is resized to fit in the assigned area. On the other hand, a Background Image consists of the entire upper portion of the Twitter profile page and the large rectangular section above the profile photo on the Twitter user’s home page. Twitter recommends the header background photo be around 1500×500 pixels. Pro Tip: Keeping your account without Image or Background Image reduces both impact and reach.

Step 3: Write a good Bio
Bio is a short introduction of the user. Ideally, Twitter allows 160 characters to tell something about users. Use it well to convey your message to readers. About who you are, your past achievements / designations, interests and so on. A good Bio can help in enhancing your SEO and Twitter’s AI. Even the Google Search engine picks up words from users’ Bios to divide them into relevant categories.

Step 4: Other settings
There are other small but significant settings that can improve your Twitter Profile, such as:

Share your location: There is an option to add your location information to each tweet. This is switched Off by default for privacy reasons. But users who want to communicate where they are to their followers (like a speaker who is travelling to different places to address gatherings) will probably want to keep it On to convey the message.

Pin tweet: Once you are regular on Twitter, there is generally a tweet which defines you or a particularly important aspect for you or your profile which you want everyone who visits your profile to see. Such tweets can be pinned to the top of your Twitter timeline so that anyone who visits your timeline will see that tweet first.

Step 5: Be a content creator instead of only a content consumer
There is a famous saying, ‘The biggest mistake you could ever make is being afraid to make one.’ We do that when it comes to using social media. We avoid tweets with many thoughts in our minds. However, it is essential to start using social media to add value and share opinions. While apps like Instagram, YouTube may not be easier to start as not everyone is tech-savvy to create a good image and upload it, Twitter is a bit easier compared to the apps of other social media. All you need is to have an opinion and express the same. Besides, remember that the limit of one tweet is 280 characters. So it is indeed easy to start and express yourself. However, you also need to remember while tweeting – why are you on Twitter. You may be diverted to many topics like politics, religion and so on. Some of these are hot topics and you can spend hours and hours but it becomes very important to be aware of what is your ultimate goal.

Step 6: Enhancing reach and creating a brand
This is the most important step in using any social media. The ultimate goal of being on social media for digital branding has to be that reach where you can convey your message to the masses. Twitter, unlike other social media, is very difficult for beginners. Twitter AI works differently from TikTok or Instagram, where the app automatically promotes smaller accounts or new accounts based on content marketing. Twitter is like going into the gym and losing weight. You need to have a definite strategy and be consistent with it. For the first few weeks / months you may not see the results but once it starts gaining momentum, the user gets returns for all the previous months.

We are happy to share some strategies which can help you build a brand on Twitter (without violating the Code of Ethics):

a. Talk on trending topics daily:
Twitter shows daily trending topics on its app as well as browser. You can check the same on Twitter Mobile App as well as browsers. Trending topics are the ones that everyone is talking about as of today. If you feel it is related to one of your interests, do add your tweets that give a perspective. For example, if you are trading in shares and the share market is up or down and it’s trending today, you can talk about your experience and perhaps offer some general tips without getting into the role of an investment adviser.

b. Create an interesting thread on trending topics and topics of your expertise:
A thread on Twitter is a series of tweets that talks about particular topics. While primarily Twitter’s USP is limited words, sometimes it’s not possible to convey everything in one tweet. In that case, users create multiple tweets in reply to create a thread. Looking at its importance even Twitter redesigned its app to permit thread options by adding a small + sign just before the ‘Tweet’ button. This allows users to create all tweets at once and send them all at the same time.


 
Today, many journalists and influencers are using Threads to convey their message in a crisp and systematic manner, such as explaining the timeline of the Tata vs. Mistry case with details or screenshots of orders. These threads are becoming a very important part of the Twitter journey now.

c. Reply on influencers’ post:
When you start your Twitter journey and you have limited followers, your tweets won’t have that reach or interaction that can look attractive. So one of the easiest ways to gain followers and build a brand is replying to already known influencers on Twitter. One of the most important aspects is to avoid trolling and public shaming, specifically when you are building a professional brand on Twitter. Industry leaders like Mr. Anand Mahindra, Mr. Harsh Goenka and others are usually very active on Twitter and they generally tweet engaging content where many users reply. Adding a reply to these kinds of accounts giving your perspective is the easiest way to grow. Try to find other influencers with a not very large following so that they have replies but not in thousands; your replies will then be visible and there is a chance of getting into conversations.

P.S.: Twitter is a public platform and your opinion can be read by anyone, so be careful about posting an opinion as it can go viral at a time when you are least expecting it – and in this digital world everything is permanent thanks to screenshots and virtually unlimited storage capacity.

d. Create a separate account for your business / firm:
Don’t mix your personal account with business as you may have a different agenda for the two. Your business account can be limited to updates regarding your business and industry. Your personal account can talk about your business, your interests, your hobbies and so on.

Ideally, your strategy should be specific to your brand and firm. But following the above tips will definitely get you started on the right foot. Keep in mind that building a brand will take time, but with a branding strategy in place, branding is well within your reach.

CHANGE IS CONSTANT

It’s funny how day by day nothing changes. But when you look back, everything is different – C.S. Lewis

In this series of articles, we have covered various aspects of the ‘Digital Workplace’ and how the world is moving with technology. What had seemed impossible is becoming routine and what was routine is now changing. The world has moved on from going to the office daily to staying at home and managing work using whatever technology is available to ensure that, first and foremost, we remain safe. But with the steady re-opening of the economy, we are again changing our habits and people have started returning to the routine of the pre-pandemic era. Working at office has come a full circle now, from WFH being mainstream, and to WFO (Working from Office) once again becoming mainstream. But while most things have gone back to the pre-pandemic era, there are many things that have changed in the pre- and post-pandemic times. While the ‘Digital Workplace’ is not the ideal way of working at present, technology is constantly improving.

In this concluding article on ‘Digital Workplace’ we highlight three important points that everyone needs to consider to find the right balance between ‘Traditional Workplace’ vis a vis the ‘Digital Workplace’ and ways to prepare for the ‘Future of Digital Offices’.

1. Evaluate worker preferences carefully: Flexible office instead of a fixed and traditional way of working
Yes, the benefits of having an office and the entire team working together are unparalleled. Despite all the talk about ‘Virtual Offices’, we have still not reached a level where virtual offices can replace the existing office with people around us. There are numerous benefits of having the place to work, yet, such offices are not without their own limitations. Travelling to the
office is still the biggest challenge. In fact, the average Indian spends around 7%1 of her time daily in just travelling from home to office. Also, this number can go significantly higher when it comes to travelling in cities like Mumbai with limited public transport
facilities.

While everyone has accepted the importance of the office and travelling to it daily, no one can deny the fact that it does not hurt if employees or even promoters are not able to travel to office daily for the entire year. The existing technology supports such smaller breaks easily. For example, working from somewhere in the mountains once a year while enjoying weekends to ensure that you just don’t have to cancel your trip for a day or two’s work, or simply working while travelling, more popularly known as ‘Staycation’.

How many of you have faced a situation where a good employee has had to leave the office just because he / she has shifted to another city? While earlier it might not have been possible, today, an office can create an exemption and let a person work from home or just give some flexible working hours and WFH specially to female employees who face difficult times to work full time but have performed well in the past.

To make sure your plans align with what your team wants, find workable compromises:
* Avoid tensions that can sour your culture, have important but hard conversations with the team and conduct surveys to discover what most people prefer to do;
* Consider whether allowing your remote workers to stay at home would create a practical or financial burden;
* If remaining at home benefits employees’ mental or physical health, or their overall productivity, consider allowing them to maintain their current set-up.

Most companies have been vague about their plans or haven’t discussed them at all, which has resulted in bigger issues as many employees feel that their employers are disconnected from the reality.

2. Review consumer behaviours: Video calls over travelling
During the pandemic, consumers drastically changed their behaviour, spiking e-commerce and adapting to options like no-contact pickup and pay. As McKinsey & Company points out, this has shifted many of their long-term expectations and companies are having to account for that shift in how they operate and what they offer.

One such change was the most common realisation of 2020 amongst all of us that we do not always need to travel to the client’s place for a meeting and that it can be done with a video call. While this was good till it lasted, gradually we are moving back to the pre-pandemic era and we may see travel increasing again. However, the learnings of the year 2020 should not be wasted completely. With travelling permitted, we may prefer to visit and meet people again, but perhaps many such meetings can be replaced with video calls thanks to Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, etc.

But consumers and your team are interconnected. When your workers are happy to buy into your vision, they work better and provide better service so that customers are happy, too. It’s a simple cycle perpetuated by good business practices. Additionally, companies that identify emerging opportunities and provide great empathy during times of change often navigate the change most successfully. So rather than shifting drastically between old and new methods, a business that will evaluate
the situation and review consumer behaviour will gain over others.

3. Capitalise on emerging and proven technologies: Soft copies of records and online documentation over physical files
Prior to Covid-19, companies were using a slew of incredible technologies to stay productive and connected. But the pandemic elevated these technologies and helped leaders understand their importance. Prior to the pandemic, the common office working trait of everyone meant the use of excessive paper and traditionally offices gave a feeling of drowning in paper! People at office love paper and hard copies from every work they do from chairing and attending meetings, to sharing and approving documents, filling forms and so on. In fact, now we use scanning and digital copies, yet paper is often used as the first resort rather than the last. Most of the old physical files which hold a lot of significance psychologically are not actually required regularly. In fact, many people never even opened a file even once during the pandemic and have learned to manage with digital data. The pandemic has helped us to fast-forward ten years into digital adoption in our businesses! Our familiarity with digital files vis a vis physical files has increased significantly.

As the pandemic is coming under control and we move through re-opening, businesses have choices about how to proceed. But how people lived and worked during the crisis will continue to have an influence on how we live and work in the years to come. There is a new, positive mentality emerging that it’s okay to use cutting-edge technology to serve customers better and create a happier, decentralised workforce. Adapting to this new way of thinking will allow you to stay ahead of the pack, but remember that every company is different and there’s no one-size-fits-all solution to anything. To create post-pandemic plans that truly lead you to success, evaluate your own situation and goals. The digital office is here to stay and offers incredible power in all kinds of industries, but how you shape it is entirely up to you.

It is time for us to start moving towards digital adoption of the working system instead of simply accepting what is the traditional system of working with paper. Though we have to agree that nothing will replace physical files and there is always going to be the risk of hacking, system crashing, non-availability of electricity or internet, but… The physical files may be used as a backup but gradually our dependency on them is reducing, so why not start transforming our old physical records into digital ones?

This move may not look that significant today but imagine the music record companies which have moved all their songs into a USB drive or uploaded them on Youtube when it was available. Keeping apace with technology is the only way to survive else we all know what happened to the likes of Kodak, Nokia, etc., all of which had a monopoly. (Kodak was sold for one dollar!)

CONCLUSION
Many things have changed over the last one and a half years, but overall we may not really feel how fast they have been changing around us and even in business on a daily basis. However, there are a lot of things which are improving for the better and as a business if we don’t adopt, we will be at a loss against other businesses who will implement automation and other technology-based features and the one that does not change will feel as if it is working with pen and paper during the time of Excel Calculation.

With this article, we wrap up the ‘Digital Workplace’ series. You can read our last three articles printed in the BCAJ as below:
(1) Digital Workplace – A Stitch In Time Saves Nine (August, 2021);
(2) Digital Workplace – When All Roads Lead To Rome (September, 2021);
(3) Digital Workplace – Finding The Right Balance (October, 2021)

STRATEGY: THE HEART OF BUSINESS – PART I

Every business, every entity designs and pursues a strategy or multiple strategies to deliver its purpose. Crafting and, more importantly, successfully executing strategies is at the heart of running and growing great businesses. Strategy is the path to winning. In this two-part series, I will share some key approaches and methods which helped me over the years in accomplishing this critical aspect of a CEO’s role and mission, i.e., delivering sustainable long-term value for all stakeholders.

The broad elements of establishing a successful enterprise are depicted below (Figure 1):

At the core is setting the Vision and Strategy. The delivery mechanism is enabled through a robust process framework. This will need to encompass many critical dimensions such as being customer-driven, innovation-led, focusing on environment, health and safety, as well as upholding sustainability. A customer-focused entity strives to understand and meet the current and future needs. While delighting customers is the goal, the business should also endeavour not to dissatisfy patrons. Innovation can come through new technologies on products or in processes or people-oriented or even in the business model. The organisation will need to embed a culture of continuously improving all its activities challenging the status quo relentlessly. Sustainability and EHS should feature at the centre of all its actions. Above all, these are made possible by the people and hence talent management is important.

Each of these is an important subject in its own right. In this article I will explore some key elements pertaining to the two critical components of strategy, (i) Strategy Planning, and (ii) Strategy Deployment, and share some points on the planning dimension.

Any enterprise is guided by its Vision, Mission and Values (VMV). The first crucial framework which needs to be in place is this VMV which the enterprise stands for and lives by. VMV is articulated and communicated extensively so that not only are the employees clear about the direction of the organisation, but all the external stakeholders also know the fundamental purpose of the enterprise that they are engaging with.

Setting the VMV:
The Vision and Mission convey the raison d’être or the purpose of the enterprise. The Values are the fundamental tenets around which the enterprise conducts its affairs and are expected to be upheld at all times. While evaluating core partnerships or even acquisitions, VMV, therefore, is often the first parameter to be assessed in terms of compatibility between the conducting units. In Figure 2, a method of creating the VMV is depicted in a self-explanatory manner:

Some of the advantages that I have experienced in adopting this process are as follows:

(1)    Seeking inputs from all stakeholders gives different perspectives about their views of the business as well as expectations from the enterprise. Not only does this give a 360-degree view but also helps in eliminating blind spots which can be there in an internal exercise;

(2)    Doing a brainstorming session with the senior leadership team as well as middle management is a valuable exercise. In such intense sessions, often there is introspection of the opportunities and competencies of the enterprise which gives leads on the direction to take. Seeking external expert assistance to hold such sessions is fruitful to make the discussions even more extensive;

(3)    Sharing the initial output across the units in a capsulated form can engage the team from across the enterprise. Inputs received can be evaluated at the centre and necessary modifications can be made enhancing the quality of the output. This also has immense value in making the VMV a co-created exercise;

(4)    Finally, once the VMV is approved by the Board, a detailed communication programme is essential. Every word in the VMV is explained and the whole thrust of the organisation is shared and clarified to every team member.

The VMV once set may not change frequently, but it is not cast in stone. Such a comprehensive exercise is undertaken periodically, say once in three or four years, to incorporate the dynamic nature of business.

Strategy Planning Process:
Flowing from the VMV will be the next critical task of setting the Strategic Goal or Target, and crafting the Strategy. The strategy planning process (SPP) can be with both short and long-term perspectives. In the short term this is also aligned to the year’s business and operating plan or budget. The elements in building the SPP are diagrammatically represented in Figure 3 (right).

A word on each of the key steps:
a)    The approach is to blend both the outside-in and the inside-out outlooks of the business. So inputs are sought from the various stakeholders on the different aspects of the business as well as their needs and expectations of performance;

b) Environment scanning using PESTLE dimensions of political, economic, social, technological, legal and environmental outlooks is performed to judge the context for the strategy;

c) Coupled with this is the internal assessment of SWOT in terms of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats. The enterprise also judges its core competencies so as to play from a position of power;

d) Put together, the above leads to a definition of the opportunity and throws up both strategic challenges and strategic advantages as well. A good way is to encapsulate the strategic target in terms of a quantified crisp goal or an inspiring statement. This helps immensely in communicating the strategic objective to the team and for a common engagement to go for an aligned purpose. For example, the call for a ‘5 trillion economy by 25’, ‘India Shining’, etc.

e) At this juncture, it is also important to specify the customer segments or markets which are targeted. The analysis of SWOT, core competencies and competitive positions will also lead to what would be the offering or the customer value proposition which brings about a differentiation in the marketplace. This is at the crux of strategy planning – the decision of what we want to be and equally what we do not want to be. Strategy is all about making a choice;

f) Thereafter strategic initiatives are thought out clubbing two of these elements. For example, SO – how do we leverage our strengths to tap into the opportunities, etc. (vide Figure 4; next page);

g) From these lists the next step would be to prioritise the ones to be taken up in terms of time dimensions and ease of execution;

h) These can be woven into the four perspectives to form a balanced scorecard;

i) A Strategy Map1 can be prepared which encapsulates the entire strategy flow across the perspectives and highlights the strategic actions as well;

j) This will lead to individual projects both at the company level as also at individual or functional levels2.

Creating the connect:
For any strategy or plan to succeed, the most critical element is to get across the connect with people. It is important that every team member not only knows his or her work plan but also is clear on how this connects with the larger goal of the function / department as well as that of the enterprise. This is fundamental to get a high engagement of each employee who will approach work with great interest as the significance of the tasks becomes clear.

A great way to bring in a structured connect is by using the Strategy Deployment Matrix (SDM). A pictorial representation of SDM is given in Figure 5 (at right). The SDM provides a link between the enterprise priorities and the individual department’s goals or actions. Furthermore,it brings together the department goals with thedifferent projects planned to deliver those goals. Alongside, the projects are connected with the team members who are part of the different projects. This also facilitates the time planning for each team member who is associated with the projects. With these, the SDM provides a fine alignment of the individual’s tasks / time with the projects designed to deliver departmental goals which itself is aligned to the enterprise priorities. So the SDM in a single matrix provides a clear picture of how all of it is well aligned to move in an integrated, coordinated manner.

Strategy, the dominant success factor:
A strategic approach is essential for a structured delivery of growth in business. It is important that the strategy flows from the larger aspirations of the enterprise and is also carved out in time dimensions of short and long term. While a strategy construct emanates from having a normal view of things, the environment now is volatile and ever changing. A number of disruptors, too, can emerge in a short span of time3. It is therefore necessary that strategies are also prepared to meet different contexts. A scenario planning exercise with appropriate strategies is also necessary.

The strategic plan is created to seize opportunities and its execution is important as well. This equation is pictorially represented in Figure 6.

Finally, a good Strategy is the heart of running and changing a winning business.


References

  1. Strategy Maps: Robert S. Kaplan and David P. Norton
  2. Excel in what you do: Pg. 20,BCAJ, August, 2020
  3. Governance & Internal Controls: The Touchstone of Sustainable Business – Part II: Disruptions Pg. 13,BCAJ, June, 2020

PODCASTING – THE NOVEL MODE OF STORYTELLING FOR YOUR PROFESSIONAL BRAND

When it comes to knowledge-sharing by professionals, we have three options at present:

1)    Written form: Books, articles, etc.,
2)    Video form: YouTube channels, preparing videos that give information, and
3)    Audio form: Podcasting, pre-recorded messages.

While the first two forms are quite common, Audio Form Podcasting has been gaining in popularity of late. Writing articles is not easy but the more difficult part in today’s time is to find people who read! Videos have an edge over the written form but the creation of videos can be quite expensive and time-consuming. Further, in videos the focus has to be on the appearance of the person, lights, backgrounds, animation and so on. This is the reason why the third alternative, Podcasting, is gaining ground in knowledge-sharing. With ‘Smart Speakers’ like Alexa, Google Home, Apple Homepod, etc., finding their way into our day-to-day lives, Podcasts are gaining acceptance in the same way that FM radio did in the 2000s.

A human voice speaks louder and adds much more meaning through tone and inflection than the printed form. The journey from radio to Podcasts has marked a full circle. The radio was superseded by television, television by cable, cable by internet videos and, with technological advancement, internet videos are now at par with Podcasts. Podcasting, thus, represents a new platform for story-telling.

According to survey reports by Stitcher, an average Podcast listener stays connected for 22 minutes daily. This is one reason why including Podcasting in your digital branding strategy will prove to be beneficial. Podcasts give you an opportunity to build a deep, personalised and rich relationship with your target audience. With smart speakers, the music apps supporting and aiding Podcasts, people prefer to listen to Podcasts quite frequently while doing other work instead of holding a phone in their hands or sitting in front of their screens to watch a video – or holding a book and reading it. Of course, videos and books have their own advantages, but Podcasting is creating and filling a niche.

UNDERSTANDING WHAT IS PODCASTING

When you search for it on Wikipedia, this is what it says, ‘A Podcast is an episodic series of spoken word digital audio files that a user can download to a personal device for easy listening’. Streaming applications and Podcasting services provide a convenient and integrated way to manage a personal consumption queue across many Podcast sources and playback devices.

When we talk about our profession, the most commonly accepted meaning of Podcast is a collection of audio calls or audio messages. It’s as simple as it sounds. A consultant / professional generally answers clients’ calls every now and then, explaining various concepts without clients’ queries and interruptions. To make life easier and to save on time and energy, the recorded version of such explanations / advisories can be converted to Podcasts and uploaded.

Now imagine someone calls you and asks, what is ‘Seamless ITC’ under GST? All you need to do is share the link to the Podcast uploaded by you and ask them to clarify their doubts. This also does some branding for you because the person may share it with others who may have the same query. Podcasts have an edge over videos and books because these can be heard while travelling by train or driving a car. One may not have to take out special time for the same.

HOW TO START A PODCAST

Podcasting in general terms is simple – recording an audio and uploading it on some platform which can be accessed by a subscriber of that particular service. For example, JioSaavn Music, Gaana and other music apps have started their Podcast services, too. The most commonly used hosts these days are Spotify and Anchor FM.

The following quick steps may help you to plan your Podcast:
* Come up with a concept (a topic, name, format and target length for each episode; for example, you can start with a series of topics on GST);
* Design an artwork and write a description to ‘brand’ your Podcast;
* Record and edit your audio files (such as MP3s). A microphone is recommended;
* Find a place to host them (as mentioned above, you may begin with Spotify); and
* Upload your Podcast on these platforms and the rest will be taken care of.

Now that we know what is Podcasting, let us deep-dive into some FAQs:

(1) What are the equipments / software required for a podcast?

As a beginner, you can start even with the mobile phone record option. Find a place where there is no external noise and disturbance and keep your mobile on ‘Airplane Mode’ so that your recording is not disturbed by calls / notifications.

Nevertheless, this may not suffice if you want to start recording at a professional level. For that we recommend that you use the following tools to the extent possible:

Microphone

The foremost piece of equipment you’ll require is a microphone. You may opt for a set that includes the microphone, a durable steel housing and a broadcast arm that keeps the mic off the table, etc. The good news is that apart from the normal recorder, Playstore, IOS stores and web browsers also have special recording applications / websites (Spreaker Studio, Anchor, Podbean, SoundCloud) which may assist you in having a really good Podcast recorded using a very basic mic (maybe the mic of your headphone). You may choose either of these at the beginner level. Having tried both, we can vouch that both work well provided you pick a quiet place for recording.

Headphones

A set of noise-cancelling headphones is advisable instead of normal headphones once you start recording regularly. A successful Podcast is less about pricey equipment and more about the experience you provide to your listeners. So we do not recommend higher spending on these equipments to start with, but once you are a regular, noise-cancelling headphones will help in better hearing and can help you provide better sound quality for upload.

Recording and editing software

Most of the Podcast creators use Garageband (for Mac Users) or Audacity (for Windows), which turn your laptop or tablet into a full-fledged recording studio. Both these companies offer free versions of their software which lets you record live audio, edit files, change the speed / pitch of your recordings, cut and splice, and output your Podcast to a digital sound file. You need good software as Podcasts cannot be like a normal phone call where you just start speaking on content and end after 30 to 60 minutes. When you start recording, you will realise that there will be a need for Intro Music, Background noise editing, lots of cuts and retakes. Good software ensures that all these things are mixed in a way that a Podcast sounds like an uninterrupted recording.

(2) How long should your Podcast be?

This question may arise to everyone planning to begin Podcasting. To answer this, we did reach out to people and also had surveys; and what we concluded was: Podcasts should be as long as they need to be! But since this doesn’t answer the basic FAQ, here are a few tips that you may keep in mind while considering the length of your Podcast. The length should ideally depend on the frequency of uploading. So here is a tip that we wish to share:
(i) If you plan to Podcast once or twice a week or month, the length can be 60 minutes or more; and
(ii) If you plan to Podcast daily, the length should be between five and 15 minutes.

However, the ideal length that a normal user may want to listen to a Podcast will be 20 to 25 minutes. Remember the 30-minute daily soap operas on TV? They used to run on the same psychology and that’s why there used to be a lot of series that used to run for half an hour daily.

(3) What should be the structure of the Podcast?

All Podcasts no matter what they are about, who makes them, how they are made or their length, follow three structures:

(a) Interview or Q&A structure:

This is by far the most popular structure of Podcasts. This is as simple as it sounds and requires less time for preparation. All you need to do is start interviews on specific topics or have a candid chat with industry leaders in a Q&A format. We have seen people calling leaders on Podcasts while they ask them candid questions like – what made you think you wish to practice GST, what advice would you like to give our fellow professionals, etc. A tip to share here – you may also consider having an interview with someone who can guide fellow professionals on the importance of mental and physical health.

This structure works as a branding for both the interviewer and the interviewee.

(b) Educational structure:

This is a series of Podcasts where you cover a topic which educates the listeners. The topic could be technical or non-technical. To begin with, you may consider having a series of educational Podcasts on Ind AS covering all the Ind AS’s in different segments. For this structure, some time and efforts have to be put in for preparing the content.

(c) Entertaining structure:
Again, this is a kind of series which is slowly gaining ground. In such a series, you may just call people from the same profession and talk about something which may entertain the listeners. You may have a series where you cover ‘Financial Lessons to be learnt from Bollywood Movies!’ or something like ‘Management Lessons to be learnt from Mahabharat!’ You may also just want to call people and explore their hidden talent and reveal to the listeners how fellow professionals could also be singers or comedians.

Irrespective of the structure that you choose, there are still some basics that you should cover in every Podcast: An intro, one key takeaway from the Podcast, a call to action, a thank you or a shout-out and closing remarks.

(4) What are the basic steps in publishing a Podcast?

Have a Podcast cover art design
While this may sound bizarre, a cover art will make a difference to listeners. We have often read and been taught ‘Don’t Judge A Book By Its Cover’. But it’s crazy how we always judge a book by its cover! So think about it – there are a series of Podcasts shown when someone searches, say, Podcasts by CAs; but one factor because of which a listener may choose your Podcast is your cover art. Here are some quick tips to consider while designing the cover art for your Podcast – 1/4th text, originality, lovely colour schemes and images that speak about the topic.

How to publish your podcast on Apple, Spotify, Google, etc.
This is the most interesting part about Podcasting. Unlike YouTube or Instagram, where you can directly upload a video or go live and have your content on its channel, Podcasting works differently. Currently, Google, Apple Podcasts or even Apps like JioSaavn, etc., do have a space for Podcasts but they do not allow users to upload content directly. You need a Host for your Podcast, for example, Anchor.fm, when you upload your Podcast the same will be published on the platform and from the Host it will be distributed to all the Podcast providers and based on its AI and other aspects, they will show it on their platforms.

(5) What after the Podcast is published?

Once the Podcast is published, you may consider sending a link of the same to your newsletters list, update it on your social media accounts like Twitter / LinkedIn, send a broadcast on WhatsApp, attach the link in your email signature and, lastly, ask your colleagues to share it. You can also get regular subscribers to your post on Podcasting and you can interact with them.

So far we have seen how and why Podcasting is needed to expand your professional brand, but if you are still not convinced, the following benefits may convince you to start your series:

The benefits of Podcasting


There are a variety of reasons for firms to Podcast regularly these days. The most common motivation is generating awareness about the firm, engagement and thought leadership. There are more altruistic reasons as well, which may include sharing information / insights or creating an online community. Regardless of your motivation or objective, Podcasting can provide reliable results to expand a brand for your firm. An important point to note here is that there is no violation of the Code of Ethics since we are not in any way targeting to solicit clients. Our aim in Podcasting our series should be knowledge-sharing and expanding the brand value for the firm.

If you’re still unsure whether Podcasting is right for your firm, answer the following questions:
* Are you looking to build a relationship between your firm and your audience?
* Do you have valuable information to share?
* Are you able and willing to talk about your expertise on a regular basis?
* Do you want your firm to have recognition worldwide?

If you answered yes to one or more of the above questions, then Podcasting is something that you may just want to begin.

DIGITAL WORKPLACE – A STITCH IN TIME SAVES NINE

Till the beginning of the year 2020, working from home instead of travelling a couple of hours daily to office was looked upon as just an excuse by employers. The major change in work style that we saw in 2020 was a paradigm shift from the physical workplace to the digital workplace. The pandemic and lockdowns all over the world forced people to work from home, or stay without working. While initially it seemed almost impossible for firms to survive in a digital environment, all of us have coped quite well.

Clearly, the pandemic is proving to be a blessing in disguise for firms at all levels. Those in the service industry realised that a Zoom call could replace travelling, they were not required to travel to the office daily and, most importantly, it has resulted in huge cost savings on real estate. Of course, physical meetings and the ‘office culture’ won’t be replaced by the complete digital workspace and irrespective of what we call the ‘new normal’, it is believed that once restrictions are over, people will get back to the normal office and physical workplace. But life and office culture will never be the same again. Even if the digital office will not replace the physical office, there is no denying that it will change the way we look at our office and no one can afford to ignore it. To understand this even better, let us first understand the concept of the Digital Workplace.

WHAT IS A DIGITAL WORKPLACE?

Initially, the Digital Workplace was meant to complement the physical office. The idea was to facilitate easy working for employees who may have difficulties in travelling or are working from different locations. However, most people used to travel for even the slightest work, or for meetings, and the ‘9 to 5’ culture was at its prime with employees expected to reach the office physically to be counted as working on a particular day. Remember the struggle we put up with when it was raining just to reach office safe and dry, or come back walking (or rather, wading) during the deluge of 26th July, 2005 in Mumbai? For the last few years, companies have been spending money on technology and remote working but still always expected employees to travel to the office unless it was not possible. However, 2020, the pandemic year, has changed everything. With no scope to travel to the office, everyone was literally forced to adapt to remote working. The proof of the concept was put to use and now businesses have started operating at full capacity at the Digital Workplace.

A Digital Workplace is the basic set of digital tools that employees use to get work done. These include Instant Messaging apps to Meeting Tools and online storing of documents, and even automated workflows to manage the work. Essentially, ‘the Digital Workplace is the virtual, modern version of the traditional workplace where work can be done through devices, anytime, anywhere’.

However, let’s see what a Digital Workplace is not. It is much more than having apps as a part of office workflow. It is more than accessing office files from anywhere. But when the flow of work and monitoring of performance to get measurable results are seamlessly integrated, we can see the Digital Workplace emerge. It starts by understanding what it really is and how it can help your organisation deliver measurable business value.

Why shifting to a Digital Workplace will help an organisation and employees

  •  Talent attraction: A survey1 says that over 60% of employees would not mind being paid less if they get flexibility to work from anywhere. People have started realising the importance of staying at home and spending time with the family, getting those extra few minutes of sleep as they don’t need to rush to catch a train / bus to the office, and so on. Additionally, Work from Home (WFH) means employees can afford a bigger house at a better location rather than fitting in a smaller house to avoid travelling for work daily, or maybe even have a Staycation working with laptops while sipping ginger tea at Shimla!

 

  •  Improved inclusivity: The one good part of opting for a Digital Workplace is that we can have talent without geographical barriers. With a physical workplace, we were restricted to hiring talent within our cities. But now, someone with an office in Mumbai can hire talent from Delhi or Dubai. The physical location of the employee, except for the time zone, hardly matters.

 

  •  Economical: Having a Digital Workplace is economical not only for firms, but also for employees. While firms can save on real estate rents, electricity, stationery and support staff to facilitate working at the office, for employees the savings come as reduction in transportation costs, parking charges, travelling time, need for spending on professional wardrobes, lunch and dinner, the need to eat outside and so on.

 

  •  Less stress of commuting: One of the biggest worries for people living in big cities in India and all over the world is commuting. While many countries have the best of infrastructure, India is still developing the same and incidents like the 2017 stampede at Elphinstone Road railway station during rush hours may be terrifying, but these are a regular risk of travelling on local trains in metro cities. Besides, commuting in public transport exposes employees to the risk of losing their valuables, including office assets, due to theft or damage on account of extraordinary rush on a frequent basis.

 

1   Business Line

 

WHAT SHOULD YOUR DIGITAL WORKPLACE INCLUDE?

Technically and practically, a Digital Workplace should include all the technology tools that we need to operate in our profession. These tools should broadly take care of four categories of work: how your employees can communicate, how they can collaborate, how they can connect and how they can deliver the final services and evaluate the work done. Let us take a closer look at each of these:

1. Communications at a Digital Workplace:

We aren’t in a place now where we can meet at the cafe or share ideas at the water cooler in the office. Considering these restrictions, it becomes important that while we have a Digital Workplace we also give employees freedom to communicate which they would have otherwise done at the office. In fact, with a DigiWorkplace around, the communications aren’t restricted to a team or a location. Employees in Mumbai can also communicate with those in Delhi. The basic communication tools should include the following:

  •  Emails – Currently, Google Workspace is very widely used for emails. However, there are many other players like Outlook and the Indian Zoho. Each of these offers its unique advantage over the others. But Gmail, since it gives auto integration to other widely-used apps like Google Drive, Google Photos and Android Phones, has become more popular amongst users. Gmail also provides its search functionality to its email, which means that searching past emails with Gmail is always faster. Though all these companies do provide their free email accounts, it is always advisable to buy a company domain (@yourcompany.com or .in, etc.) instead of using standard emails like ‘@gmail.com’. These are paid services but the company domain always gives a better impression. Besides, all the companies provide additional services for paid versions vis-a-vis free versions.

 

  •  Instant messaging apps – A Digital Workplace will definitely need an instant messaging app wherein the employees can keep working while having chats on their queries going on. One of the most common messaging apps that comes in handy with Gmail is Google Hangouts. The whole purpose of such instant messaging apps is to facilitate official messages, calls and video calls so that our personal space on WhatsApp or any other personal app isn’t disturbed. Another app which has found its market in the corporate world for instant messaging is ‘Slack’ which comes with all features of instant messaging, calling and video calling. One good part about Slack is that it can be integrated with almost all the other apps and portals.

 

  •  Other basic communications – Other basic communication toolkits at any Digital Workplace would include customised portals or intranet which may have options to publish news, have blogs or articles, introduce new employees, celebrate birthdays, etc., such as ProofHub, a project-planning software with tools like discussions, notes, Gantt charts, to-do lists, calendaring, milestones, timesheets, etc. Such intranet communication software if implemented well, can solve a lot of communication shortcomings of the Digital Workplace.


2. Collaborations at the Digital Workplace:

To solve business problems and operate productively, organisations must have the ability to leverage knowledge across the enterprise with online, seamless, integrated and intuitive collaboration tools that enhance the employees’ ability to work together. A collaboration toolkit at the workplace should include:

  •  Productivity is a collaborative tool that can’t be ignored. Having tools which can enhance productivity of employees can help them to enable knowledge and perform their work more efficiently. A Digital Workplace should have tools which can help all employees to collaborate on projects / files together. These can include a common drive, word processors, live spreadsheets, presentations, CRMs. Google WorkSpace does give an option for all of these in one place.

 

  •  Business Applications – To make it easier to collaborate, a Digital Workplace should have basic business applications where employees can work simultaneously. An HR system like FreshTeams which is accessible both on portals and on mobiles indeed suffices as an end-to-end HR function. From on-boarding to maintaining documents and to managing approvals, FreshTeams has us covered for everything. Managing employees’ expenses is another worry that we may face while having a Digital Workplace. However, Expensify is one software that can indeed be very useful. Other business applications that are a must-have for a Digital Workplace include ERPs and CRMs like Tally, SAP, QuickBooks and the recent favourite Zoho.

3. Connect:

Self-sufficiency no longer guarantees effectiveness. Employees need tools that allow them to connect across the organisation, leverage intellectual property and gain insight from one another. The Digital Workplace delivers on these goals by fostering a stronger sense of culture and community within the workplace.

Connectivity apps or data in general help employees to know each other’s profiles, their locations, expertise, etc., to reach out easily. A basic data should include employee directory, organisation chart and rich profile.

4. Deliver the result:

The phrase ‘meet your customer where your customer is’ can take a whole new meaning with a Digital Workplace. While face-to-face interactions delivering reports or presentations have gone for a toss, there are still ways to provide your clients with the same sentiments. Professionals may shift to virtual communication networks like Google Meet, Webex, Zoom, Zoho Meetings, etc. As we deliver results in virtual form, we share some tips to have the same level of interaction as in the physical form:

  •  Hold all the meetings, whether internal or external, on video. You need not keep your video off. Having videos turned on during meetings gives a personal touch;

  •  Send emails or catch up casually with inactive clients to let them know you are still thinking about them and their business;
  •  Try and accommodate to the apps that your clients use so that they do not have to struggle in meetings;
  •  Practise – This is one quality that should always remain, irrespective of whether the presentations are online or offline. Practise screen-sharing, slide moves and presentation flow on how it may look on the communication networks while delivering the same to the client.

LIMITATIONS OF DIGITAL WORKPLACE:

While we see giant leaps in the Digital Workplace, it has its own drawbacks. There are platforms that specialise in making collaboration easier and more effective, but the most important component which is missing in the Digital Workplace is ‘social interaction’. It is not merely limited to non-verbal communication where there are no feelings while reading chats / emails, but a Digital Workplace literally means that staff does not spend quality time together like being in office, so the chances of having team bonding are less. This, too, can lead to communication difficulties since misunderstandings are more likely.

Another sad part is the fact that we are used to seeing employees and colleagues face-to-face, or in real face-time. As far as possible, employees should also meet in person from time to time and use the video call function for important meetings. When an actual meeting is not possible, it is advisable to arrange a video call at least once a month without an official agenda to have team bonding.

CONCLUSION


The way the Digital Workplace is evolving, it may not replace the existing physical office or completely do away with it. We are seeing that companies have already started calling their employees back to offices and soon ‘Work From Home’ may not be available to all. But what this pandemic has shown us is that it is possible to work from home and that there are both advantages and limitations of working from home, but with technology evolving, things are getting better and better. We believe that even if we may not move to a compulsory ‘Work From Home’ culture anytime soon, travelling will become optional and companies will give optional WFH to their employees for a few days in a month. Above all, from the firm’s point of view, the Digital Workplace will become more important as it will be able to cater to the workforce from all over the world without having to spend additional sums on their relocation, etc. Besides, a foolproof Digital Workplace system means the firm can outsource routine and monotonous work to people at remote locations at much cheaper rates and it may work like the Knowledge Process Outsourcing (KPO) model.

In our articles over the next few months, we will also be discussing other considerations for having a Digital Workplace that shall include:

  •  Comparisons between a Physical WorkPlace vs. a Digital Workplace vs. a Virtual Workplace vs. Co-Working Spaces;
  •  How we can manage various functions of our firm – HR, Finance, Marketing, etc., using our Digital Workplaces;
  •  Interviews with industry leaders and practical examples of Digital Workplaces.

(The authors of this article are in no way connected with or influenced by any of the apps or portals mentioned herein, except that they are users. The apps and portals mentioned are recommendatory as they have been useful to us)

DIGITAL WORKPLACE: FINDING THE RIGHT BALANCE

INTRODUCTION
In our previous article we discussed the Digital Workplace, its advantages and how the world is moving towards the ‘New Normal’. In India, we usually adjust to adversities very well and when the situation demanded, we quickly moved to the Work From Home (WFH) / Remote Working scenario. Now, as the restrictions on travel are being lifted, we will be back to working from the office. Many seniors with whom we have interacted told us that the remote working model was a temporary solution when there were restrictions, but it won’t work out in future. These statements have been further affirmed by The Future of Work Study 2021, released by LinkedIn. It said that one in three Indian professionals has burnt out, stressed due to remote working.

Remote working started with a bang and saw people preparing Dalgona coffee and playing various online games! But once travel curbs started to get relaxed, everyone started going back to office and people started explaining the benefits of working from the office! However, reality has started hitting us again. Those who are travelling daily are missing the WFH scenario, because it was not the WFH that was bad but it was the lack of a system to manage WFH that was telling. That was obviously because WFH started unexpectedly and everyone had to quickly adjust to so many things – statutory as well as internal processes.

When offices resumed, all the backlog started piling up. For example, audit documentation has become a bit more difficult considering that some data is available in physical mode and some in soft copies; employees have started realising the importance of WFH with the extra time they have to spend travelling daily to work; the additional expense they have to incur daily to reach office; having to eat lunch from a box and so on. Employers have also realised that giving people the WFH option saves a lot of infrastructure cost and the overheads have reduced significantly.

IMPORTANCE OF HAVING AN OFFICE

Despite all the benefits of remote working, the companies and firms prefer working from office because it used to be a set process before the pandemic, and that’s the only way all of us have worked since we started working. People are explaining the benefits of having an office at length and they are correct in many ways. Having an office in itself is a luxury. Many of us have spent years before getting into our dream office and many are still burning the midnight oil to ensure that they have an office which ensures smooth functioning of work as well as other features. However, as we are aware, physical offices also have their own limitations and with the growth of technology it will be foolish to ignore all the added advantages available at our disposal to make the Traditional Office more effective.

Through this article, we are trying to emphasise how having a Digital Workplace ready simultaneously (though we continue with physical offices) will help not only the employers, but also the employees, and what a Digital Workplace can offer with the help of technology. Let us look at some practical scenarios:

Scenario 1: Flexibility corresponding to savings in time, effort and money


Your office is located in the southern part of a metro city. Your employee has his residence in the north and visits the office in the morning; he has an important client meeting in the afternoon in the north. He travels to the client’s office for the meeting and gets done by early evening. In such a case, if you are not prepared with a Digital Workplace option for him, he will have to again travel back to the office in the south. This will impact him in multiple ways: stress of commuting back and then going back home in the evening, the time and effort wasted due to such travelling. Correspondingly, the overheads spent on such to and fro travel and the per hour cost that you will have to bear considering that the employee will lose two hours travelling during office hours – perhaps this may pinch you to give it (the DW) a serious thought.

If we prepare ourselves by having a Digital Workplace, the employees can lead a stress-free life and also save on time, effort and money.

Scenario 2: Telephone and zoom meetings correspond to savings in time and money
Your client has requested you to arrange a meeting to discuss some plan. The client’s office is in some other part of the city. To kick-start it, you have an initial face-to-face meeting with the client. However, as we know, this generally doesn’t stop at one meeting. You may have to catch up quite a number of times to ensure a smooth assignment. The client is prepared for some Zoom or virtual meetings, considering that you will be charging the reimbursements to the client.

Imagine a situation where you have not kept yourself ready with virtual meetings in terms of having some virtual presentation tools (like Prezi) or a dashboard which manages each stage of the assignment and discussion (like Trello). The meeting may not be as impactful as it would have been in physical mode. At this juncture, you are also in a state where you cannot refuse a client a Virtual Meeting. Also, a Virtual Meeting means you can attend more than one meeting in a limited time as the time saved from travelling can accommodate more such meetings.

The scenario emphasises how we cannot ignore a face-to-face meeting when it is absolutely required, but we also need to have a Digital Workplace ready to handle such situations. Needless to say, this will also help save a lot on time and money that you would have otherwise spent on every physical meeting.

Scenario 3: Work from office contaminating situations when employees need social breaks
We live in a very social country. Often, we have social functions to attend or have guests visiting our homes and whom we have to attend to. Let’s say your employee has a social function to attend at 4 pm for an hour. In case you have made physical presence at the office mandatory, the employee will have to request you for leave or a half day off (merely for an hour’s function). This will not only impact your work plan for the day but will also affect the employee’s leave balance and salary.

Alternatively, if you are ready with a Digital Workplace for such a specific situation, you can have your employee work from home till 4 pm, attend the one-hour function and then return back to work. This will not only make the employee stress-free from commuting, but also save his half-day leave. On the other hand, you would not have to compromise for the day or half day’s work.

Scenario 4: ‘Workation’ corresponding to employee welfare
This may not please everyone. But remember, ‘All work and no play, makes Jack a dull boy’. We have a scenario where your employees have been planning a vacation for a very long time. But the stress of being present physically in office is not letting them do so. This is impacting their mental health and productivity, as a break is a start to a more efficient environment.

If you have a Digital Workplace ready, you can, in certain situations, allow your employees to go on a ‘workation’. Though they might have to keep working on the vacation, but at least the change in location and atmosphere would give them space to breathe. This will not only contribute to better efficiency but also contribute to employee’s welfare and mental health management.

Scenario 5: Documents storage and security corresponding to threat of data loss
Having files and documents was a mandate earlier. However, with the Information Technology Act coming into force, we have seen a major shift in digital modes of data and document storage. We still see people comfortable with physical files, invoices and other documents, but imagine a situation where some natural disasters occur (we have often seen files getting damaged in floods, fires, etc.). If not damage, there is also a fear of unauthorised access to files in office lockers / cupboards. There are chances of data getting lost or compromised.

A Digital Workplace has the capability to store our data on cloud and also restrict the access. You can forget your fear of losing data or compromising it. Even if you prefer to have physical files, there is absolutely no harm in storing the data on the cloud. Even if a fire breaks out or there are floods and your files are damaged, you will still be able to have access to your files on the cloud. Additionally, with the data restriction option, you may ignore your fear of data getting leaked due to unauthorised access.

Scenario 6: Hiring / retaining best talent
How many times have we seen the woman who is taking care of an entire office and working diligently, having to leave not for professional but for personal reasons such as getting married to someone who is staying in another city, or whose family has moved to another city? In these cases, we are left with no choice but to bid adieu to the hardworking talent. Now, imagine having an active Digital Workplace system where you can accommodate the work of a dedicated employee on a remote basis and she can continue working on existing clients without having to actually leave the office. Since she has already been part of the system, adjusting to a remote system may not be that challenging, and you can retain the right talent instead of finding another one and teach / train her from scratch. A similar scenario is possible even when you have to hire an employee from a different State or location. In fact, the Digital Workplace enables your company to open multiple offices without actually having a physical presence at all these locations.

Hence, it is important to find the right balance
Physical offices are much like face-to-face (F2F) conversations. They can never be replaced with technology because no technology can replace the comfort of F2F conversations. However, technology has changed the way we communicate and the entire communication system has evolved. While F2F communication is still the key, gradually phone calls and now even messages and WhatsApp are added to the communication skills. We cannot imagine a person with good communication skills not being able to communicate via these new systems. So much so, that now WhatsApp groups are becoming an official communication channel and most of the decisions of firms, corporates, etc., are taken on WhatsApp and people meet very rarely except when issues are complex in nature, or it is a periodic meeting.

On the same lines, we do not believe that having an actual physical office where employees can work will be replaced anytime soon with a complete remote office. But looking at the way technology has changed everything, having a Digital Workplace today is as important as having a website used to be at the start of this century. As per The Future of Work Study 2021 released by LinkedIn, as many as 86% of respondents think that hybrid work will have a positive impact on their work-life balance. It will help them spend equal time on their personal and professional goals / lives.

To conclude, we feel that the choice is ours: either resist the change until it becomes mandatory and then accept it; in doing so, we could lag behind the world. Or simply embrace the change and start looking at the endless possibilities that technology can offer to maximise the advantage we have at our disposal and get the first mover’s advantage. While a physical workplace can help you stay, a Digital Workplace will help you grow.

 

DIGITAL WORKPLACE – WHEN ALL ROADS LEAD TO ROME…

In the previous article we spoke briefly about the ‘Digital Workplace’, its advantages, limitations and so on. ‘Digital Workplaces’ are evolving very quickly; while there are many who feel that these will replace existing physical offices completely, others believe that these will go out of fashion as soon as ‘normalcy’ returns. However, we believe that just like every other technological change, starting from computers to mobile phones, the ‘Digital Workplace’ will not replace the existing way of working but it will co-exist with the existing office environment; however, we will see a digital transformation in the way we work.

Digital transformation is a journey that every firm will have to undertake in its own way with multiple connected intermediary goals, striving, in the end, towards ubiquitous optimisation across processes… and the business ecosystem of a hyper-connected age between people, teams, technologies, various players in ecosystems, etc., is the key to success.

Before talking about the alternatives, we are sure everyone reading this article is aware that a Traditional Office was the basic or primary way that an office existed. A professional wanting to start a business or practice would first look for an ‘Office Place’.

The ‘Office’ had its own advantages and limitations but it was the only way we used to work. Many employees complained about having to get to the office daily, or getting half a day’s wages cut for punching in five minutes late and spending so much critical time travelling to the office. A study by MoveInSync1 found that Indians spend 7% of their day getting to their offices. However, with the outbreak of the pandemic, everything has changed, starting from the perception of individuals to realistic circumstances. Since travelling has not been permitted for the major portions of the years 2020 and 2021, businesses have been left with no option but to switch to digitalisation and to a digital office. In India we call this ‘jugaad’. But the ‘jugaad’ worked! Almost everyone adjusted to the new normal and somehow survived the toughest of times. After the two ‘waves’ that have come and gone and the threat of a third wave looming large, some of the businesses have already restarted and switched back to the traditional office concept. People are taking precautions to the extent possible and are resigned to their fate, but feeling that they do not have any other option, offices are resuming normal work.

_____________________________________
1 https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/jobs/indians-spend-7-of-their-day-getting-totheir- office/articleshow/70954228.cms
But is it true that we do not have any option other than to just move back to our physical offices despite all the inherent dangers? Or can we have better alternatives and take maximum benefit of the learnings from the past and, with the help of technology, find a perfect mixture of physical and digital workplaces to ensure that we do not lose the advantages of a physical office and maximise the available technologies at our disposal?

There are three big limitations of physical or traditional offices:

1. Cost of real estate – Rent, lease, etc.: With the constant rise in the price of real estate and limited supply, the rent in the P&L account is always a significant amount for Indian companies. And some of the well-established businesses which have saved on rent by purchasing office space are now realising that their significant capital is stuck in real estate which is not growing at the same rate as their business. So it is not always wise to invest limited capital in real estate and block it for a long time when as a businessman you can put it to work harder. We have spoken to various professionals from India and received information that the total cost of real estate investment / rent could be between 20 and 40% of the total revenue a firm can generate.

2. Commuting for employees: As stated earlier, in India people spend nearly two hours to reach the office and if that is not already bad, the situation of overcrowded public transport, bad infrastructure and roads, and unrealistic traffic wastes a lot of valuable time of employees in travelling. More often than not, employees going out for a crucial meeting will prefer to leave an hour early instead of risking getting late. However, this leaving early may be good for creating an impression, but the time that it costs can be huge for the overall business. On an average an Indian spent as much as 9% of his time in commuting2 in the pre-lockdown era. Now, due to the lockdown, this cost is only going to be higher.

3. Limitation in hiring: The traditional office works within the four walls of the premise, so many times a company from Chennai or Delhi cannot hire talent from Mumbai or Bangalore unless the employee is willing to relocate; in many cases, companies have to spend extra on relocation expenses, etc.

There are arguments that the above limitations have always existed and these, coupled with other limitations, were always part of the game; companies had come to accept the limitations and functioned without much ado.

So what has changed now? It’s the pandemic which is working either like a blessing in disguise or a ‘rude awakening’ for businesses. Traditional offices may not suddenly go out of fashion, but a shift towards digitalisation which started gradually has taken a huge leap of faith and the pandemic has allowed everyone to adopt the trial and error method as they were assessing the limitations that their businesses were facing due to the ‘Work From Home’ culture. However, while many were struggling during this period, some started thriving and excelled in this new culture. The businesses that understood how technology worked and the best way to utilise the alternatives are now setting the standards for others to follow.

___________________________________________________________
2 https://www.dnaindia.com/mumbai/report-mmrda-you-spend-84-of-your-income-oncommute- 2715777
What are the alternatives to traditional offices?

While the traditional offices may not go out of fashion completely, businesses are finding different ways to mix and match them with the new alternatives available to maximise the work culture vis a vis the cost. There are many different types of offices that are being set up currently. Let us look at some examples:

1. Shared Offices
2. Work From Home
3. Flexi Offices
4. Co-working Spaces
5. Virtual Office (only for registration)

Shared Offices:
XYZ Associates, a CA firm, has 50 employees. Most of them are on audit and mostly never visit the office. XYZ Ltd. had purchased a large office space earlier. Now, realising that it does not need such a big sitting capacity and that it has already spent so much on infrastructure that it is not feasible to change office, it has decided to share its office spaces in a strategic manner so that the total cost is divided. This used to be the practice earlier, especially with brokers at the BSE or at other places where the cost was too high; but now many professionals have started utilising extra space in their offices with clear demarcations and sub-let it to other businesses to improve the return on the capital invested in their bigger office. If need be, in future they may stop sharing the office space.

Honestly, the shared office concept was there even prior to the pandemic but it was very limited and mostly seen as a way to save on rent; but the way shared offices were used was more in the manner of a traditional office where, after sharing the space, the business will occupy its own space and operate just as a traditional office. Now, with technology the concept of shared offices is evolving where businesses are realising that their need for office space may not be constant and, accordingly, the ‘shared office space’ concept has made a comeback where the same old concept is used in a modern way. But the principle is the same.

Work From Home:
Since the onset of the pandemic, XYZ Associates has been left with only one option – Work From Home. It facilitates employees with all necessary hardware and software (readers may refer to our previous article). The work is done, the client is satisfied and the lockdown rules are also not violated. What else do we need?

One of the most used expressions of 2020 has to be ‘Work From Home’ (WFH). Almost all offices have shifted to this culture. People enjoyed working from home till it lasted as the new dressing sense arrived, attending meetings via mobile phone and computer started saving a lot of time and they started getting more time to spend with family; these have helped many people, but after a point of time many got tired as it was merely a makeshift arrangement. However, some companies do prepare well and have utilised the opportunity diligently to ensure that they shift part of their workforce to WFH at a reduced pay; with the kind of savings employees manage on cost of travelling to having to buy or rent a house in a premium location to avoid travelling, many employees have willingly accepted the offer as it has offered a net advantage to them. WFH, if established well in an organisation with a proper digital workplace with impeccable communications, regular flow of information and processes, can help iron out a lot of limitations in businesses.

Flexi Offices:
XYZ Associates earlier had an office with a seating capacity of 100. During the pandemic it realised that a traditional office is a must for multiple purposes (having a registered address for compliances, holding client meetings and important team meets), but everyone need not visit it daily. The cost of such an office is also too high. So it decided to shift to a smaller space with 30 seats and flexi timings. Now the employees can plan and ‘book’ the office for meetings or visits. This has indeed solved many problems for the firm.

This is a new concept in offices that has been growing in recent years. Offices will have the capacity for a limited number of employees and while it will be used as an office, not everyone would be accommodated at the same time. So while most of the employees can continue to work from home, the ‘Flexi Office’ system permits some of the employees to travel to the office in a predetermined way (by appointment!). It can be used for important meetings or discussions which cannot be done via the online mode or when employees are not able to work from home owing to temporary limitations. Organisations will use different methods to regulate who can travel to office, from making an early ‘booking’ to rotating the staff on fixed days to allow them to access the office. In this system, the organisation does not have fixed desks or places for employees – instead, a desk space / seating area is shared and generally allocated on a FIFO basis. The concept of a ‘Flexi Office’ gives the optimum benefits of the traditional office and also an option for organisations to take advantage of technology to save costs as well as hire talent without geographical limitations.

Co-working Spaces:
Mr. A stays on the outskirts of Mumbai and has a downtown office. In an ideal situation, he would love to work from home to save on travel time and cost. But he has various limitations at home: a small home which may not be ideal for attending calls, it would be difficult to ignore guests that may visit during office hours, as also multiple people working from the same home. Mr. A can’t work from home, but also wants to save on travel time and cost.

On the other hand, the firm XYZ Associates where he works wants to save on office infrastructure cost but is not comfortable with employees working from home. They have seen employees’ family members disturbing them during WFH calls or have experienced wi-fi connections getting lost.

Both XYZ Associates and Mr. A agree to opt for Co-working spaces. They find such a space in an area nearest to the employee which offers a desk, electricity, infrastructure and unlimited high speed wi-fi. This will solve everyone’s problem. While Mr. X will take only ten minutes and spend Rs. 20 daily to travel to such a Co-working space, XYZ Associates will save on office infrastructure. Also, when the company offers Co-working to employees in locations like Bandra-Kurla Complex or Nariman Point in Mumbai, it may cost them as much as Rs. 30,000 to Rs. 50,000 per seat but on the outskirts it may go down to Rs. 5,000 to Rs. 10,000 annually.

Co-working spaces are growing in popularity in India and companies like Innov8, WeWork, Springboard, etc. are already investing big time to provide Co-working spaces. Co-working is basically like a shared office but instead of an organisation deciding rules and managing costs, it is managed by a team of professionals who share their space for a fee. For example, just as we pay rent to a hotel to avail all facilities, Co-working is a ‘hotel’ for our business where we can focus just on work and all the formalities from cleaning the space, arranging for coffee, to collecting your courier, etc., is taken care of by the service provider. Plus, Co-working provides no distraction working along with a virtually office-like experience for employees who are working from home. Many Startups that are offering WFH have also started offering incentives to employees if they prefer to work from any of the Co-working spaces near by. And especially in cities like Mumbai where the houses are small and it’s not possible for all employees to manage working from home without distractions, businesses are benefiting from this new option. Co-working charges a minimum monthly or daily fee and lets individuals work without worrying about the other basic necessities like Internet access or arranging for administrative responsibilities.

One can use Co-working spaces by booking a desk for a single day, a week or a month.

Virtual Office (only for registration):
XYZ Limited started its business asking all employees to work from home. Now, since their turnover has crossed the minimum limit for GST registration they are in trouble as to how to do it without an official place of business. So they have been looking for Virtual Offices that charge a minimum amount and let them rent the office only for documentation purposes. XYZ Limited will now have a registered place of business while the employees can still continue working from home.

Virtual Office as a concept is growing in popularity in India owing to regulatory requirements wherein we still need a physical office address to start a business. A Virtual Office is basically a service in which a business owner can show a place as its address for communication and compliance purposes at minimal cost. This becomes useful in cases where a person wants to work from home but does not have all the documents for office premises, or does not want to show the residential address for business correspondence.

CONCLUSION
Growth is optional, but change is constant. There are many examples in the past when companies which have moved along with the shift in technology have gained significant ground vs. the companies that resisted change. The giants of the retail business have fallen because they did not adapt to eCommerce, while newbies of the market like Flipkart and Zomato are becoming far more valuable as they have shown adaptability.

Through this article we are not saying that traditional offices will be out of fashion immediately but now the time has come when, as things have started moving, the one who is ready to adapt to change will thrive. The Digital Workplace is the future and the only thing that is still not clear is the extent to which it will change our lives. Like the computer revolution of the 1980s or mobile phones earlier in this century, every one of us knew it would be a game-changer but ‘how’ was not clear back then. Similarly, the Digital Workplace is going to be the modern way of working and we can either resist the change and delay it, or accept it with open arms and get ready for the future.

 

INITIATIVES DURING PANDEMIC – PERSONAL EXPERIENCES

INTRODUCTION

The pandemic was / is unprecedented, a time of extraordinary change for everyone in every facet of life. It has affected people in most parts of the world directly or indirectly. People have lost their near and dear ones, their occupation / livelihood, or limited their lifestyle with the focus only on basic needs. It has changed drastically how we think and behave. It has bought most families nearer (in some cases even caused strife). Life used to be very mechanical in metros while we were chasing our materialistic / professional dreams. It was challenging irrespective of our educational qualifications, the profession or occupation in which we were engaged. The fear of contracting the virus and uncertainty thereafter created a tremendous scare in all of us. However, for us professionals commitment to clients is paramount and in their time of need we need to support them even more.

At our firm we went back to the basics – our purpose, vision and mission. We took a month to understand that this is a long haul and saw how we could support the clients as our first job and then looked at support to all other stakeholders; we also got what we call our knowledge edge initiatives. We started immediately as most of the staff and partners were suddenly free. Many of the measures taken by us in this period have been adverted to in this article which had a positive impact on the entire eco-system of stakeholders. In retrospect, however, there was much more that we could have done.

 
ASSESSING THE SITUATION

The first thing to be done in such uncertain times is to take stock of the things on hand, understand how the lockdown would impact everyone. Some of the areas we chose to concentrate on were as follows:

* Ensuring the safety of the employees. Some might have been stuck on outstation assignments. Arrangement of the basic needs, stay and travel was essential for them.

* Assessing the work in progress and completing the services possible for clients.

* Getting each and every employee in the firm updated and given in-depth knowledge – level wise.

* Suo motu reducing the fees of the first quarter work as a signal of support to the clients on 1st April, 2020.

* Looking at what value-added service to provide to all clients without visiting them. This was focused more on specific training / knowledge dissemination.

* Improving the connect of the team leaders with their teams and also with the partners. Understanding their needs and seeing how we could fill the gap.

* Restricting the drawals and deferral of salaries for a period of five months. Once the situation was in control, adding the deferral month-wise.

* Investing in automation for office use as well as for clients’ use.

* Faster geographical as well as size expansion was possible. Virtual opening / puja done.

Assessment of possible support to clients in the difficult situation

We believed that once a client engaged us, it was our moral responsibility to provide all possible value-addition during the difficult time. When a firm has been retained for regular advice or periodic audit, even a small value addition would make a big difference. The CA profession is based on trust and these measures would build / enhance trust. We voluntarily reduced the fee to the extent of 25% for three months and gave other support of value-added services based on information already with us without charging any fee.

Assessment of the possible inflow of information from the client

As a CA firm, we need to get the relevant information on time from our clients for delivery of quality service. Whatever problems we had faced in terms of manpower, infrastructure, etc., the same or even more has been the case with our clients, too. Further, the clients had many other priorities and therefore follow-up on calls and recording of the conversations on email was encouraged. Based on the correct assessment of the possible reduced inflow of cash from the clients, the working capital was planned and even a loan was taken.

Assessment of jobs which can be done and which can be deferred

The statutory compliances did get postponed. It was important for us as well as for our clients to assess what jobs could be done during the lockdown and what jobs could be deferred. Some parts of the jobs could be completed and the rest would have to await the opening up for completion.

Assessment of jobs nearing due dates and action plan

Since the lockdown was announced suddenly, the work stopped abruptly. There were many time-bound assignments / compliances. It was certain that the due dates of all the compliances would be extended, but there could have been other implications. In business many things are inter-related. If one task gets delayed, then another one also gets delayed, and so on, and at the end the impact is on the financials and the cashflow. All jobs like review of ledgers, reconciliations, online verifications, even examination of documents / agreements where available, were taken up. Advice on best practices in the lockdown was also shared with every client.

Assessment of manpower availability and action plan

Just before the complete lockdown, or immediately after the announcement, many employees and workers left for their hometowns by whatever means they could find. The trade / industry employer had to assess how many employees were available for working from their homes during the lockdown and what infrastructure they had in their place of stay. For us, articles / assistants from rural areas somehow reached their hometown but of them some are still (even after nine months) to get back to office.

Assessment of the IT infrastructure availability and action plan

The CA firms can use technology to some extent but the profession cannot be fully automatised. The CA profession is intellect-driven and not machine-driven. Our firm has been using office management software and servers for many years for data management, albeit partially. We were able to catch up on that. We were able to adapt partially to the work-from-home philosophy. We quickly prepared a policy for that and a standard operating programme for the same. As we were maintaining most of the data in the cloud, the employees could get the same and helped us to continue with quite a few of the jobs on hand. However, we had some issues where data was in servers.

Assessment of the working infrastructure at the homes of the employees

Work-from-home has its own challenges, especially in metros where houses are generally small. If everyone works from home, there has to be a proper place to sit and work. Continuous working in uncomfortable positions leads to health issues and reduces productivity. Normally, internet bandwidth is not very high at homes. The internet speed available on cell phones is not sufficient for office work, making conference calls, etc. Further, even to make simple calls there could be a challenge when someone else in the home is talking.

We informed our employees to go for best possible internet connection and also for a basic working table and chair. However, those employees who had gone to their villages where internet facilities are not available, just couldn’t work from home.

 
PLANNING AND THE EXECUTION OF THE JOB

Having assessed the available resources, the infrastructure and the jobs to be done, proper planning had to be done to execute the same. Since the situation was unusual, the execution of the regular jobs was also a challenge. Further, as a CA firm we have to maintain the quality of the deliverables. The quality was to be achieved through more involved monitoring. In the work-from-home situation, the monitoring also needs extra planning and efforts. The seniors in the firms made the plan for the effective monitoring of the execution and the deliverables through regular conference calls, video calls, etc. The use of office management software like Windows Office 365, iFirm and such other software has been of great use. Sharing the data and monitoring have been both convenient and effective. The hands-off approach (delegation) was given up and micro-management with daily calls and follow-up was taken up till the employees started coming back to office.

MANAGING THE CASHFLOW

One of the most challenging aspects has been managing the cashflow. Where the clients have cashflow issues, the CA firm cannot expect timely payments from them. The biggest expense in a CA firm is the employee payouts. A cut in the salary was inevitable for not only the employees but also for drawings of the partners. However, a cut in the salary should not result in an employee leaving the firm. An efficient employee is an asset to the firm. Retaining an efficient employee is very important for its growth. The salary cut was based on the ‘Manu Principle’, i.e., more cut in case of an employee earning more and less cut in case of an employee earning less. Striking the balance between cashflow and keeping the morale of the employees high has been very important. We brought down the targets to ensure that bonus would be possible for most based on performance. However, we did defer the increments this year.

 
KNOWLEDGE ENHANCEMENT INITIATIVES

As a CA firm, knowledge / skill across the firm was a key to our success. However, in the normal course the knowledge acquired tended to be on the need-to-have basis. This pandemic gave us an opportunity due to the availability of time. The explosion of online education, most of it freely available, supported this endeavour.

HEALTH ADVISORY TO THE EMPLOYEES AND MENTORING

An abrupt change in lifestyle affects health, especially in the case of senior citizens at home. The employees were advised to be very health-conscious, maintaining hygiene, social distancing, using face masks, avoiding crowded places, etc. This pandemic has created huge mental pressure due to a lack of knowledge about its spread and its impact. We believed that moral support by the employer to the personal health of the employees and their family members would boost their morale. Getting an adequate insurance cover for all for Covid-19 was done to provide some succour.

 
Regular mentoring of the employees during such times is very important. Not only does it enhance the capability of the employee, but it also improves the productivity and loyalty to the firm. Though mentoring was an irregular activity in our firm earlier, its importance was felt even more during this pandemic. Confidence-building, personality development, knowledge enhancement have been achieved to a reasonable extent through training and mentoring. Many took on longer period commitment to paid coaching to enhance themselves.

Daily discussion on the clause-by-clause analysis of the tax laws

Every day, two hours (for two months intermittently) of discussion through video call among the employees on clause-by-clause analysis of the tax laws has enhanced the knowledge of the employees tremendously. A lot of clarity emerged on the provisions of the laws. Such discussions helped us, in spite of our presence in multiple locations, to have a uniform view on the provisions of the laws.

 
Deliberation on the landmark decisions

The regular deliberation on landmark case laws among the core group in the advisory and litigation team of the firm was very useful. Such discussions helped us in the interpretation of the ratio of the judgment and its effective use in the given situation.

Preparation or updating of the audit programme, checklist and process document

We used the available time for updating the audit programme, the checklist and standard operating procedure in all streams of operations, such as audit, advisory, dispute resolution, etc. We also looked at various operations like human resources management, client engagement, deliverables, data management, accounts administration, all of which are a must for efficient management and growth of the firm and to deliver quality service. These had been on the backburner for years.

Office re-organisation

In normal times, everyone in the firm would be busy. Once the deliverables are delivered, the file is closed. There will be no time to re-look at the file except when there is a requirement subsequently. This added up to the quantity of paper in the office and data in the hard disc / server. Such unwanted accumulation of data would make it difficult to retrieve the relevant data in the future. During the pandemic, the spare time was used for cleaning of the unwanted papers / files in the office, unwanted data in the hard disc / server and proper organisation of the relevant data and audit papers / documents in some of our offices.

 
Training the employees of the client

Efficient service to the clients sometimes depends on the quality of data provided by the employees of the client. Where the employee of the clients is properly trained about the compliance required, the form in which the data is to be provided would certainly help the CA firm. During the pandemic, time was utilised for training either all the employees of our clients, or through tailor-made training programmes. Such knowledge enhancement of the employees of the clients has been a value-added activity.

 

Webinar – Knowledge sharing

Continuous education is a must for every chartered accountant. Sharing knowledge is a good way of learning. A well-structured webinar delivered by an expert would always be well attended. However, it should be as per the Code of Conduct of the ICAI. We conducted several webinars on various subjects inviting our clients and known CAs. We also ensured that we took the opportunity to accept any invitation to speak, especially if it was a challenging subject.

 

Certificate courses

Since time was available and employees of companies / professionals were available at home, we conducted a number of GST certificate courses. We allowed / mandated / encouraged the employees to attend such courses. Many senior employees were allowed to teach in internal learning sessions and then joined the seniors for public seminars.

 
Book-writing, revisions and writing, updating the articles

During the pandemic, we could reconsider updating our old books and take on some planned books. We were able to write more than 70 articles and update several existing articles on the website. The updation of the website to some extent has also been done.
 

Self-empowerment initiatives

The pandemic has provided a great opportunity to introspect and take self-empowerment initiatives. Many great institutions all over the world have been offering online courses in various subjects. Some of them are free and others are for a fee. It was time to set goals and make positive choices and take control of our own lives. It was time to understand our strengths and weaknesses and to develop the belief within. It is true that every challenge is an opportunity to grow. Some of us have participated in a few such self-empowerment programmes.

Expansion

As we were able to spare some time, we started a branch in a metro city (on 10th August, 2020). Mentoring was possible because of the slack and now we are ready to open offices in three Tier II cities before March, 2021. We also decided to have smaller offices due to the focus on online training and seminars.

 
CONCLUSION

It is a fact that we could choose to react to this dreadful epidemic by focusing on professionalising the firm, empowering ourselves and our employees. The future might not be the same as was the past. The future appears to be more virtual. We believe that it is better to invest in technology, adapt to the change and go digital. The flip side of the pandemic was that it provided a lot of time to introspect and look at the issues on the backburner. The familiar ‘I am too busy’ trope was not available and professionals like us did much more to strengthen the depth of knowledge, catching up with training, took up updating books and articles and, importantly, the one-to-one interpersonal activities increased significantly.

On the whole, we got better prepared for the delivery of services remotely as well as attracting clients due to higher visibility and sharing. Our multi-locational presence has helped us to leverage and support each other because the situation was not so bad in a few locations. Thanks to all these foundation-strengthening activities, we are poised for major growth in F.Y. 2021-22 even though the pandemic is still affecting some locations.


Money is like a sixth sense – and you can’t make use of the other five without it

– William Somerset Maugham

DIGITAL MARKETING? NAAH, IT’S DIGITAL BRANDING

A practising Chartered Accountant is bound by the Code of Ethics (‘CoE’) and is not permitted to advertise herself or her services. Honestly, a CA’s service holds dignity and doesn’t require any kind of solicitation. However, it must be noted that many other entities hire CAs and can brand for more or less all services that a Chartered Accountant offers and market and brand them. From that perspective, a Chartered Accountant is at a disadvantage as she is not on a level playing field. Therefore, we cannot ignore the fact that building a brand for oneself is equally important in today’s world.

I’m sure all of you have come across the following kinds of questions:
•        I am not sure if my firm or I can be on social media or digital platforms because our Code of Ethics does not allow that;
•        CA, as a profession, runs purely on referrals and social or digital media may not help;
•        I know few people who are on these platforms but I’m not sure how effective that is;
•        I feel it’s a waste of time and I have better technical things to concentrate on.

Let us now quickly look at answering these questions by simply understanding the basics of Digital Branding.

WHAT IS DIGITAL
BRANDING?

Today, for everything we search on Google, but do you know Google is merely a search engine and it does not create most of the content? All it does is smartly present to you content which is created by millions of users and subject matter experts like us.

Digital Branding is a process of creating an online identity and brand story of your firm or of yourself. It involves using online channels like websites, social media, SEOs, etc., so that when someone is in need of answers she can get them via Google search or other social media.

To put it simply, Digital Marketing is like pulling customers to you by advertising which is restricted and against the code of ethics, whereas Digital Branding is like creating a digital presence so that those who are in need of advice / service get contact details to approach you.

In the current professional services era, you can think of your brand as the visibility of your digital reputation.

WHY IS DIGITAL
BRANDING IMPORTANT?

Technology is something that disrupts every industry every now and then and firms that do not adjust with technology may cease to exist. We have so many examples of mobile giants like Blackberry, Nokia, etc. However, being professionals we are assured that our knowledge and expertise will not be replaced just like Kodak paper was replaced with Digital Photography. But does that mean technology will not disrupt how CAs are working or getting new clients?

Let us take a look at just the last six months. How many of us had earlier heard about Zoom (a company that was set up in 2011)? But today we will hardly find any professionals who have not heard of or used Zoom. Yes, the pandemic was unprecedented and the entire world was under lockdown so we were all forced to switch to the Digital World. And everyone co-operated in the switch. However, does every change follow the same process? What if, after a few years of working, we suddenly realise that something else has changed slowly but certainly and that we are now the odd person out?

Do we need to wait for a pandemic to teach us the next lesson or do we start blending in with a five-year plan? It’s high time to envisage the importance of digital branding. Agreed, that our profession runs on a referral model, but imagine someone referring you to a potential client and they do not find any digital presence while Googling (searching your firm’s name on Google). There are high chances they may not even approach you. Secondly, the belief that ICAI COE doesn’t allow us to be on digital / social media platforms, or that it’s a risky thing to do, isn’t true.

Currently, there are around 1.5 lakh practising CAs but the real competition is online companies which place advertisements and many other semi-qualified CAs or other professionals offering to do the same work as CAs. Not that all users are interested in hiring those online companies or the semi-qualified individuals – but their ability to approach professionals is limited to Google and other social media, but we are virtually not present there.

WHY HAVING A DIGITAL BRAND WILL
WORK FOR US

Digital Media has its own set of advantages and we have already witnessed one of its major advantages in the pandemic. It was a Eureka! moment for a lot of people who realised that we may not need to travel all the way to just speak face-to-face. We can just do a video call, have negotiations, meetings and discussions and close the deal. Let us try and understand the various advantages that the Digital Platform offers us:

Cost-effective – Unlike other traditional modes of branding, it is cost-effective. About 90% of the digital media platforms are free to use. The cost, most of the time, is the ‘TIME’ that you invest in using the Digital Platform;
Global market – With the www revolution, we are not bound by physical boundaries. Anything we post on social media can be accessed by anyone in the world. Connecting has become seamless. For example, a website of a person working in a remote village can be accessed by a person sitting in the US or Europe, vs. the physical billboard outside our office;
Flexibility – A user can access the details while travelling or early in the morning, or late night, whether on laptop or mobile; digital platforms give flexibility to users to read, watch or listen at a time and place of their choice, as well as it gives us the flexibility to post or just simply schedule the posting as well;
Interactive – All digital platforms are much more interactive than traditional modes. Websites offer chatbox option, social media provide Direct Message Option and hence when the interaction is quick, there are high chances that users with queries can turn into clients with consultancy;
Tracking results and analytics – A majority of the digital platforms provide analytics which can help track the results of each post.

Clause (6) of the First Schedule, Code of Ethics, says that a ‘Chartered Accountant in practice shall be deemed to be guilty of professional misconduct, if he solicits clients or professional work either directly or indirectly by circular, advertisement, personal communication or interview or by any other means’.

Often, a practising CA is reluctant to use digital or social media believing it to be a push mode and an indirect way of soliciting. This is where Digital Branding wins over Digital Marketing. Before we look at different modes of digital branding, let us understand the difference with some quick examples:

Digital
Marketing / Push Mode

Digital
Branding / Pull Mode

Updating status on various social media or sending direct
messages to your connects asking them for collaboration or direct work

Regularly updating status on various notifications which show
your expertise to readers which may ultimately (in the long run) help win a
client

Yourself writing client reviews or attaching screenshots which
may brag about your work

Your clients tagging you or giving you a review on ‘Google My
Business’ page of how happy they were with your services

Replying to comments on your posts with ‘Reach out to us to
avail services’

Replying to comments with your knowledge and leaving an ‘In case
you have further queries, you may feel free to reach out to us’

When we talk about having a digital presence, we are nowhere soliciting or advertising our services but just building a brand on digital platforms by generating rich and useful content.

 

WHAT ARE THE VARIOUS MODES OF
DIGITAL BRANDING?

In this section of the article, we will sketchily look at the modes of Digital Branding and how it may help to build your brand to eventually help you / your firm grow.

Mode I: Search Engine Optimisation
Search engine optimisation (SEO) is the process of growing the quality and quantity of website traffic by increasing the visibility of a website or a web page to users of a web search engine like Google Search or other Social Media Search. In short, SEO is utilising specific goal-oriented strategies to ensure that we rank higher up in search results pages. Firms using SEOs to optimise their content (whether websites or Google My Business) will be the ones clients get their answers from when they first Google and eventually land up assigning their work to the firms. The broad channel categories of SEO Branding include these modes:

A) Website:
Your firm’s website should be optimised with words that show your niche. A good website should ideally be mobile-friendly as well as optimised for computer screens. Your website is your first digital impression; a poorly designed one is like having an office in an area where no one prefers to travel. Websites should be easy to navigate and should answer basic questions like what’s your specialisation, your location and what information and tools you provide and, most importantly, the call to action button, i.e., where a visitor can contact you in case she has a query. If words in a website are used wisely, it can enrich the SEO and provide better search results.

B) Google My Business Account:
The fact is that around 65% of the CA firms do not have their own Google My Business (‘GMB’) account. A GMB account basically is Google’s way of verifying small businesses. So when someone searches exactly about your business, Google shows details about the business on the right-hand side of the search result. If a GMB account is not created, it may show other firms’ results instead. Besides, a verified GMB account means your official website appears first in search results when someone searches your firm’s name instead of some random online aggregator websites.

Having a GMB account builds your brand in multiple ways – it improves SEO for a professional web page, helps you build reputation by taking reviews from clients and colleagues for your page and all of this is absolutely without charge. To summarise, a GMB account is a ‘should have’ and not a ‘good to have’.

Mode II: Social Media Branding
Social Media (‘SM’) Branding is the use of social media platforms to connect with your audience. This involves publishing great and engaging content with your SM profiles, listening to and engaging your followers and analysing your results. Co-reading this with paragraph 2.14.1.7(vii) & (x) of Clause 7, First Schedule of COE, it is to be noted that though one can use the prefix ‘CA’ on SM profiles and have a firm page on SM accounts, utmost care should be taken that no exaggerated claims are made (such as, Best CA for GST, Best CA in Mumbai and so on). Hence, the perception that as a practising CA one may / should not have an SM presence doesn’t really hold true. Let’s quickly look at the channels of SM and how these may help in branding:

(a) LinkedIn / Twitter / Facebook / Instagram:
It is a known fact that the number of users on the above SM in India (including professionals, too, considering LinkedIn and Twitter) are in their billions and not having a presence on these SM won’t really help. These platforms work in an easy way: Every time you publish a post or share an update which the readers find useful, they tend to share the same and the reach increases. The more content you generate on SM, the more people will know you and the better brand you will build for yourself. Firms regularly sharing relevant updates build a reputation which in the long run will get them more clients. (Think about it like this – Since childhood you have seen ads and hoardings of Activa two-wheelers and as a first-time user when you plan to buy a two-wheeler, Activa would be the first brand that will come to your mind. The same happens with clients who look for services the first time.) So, if you have regularly maintained your brand on SM, they will be inclined towards you.

(b) Quora:

This is my personal favourite SM platform. Quora has a competitive edge as only about 500 practising CAs are currently using it. What makes it unique is the purpose of the user visiting it. It’s neither search nor social media but somewhere in between. The content posted here is easy to find even months and years later, unlike other SM where it gets buried or disappears. If any potential clients using Quora find an answer posted by you / your firm, there are 85% chances of them connecting with you when they look for any formal consultancy. This is primarily because of the satisfaction they received with your simple answers. Practising professionals who are active on Quora create an avenue to get new clients for themselves simply by answering questions. Needless to add, the brand is also worth cultivating because the platform has a global reach.

Mode III: Content Branding

Content branding is a strategic approach focused on creating and distributing valuable, relevant and consistent content to attract and retain a clearly defined audience. In our profession, content branding entails writing books, articles, blogs or any kind of write-ups (collectively defined as write-up). Paragraph 2.14.1.6(iv)D of Clause (6), First Schedule of COE countenances using the designation CA in the write-ups. So, every time a person reads your write-up which shows your specialisation, they are building an image of you and next time they wish to have a consultancy on that topic, they may be inclined to approach you because you created a reputation on the topic with your content.

Mode IV: Audio / Visual Branding
If truth be told, the modern generation prefers audio / visual stimulus that is easily accessible and gets to the point over the idea of having to read something, and hence audio / visual branding these days becomes imperative. It’s really simple – a random user (who may be a potential client) wanting to learn how to log-in to the GST portal will prefer to watch a video on the same or attend a webinar rather than reading about it. So, when it’s about technical substance, people prefer reading write-ups, but when it comes to practical stuff, a webinar or an educational video will have the upper hand. And this is what audio / visual branding is all about – creating a marquee for yourself / your firm.

And this definitely works, given the following motives:
•        Hosting a webinar or uploading a video gives you an opportunity to position yourself as an expert in the topic;
•        It is an indirect way of soft sales;
•        The level of interaction it provides gives comfort to the audience; and
•        Lastly, it’s the new trend and we do not want to stay out of sync with it.

While we have delved into how audio / visual branding helps strengthen our Digital Presence, it is also to be noted that there is no violation of the code of ethics here provided we are cautious about not mentioning the firm’s name in the videos [ruled by Paragraph 2.14.1.6(iv) – Q of Clause 6, First Schedule of COE]. However, sharing videos on your own SM profile still does the work.

To summarise, while the COE does restrict direct ways of advertising, we should avoid Digital Marketing but definitely cannot avoid having a Digital Brand for ourselves or our firm. The modes of digital branding discussed here, when used with the correct strategies for each digital / SM platform, can work wonders for us even without soliciting work.

As a first step, this is what should be done:
•        Creating, reviewing and revamping your individual and your firm’s digital / SM channels (redesigning website to enrich the SEO, having a GMB account, initiating and start using Quora, review each of the SM profiles);
•        Plan your first webinar / YouTube video which can showcase your expertise and make it reach more people;
•        Stop hard-selling, rather work on building a reputation on these channels; and
•        Connect with relevant professionals on LinkedIn / Twitter and follow them.

For, it goes without saying that
NETWORK = NET WORTH

Do you think you’re sitting still right now?
– You’re on a planet orbiting a star at 30 km/s
– That star is orbiting the centre of a galaxy at 230 km/s
– That galaxy is moving through the universe at 600 km/s
Since you started reading this, you have travelled about 3,000 km

If your hate could be turned into electricity,
it would light up the whole world
– Nikola Tesla

 

EFFECTIVE USE OF QUORA FOR A PROFESSIONAL

Quora is a place (a website, actually) to gain and share knowledge. It is
a platform to ask questions and connect with people who contribute unique
insights and quality answers. Though it is a social media platform, it works
quite differently. Users do not visit Quora to check
Notifications or ‘Likes’. Quora is a platform where a
user can ask a question and it is answered by various industry experts. In
comparison, on Instagram a celebrity or an
‘Influencer’ (the buzzword in today’s time) posts a photo and / or video and
users interact and give responses based on such videos or photos. In the same
way, Quora is a platform where the basic content is a
question. So, a user can ask questions and industry leaders and experts answer
them.

 

INTRODUCTION

Quora was founded in 2009 by Adam D’Angelo,
former CTO of Facebook, and Charlie Cheever, a former Facebook employee. Based
in Mountain View, California, it is published by Quora
Inc. Although launched in 2009, the website was made public only in June, 2010.
In short, Quora is a question-answer platform that
allows people to ask questions and seek answers from real people. It has nearly
70 crore active monthly users and there are nearly
four lakh open ‘topics’ on it.

 

Now, the new generation has started using Quora to search for answers. For example, when someone wants
to start a new company, they will ask questions on Quora; when they are looking for an income tax idea, they
will seek advice on Quora. It is not a paid
consultancy programme or a platform on which an individual can sell anything
like Just Dial, but the user traffic it generates can help in getting the right
connection.

 

A survey shows that about 1,000 Chartered Accountants have their
profiles on Quora and we can assume that 500 may be
practising.
Imagine the competitive edge they have by using this platform. Quora can indeed be an avenue to get new clients. Let us
deep-dive and ask some questions of our own!

 

What is Quora and how can it help
professionals like CAs?

 

Quora provides a platform to share your experience and expertise. People
can follow you and share your ideas within their social network, thus building a
brand for you or your business.
The content built on Quora can be shared
on various digital platforms which in a way is ‘Search
Engine Optimisation’ (SEO) fodder; whatever you write is indexed by Google,
relates back to you, which again relates to your business and brand.

 

For example, if you are a ‘GST on healthcare services expert’ and you
provide a good answer to a question on input tax credit, Google brings the users
to your answer and there are high chances that the user may take the next step
of going to your website or social media page and calling your firm for an
estimate. It is through participation on sites like Quora that you add more value to that relationship and help
build count and trust with your audience. Quora is one
tool that can help you do this.

 

Why does using Quora make
sense?

 

What makes Quora unique is the purpose of
the user visiting it. It is neither a search nor a social medium but somewhere
in between, with over 30 crore people visiting it
every month asking for tips and answers and learning about the world around
them. Quora has an edge over other platforms because
the content posted here is easy to find even months and years later, unlike
other social media platforms where it gets buried or disappears.

 

Now that we have explored why Quora is a
powerful channel for your brand awareness and distributing content, let us look
at some steps to get started on Quora.

 

Step 1: Contribute to the conversation

Quora is used by people who are actively looking for answers and are
genuinely interested in what you have to say. Your answers can, of course,
enrich the SEO since many of these answers show up in Google searches. Quora uses an algorithm to pick up your answer and match it
with people interested in the topic. It sends out answers to users following the
topic and there are chances it may reach hundreds or thousands of people.

 

Step 2: Building appropriate content on Quora

To get started, answer questions relevant to your expertise. You may
start providing additional information to the already answered questions by
looking at the missing information. The content on Quora is different from other social media because here the
primary goal is not about the number of views but providing the best answers to
your audience’s questions. Below are quick tips that can help you make useful
content on Quora:

 

? Include facts and personal stories (could be of success or even
failure) to make it relatable;

? Credibility plays a vital role, so make sure that what you write is
factually correct;

? The quickest one to answer has more chances to get up-voted by
users.

 

Step 3: Have a rocking Quora
profile

When you start writing answers, it is important to convey your
expertise and build trust by filling out your Quora
credentials and bio. Unlike other user-generated Q&A sites, users on Quora create profiles based on their real identities. Quora has active moderation policies in place to ensure that
discourse is civil, content quality is high and people feel safe sharing their
knowledge.

 

By adding your title, company, bio, interests and website links, you
signal who you are and why readers should trust your answers. It also helps
people find you when searching for experts and / or the best person to answer
their questions. And be sure to include important links (your website, your
LinkedIn URL, your blogs, or YouTube channels).

 

Step 4: Gain authority and establish your trust with
followers

You are doing amazing well till now on Quora. Your flywheel is picking up speed as you consistently
answer questions and engage with the community. It is now time to gain authority
on the platform. Provide answers that are out of the box and establish trust
with followers.

 

So if someone asks, ‘What is the revised due
date for filing XYZ return?’ you can answer with the due date and add something
else – ‘Companies may face challenges with this’. When you do this, not only
will your audience be interested in reading an answer that could help them, but
you will also earn their trust and gain credibility.

 

There have been professionals who have built such an amazing presence
on Quora that their posts have been viewed lakhs of
times.

 

Step 5: Content distribution

If you are looking to increase awareness about your Quora content, you can cross-distribute your answers.
Consider the following two ideas:

 

Amplify distribution with other social media networks:
If you have answered a good question, why not brag about it on social
media? Consider posting your answers on social media strategically. You can do
this simply by writing – ‘Check out my views on this question’.

 

Send it to the broadcast list: You can consider sending out an update to your broadcast list (email
list) asking them to check your views and provide feedback.

 

To summarise, while Quora is a platform to
build your brand, remember, do not sell anything on Quora or any social media. But that does not stop you from
sharing your experience in the right way and helping the needy. Remember, your
sharing can help even more people.

PERSONAL DATA PROTECTION

BACKGROUND

Privacy as a
fundamental right is recognised by all the democratic countries. This right
stems from recognition of a need to uphold individual dignity in a free world. Right to privacy flows from right to life and personal liberty given to every
citizen by our Constitution. The first law in the world about privacy data
protection was enacted in Sweden in 1973. Subsequently, the European nations
adopted Data Protection Directive (95/46/EC) in 1995 about protection of
processing of personal data which later became known as the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) in April,
2016 and has become enforceable on 25th May, 2018. Similarly, in the
US, the federal law of Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
(HIPPA) was passed in 1996 which mandated strict protection of personally
identifiable information processed by the healthcare and healthcare insurance
industry. A similar law in Canada called Personal Information Protection and Electronic
Documents Act (PIPEDA) was made effective from April, 2020.

 

India has awakened
to the fact that in view of the fast-paced growth in every field, be it
technology, trade, medical science or sport, the interaction with the world has
impacted our eco-systems and the way we do business and adopt technology. Since
technology will form part of everything we do, we will need to formally protect
the personal information of citizens from abuse and manipulation. A new law
through the Personal Data Protection Bill of 2019 is likely to be enacted soon.

 

In the wake of the
recognition of the need to protect personal data by law, business enterprises
in many Western and Far Eastern countries are looking for solutions to
implement the regulations and save on huge penalties that are levied for
non-compliance.

 

This has opened
up new avenues of opportunity for the professionals in India to expand into
providing valuable solutions to these enterprises.

 

An attempt has
been made here to provide broad guidelines and a roadmap to implement the
regulations on personal data protection which will help our professionals and
IT service industries to provide value-added service to their customers.

 

WHAT DATA
IS SUBJECT TO PROTECTION?

It is important to
understand what is ‘data’ and what are the activities that are subjected to
protection. With little variations, most of the prevailing laws define
‘Personal Data’ as ‘data about or relating to a natural person who is
directly or indirectly identifiable, having regard to any characteristic,
trait, attribute or any other feature of the identity of such natural person,
whether online or offline, or any combination of such features with any other
information, and shall include any inference drawn from such data for the
purpose of profiling.’

 

Thus, all the
information like birth date, name, address, contact number, email address,
personal image, ID card No., payment card Nos., health details, financial
information, political and religious affiliation, biometric data and data about
the individual on the basis of which inference can be drawn is also subject of
the regulations, e.g., membership of clubs, religious, political or social
groups.

 

After considering
the scope of the privacy regulations in developed countries, it is found that
in general the scope of the activities and entities to which the privacy
regulations apply is as follows:

 

(a) the processing of personal data where such data
has been collected, disclosed, shared or otherwise processed within the
jurisdiction,

 

(b) the processing of personal data by any
enterprise, company, body of persons operating within the jurisdiction,

 

(c) to entities outside the territory of the
regulations but processing personal data of the citizens residing in the
jurisdiction; e.g., GDPR applies to the enterprises outside the European Union
but processing and collecting data of the citizens of the European Union.

 

DRIVERS
FOR IMPLEMENTING DATA PRIVACY REGULATIONS

(A)  Legal obligation:
Business enterprises take the initiative to implement the regulations about
protection of personal data primarily as a legal compliance requirement.
However, few organisations have taken proactive decisions as a good governance
practice.

 

(B)  Risk arising out of Data breach: Damage to reputation and uncalled publicity due to incidents like
data breach is a single good reason for management to take up data protection with
priority. One can refer to the incidents of data theft at the Marriott group,
the Target group, the SBI Card data breach which left
these companies struggling to answer the media and regulators.

 

(C)  Governance: It is
now widely accepted in the capital market that the companies which have good
practices in governance and have implemented data security framework, are
valued more than the enterprises which do not have such practices. The
companies with good governance practices will be less likely to be victim of
data breaches.

 

(D)  Punishment:
Punitive provisions of the law are a great driver for a majority of the
enterprises. In case of Personal Data Protection provisions, the penalty for
violations of the provisions could result in penalty up to Rs. 5 crores or 2%
of global turnover, whichever is higher. In case of more grave violations like
transfer of personal data outside India or children’s data in violation, may
attract penalty of Rs. 15 crores or 4% of global turnover, whichever may be
higher. This is in tune with European regulations (GDPR) where the penalty is
Euro 20 million or 4% of the global turnover of the enterprise.

 

(E) Customer: Another
important driver for adoption of early implementation of personal data
protection by the enterprise is the customer. Where the customer obliges (or
insists on) the vendor enterprise that there should be policies and procedures
about personal data protection, the enterprise in a move to win over the
customer resorts to quick compliance.

 

It becomes
imperative, therefore, and has become an important agenda for boards to take up
implementation of personal data protection as a strategy. Chartered Accountants
with IT security skills are often roped into audit committee discussions for
ways to comply with and implement the personal data protection policies. If one
has adequate knowledge and plans for implementation one may add great value to
the governance and provide leadership in data protection.

    

IMPLEMENTATION
ROAD MAP

1.  Board level initiative

A move to implement
PDP (personal data protection) should flow from the governing body. It is seen
that PDP is more effectively implemented where the board drives the
implementation and monitors its progress.

 

2.  Set up framework for the PDP

Framework for PDP
would include:

(a) Identification of Personal Data

Personal data
qualifying for protection as per the regulations may be part of databases
e-residing on owned database or data may be uploaded in cloud environment which
may be outside the territory of India but subject to control from India. The
Procedure needs to be defined as to how to obtain inventory of database
instances and identify personal data qualifying within the definition of
personal data.

 

(b) Governance policies and procedures

For effective
implementation of compliance, policies and SOPs for acquiring, identifying,
classifying and storing for processing need to be defined and documented.
Policies for personal data protection should be based on the following
principles:

(i)  Objective of adopting organisational, business
practices, processes and technical system to anticipate, identify and prevent
harm to the privacy data principal. ‘Data principal’ means an individual whose
data is processed by the data fiduciary;

(ii)  Policy to include the declaration that
processing of personal data shall adopt the commercially accepted, or
certified, standards;

(iii) Processing of data should be in transparent
manner and capable of easy identification;

(iv) Protection shall be offered throughout the data
life cycle, from collection, processing, storage, to deletion or disposal;

(v) Policy should demonstrate that the manner of
collecting, processing and disposing personal data shall be transparent, fair
and lawful.

 

(c) Data fiduciary and Data protection officer

Data fiduciary
means any person, including the State, a company, any

– juristic entity
or any individual who alone or in conjunction with others determines the

– purpose and means
of processing of personal data who is also known as Data Controller.

 

Thus, an entity
like a company, firm, association, or proprietary firm which acquires the data
and is responsible for protecting it is termed as data fiduciary.

 

A Data protection
officer needs to be appointed and be responsible for

* providing
information and advice to the data fiduciary on matters relating to fulfilling
obligations under the regulations;

* monitoring
personal data processing activities of the data fiduciary to ensure that such
processing does not violate the provisions of the regulations;

* providing advice
to the data fiduciary on carrying out the data protection impact assessments,
and carry out its review;

* providing advice
to the data fiduciary on carrying out the data protection activities;

* act as the point
of contact for the data principal for the purpose of grievance redressal.

    

(d) Set up mechanism for data breach or incident
response management

A procedure needs
to be documented for reporting responsibility, escalation of data breach and
prompt reporting of incident of data breach should be defined. This would also
include notifying the authority within reasonable time about data breach.

 

(e) Maintenance of records

The backbone of the
framework for privacy data protection is maintenance and organisation of
records or electronic data sets. As most of the information is collected,
stored and processed through IT systems, it is inevitable that how the data is
organised and retrievable is of great importance. The primary object of the
management should be that the format and manner in which data records are
maintained would demonstrate beyond doubt that due diligence is exercised by it
in protecting the personal data in case of litigation.

 

(f)  Monitoring

The framework for
the implementation would be incomplete without providing for supervising the
efforts taken for the personal data management. From the beginning an
independent authority be established in the form of internal audit or
supervisory in nature to see that the processes and compliances are well
integrated and the exceptions are reported and corrected in time

 

Personal Data
Protection implementation plan can be graphically represented in the following Fig.
1
which shows the key components. These can be viewed and considered from
top to bottom order.

 

 

 

 

 

Fig. 1, Personal Data Protection Implementation Plan

 

 

3. Identification of processes and Data sets

As a first step to
comply with the provisions of privacy law it is important to identify the
processes through which this personal data comes into the possession of the
company. There are business processes and supporting IT processes which need to
be identified and documented. For example, to generate customer inquiry about a
product or service you may have an application (API) where the customer enters
his / her name, email-id, or in case of on-boarding of new employee the
organisation may have a process to obtain personal details like address,
qualification, health details, etc. Such processes then become the focus for
identification and need to be documented. A register can be prepared containing
process identifier, purpose, input data, output data, geographical
jurisdiction, responsibility, third party interface and so on.

 

Similarly,
supporting IT processes to the above business processes need to be documented
containing relevant information like database, data sets (tables), input and
output interfaces. A register for data collected from these processes should be
maintained which would serve as the basis for demonstration of privacy law
compliance. The data register can be maintained as spreadsheet or database
containing details like source, type of information (personal attributes),
purpose, owner of the data, storage destination, jurisdiction, type of storage,
retention period, consent obtained and data whether exported to other
applications,

 

4.  Communication with Data Principal

The person who owns
his / her personal information is called as Data Principal who has prime right
to share his / her privacy data. Hence, communication with the data principal
is of great importance. The communication procedure also recommends a
structured approach and should have the following features:

 

NOTICE

Notice to the data
principal contains the company’s privacy policy and procedure description and
should be communicated at or before the time the personal information is
collected or immediately on collection, or if the personal information is sought
to be used for a new purpose (other than the purpose for which it was
originally collected). The language of the notice should be unambiguous and
conspicuous. It should state clearly the purpose of collecting the personal
information and intended use. Notice can be in multiple languages and contain
the identity and contact details of the data fiduciary (company) and contact
details of the data processing officer.

 

CONSENT

Communication with
the data principal should state the choice available with the individual
whether or not to share his / her personal information. The proposed bill makes
it obligatory for the data fiduciary to obtain consent. The provisions state
that ‘Personal data shall not be processed except on the consent given at the
commencement of its processing.’ The language of the consent should have
features like free, informed, specific, clear and capable of being withdrawn.
It should be noted that the provision of the goods or services or the
performance of any contract shall not be made conditional on giving consent to
the processing of personal data not necessary for that purpose. The burden of
proof is on the data fiduciary to prove that consent has been given by the data
principal for processing personal data.

 

EXCEPTIONS

In the following
cases, however, personal data can be processed without consent of data
principal:

    In connection with performance of any
function authorised by law for providing any benefit or service or issuance of
license or permit to the data principal,

    In compliance with an order or judgment by a
court or tribunal in India,

    As a response to medical emergency or threat
to life of data principal or any other person,

    To undertake any measure to provide medical
treatment or health service to any individual during outbreak of disease,
epidemic or threat to public health,

    Any non-sensitive data can be processed if
and when necessary for recruitment or termination of employment of data
principal by data fiduciary,

    In connection with providing any benefit to
employee data principal,

    In connection with reasonable purpose as
prescribed by the regulations. Reasonable purpose would include
whistle-blowing, network or information security, credit scoring, recovery of
debt and operation of search engine.

 

5. Collection

Once the purpose of
collection of personal data is communicated to the data principal, the process
of collection is to be standardised to satisfy two conditions: the collection
should be by lawful and fair means.

 

The information to
be collected should be necessary and which fulfils the purpose of collection.
It should be collected without intimidation, without deceptive means. The rules
of collection by law or by customary method must be complied with. The
management needs to ensure that information gathered from third parties like
intermediaries, e.g., social media site should also follow fairness and lawful
means.

 

6. Data retention and disposal

The international
laws provide that the data collected of personal nature should not be retained
by the data fiduciary beyond the intended purpose of collection. For the
purpose of demonstrating that the company does not retain the personal data
beyond required limit, a ‘Data Retention Policy’ be documented. Employee data
may be retained longer, till in employment, but marketing data of customer
inquiry needs to be retained only up to order fulfilment. Data beyond retention
limit can be retained only if required by any other law or with explicit
consent of the data principal. Responsibility of complying with the retention
policy should be assigned to the data processing officer. Options for disposal
of the data no longer required are anonymisation, i.e. data is cleansed of
personal identification fields, deletion or disposal in a manner that prevents
loss, theft, misuse or unauthorised access.

 

7. Data security

As a part of
personal data protection compliance, the sole accountability of protection of
the data is placed with the data fiduciary. The company should therefore have
data protection as part of its general information security policy. Personal
data needs to be protected after collection, during processing and while in
store. Data security standards prescribe for encryption of the data so that in
case of breach of theft it is very difficult to decipher the vital data stored.
Data security implies that the data should be accessible only to authorised
users. Therefore, strong access control like user authentication and multiple
authentication techniques be implemented. Internal audit can perform reviews and
monitor the controls over data security. Any lapses in the security policy
operations may be reported to the governing body. Many of the data breaches in
recent years have been possible for want of adequate data protection policies
and poor implementation. Data breaches have ruined reputations of big companies
and ended in huge penalties and risk of survival.

 

To give a few
instances in 2020, Roblox gaming company saw its 100 million accounts with
passwords exposed by a hacker who bribed an insider and badly ruined its brand.
Popular Zoom video conference service data of nearly 500,000 users was stolen
and was available for sale on the dark web. British airline Easyjet suffered
from their nine million customer account email addresses, travel details and 2,000
credit card credentials being stolen. Now the victims are subjected to
e-phishing attacks. In 2017, the Equifax (credit reporting and data analytics
company) data breach of 147 million people ended with the company settling for
425 million dollars with the US Fed Trade Commission. In 2019, Capital One, a
reputed bank, got its 106 million records compromised with precious data of
social security numbers, social insurance numbers and financial history of
customers. Similarly, in India SBI credit card data was breached in 2019.

 

8.  Risk Management

It is evident from
the above examples that risk of personal data being exposed is very high and
sensitive for any organisation. The best way to approach this is by resorting
to risk management seriously. Risk management includes three factors: Risk
identification, Risk assessment and Risk treatment. The starting point is that
all the events and threats be listed and discussed with the tech team and
operations. The more exhaustive the identification of events and threats, means
the more robust will be the risk mitigating plan. Equally important is the
assessment, i.e., likely loss from each event. It is no doubt difficult to quantify
the impact of the likely event in monetary terms but the magnitude can be
estimated by assigning values on a 1 to 10 scale. Risk treatment should include
the description of controls considering available resources and technology. The
risk assessment and treatment for mitigating the risks need to be addressed at
the highest level of management. A documented risk treatment plan can be a
guiding tool for internal audit, the executive management and should be updated
from time to time.

 

Many organisations
document this as a one-time exercise (and shelve it or remove it) only to show
to the auditors or regulatory authority. In case of sensitive data, the law
provides for ‘Data Protection Impact Assessment’ to be undertaken. Sensitive
data means such information about data principal which may cause harm if
disclosed. The assessment in such a case should contain a detailed description
of the proposed processing operation, purpose and nature of data to be
processed and so on. It would also indicate how the data fiduciary intends to
protect the sensitive data. This information will then be reviewed by the
statutory authority before giving approval. Sensitive information may include
credit, health related, financial or banking related information.

 

9.  Personal Data Access Management

The primary defence
against attack on personal data is strong access control. Having access
(logical and physical) procedures which have the following controls embedded in
it will go a long way in building a defence framework. Some of the controls
could be authorising limited internal users to limited access; managing the
change of access due to addition or separation of internal users effectively;
restricting access to offline storage; backup data; systems and media;
monitoring access activities of privilege users (system administrators) through
log reviews; restricting system configurations; super-user functionality;
remote access utilities and security devices like firewalls.

 

The most vulnerable
segment in personal data is transmission over email or public networks and
wireless networks. Companies dealing with collection of personal data often
resort to industry standard encryption methods. Importantly, testing of the
above safeguard controls should be carried out periodically and reported.

    

10.   Incident management and breach reporting

As a part of the
personal data management, every legislation provides for immediate response
communication to the authority. The incident-reporting provision states that
information about the breach should be communicated without undue delay. A
similar provision in the GDPR (General Data Protection Regulations) in the
European Union prescribes the time limit as 72 hours. A baseline reporting
mechanism needs to be developed about reporting of a data breach incident from
internal or external source by designing reporting templates. The reporting
mechanism should mainly include information-gathering and investigation
procedure about interaction between parts of the organisation and the data
processor. An important part of the incident management process is notification
to the data principals, i.e., individuals or groups whose data is subjected to
the breach. The notification should be proactive and should provide several
channels of communication like press, media and website notification at large.
The process should include legal advisory involvement, organisational
responsibility about formulating an appropriate message. Formal incident and
crisis management should be brought in in case of significant data breach.

 

The above stages in
strengthening data protection at any business enterprise would go a long way in
cultivating good governance practices. To adopt the best practices of personal
data protection, the International Standard Organization has released ISO 27701
which would help the organisations to provide the required assurance to
customers and authorities.

 

The above roadmap
and stages on this road to data protection compliance are no doubt initially
cumbersome but one should note that these are also steps towards good corporate
governance. The processes once set, if periodically reviewed for gaps and
improved, would certainly demonstrate due diligence and form a good defence in
data breach litigations.

 

References:

1.    The
Personal Data Protection Bill, 2019, India

2.    The
Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of European
       Parliament, and Directive 95/46/EC
(aka General
       Data Protection Regulations, GDPR)

3.    www.capitalone.com

4.   
PIPEDA (Personal Information Protection and
       Electronic Documents Act), Canada.

EXECUTIVE PRESENCE

Executive
Presence
– we admire it in others and want it for
ourselves! Also called Personal Presence, Leadership Presence or The
‘It’ Factor,
this intangible, difficult to define yet must-have trait
is found in business and political leaders across the world.

 

In today’s
competitive world, technical and intellectual skills are not enough to
guarantee success as a business leader. While in-depth industry knowledge is
the foundation of your career, your ability to deliver and articulate a
confident message which engages your audience, and is consistent with your
corporation’s value system, and at times even a calibrated response in
stressful times, is a leadership skill which inspires trust.

 

Your executive
presence
is on display when you

(a) Meet with prominent clients and important
prospects,

(b) Communicate with your team,

(c) Work with stakeholders to get a buy-in for your
ideas,

(d) Increase your internal and external visibility
at public fora and networking events,

(e) Present your company to shareholders, investors
and media.

 

Leaders know about
this influential dimension and believe that communication is made up of both
verbal and non-verbal components and know how to use both effectively. Your
body movements, posture, facial expressions, gestures, eye contact and attire
influence the audience and inspire trust. By integrating their verbal and
non-verbal communication, they deliver a powerful signal saying ‘I am
capable and confident’
. It’s necessary for creating a powerful impact when
interacting with clients, board members, teams and shareholders. As defined by
Sheryl Sandberg, COO of Facebook, ‘Leadership is about making others better
as a result of your presence and making sure that impact lasts in your
absence’.

 

VISUAL RESUME


As per a research
study, people wearing branded clothes were ‘perceived’ as being richer and of a
higher status than those wearing non-designer clothes. But then Warren Buffet
once said, ‘I buy expensive suits. They just look cheap on me’. While
many argue that clothes are mere ‘packaging’ and it’s what’s inside that
matters, gurus of the advertising industry will convince you that brands spend
billions of dollars every year to enhance their packaging before marketing it
to their target customers. Similarly, when you meet people for business, your
appearance can inspire confidence, putting people at ease, or it can elicit
hesitation and create confusion in their minds.

 

Body
language:
Has body language taken a backseat in
today’s information age? Not really. Think about it – we continue to judge a
book by its cover, appreciate restaurants with nicely laid-out tables, enjoy
opening beautifully-wrapped gifts. And we also believe in Hollywood movies that
show love at first sight and vote for politicians who look trustworthy. Look
around you and observe the popular world leaders, from J.F. Kennedy, Winston
Churchill, Ronald Reagan, Barack Obama to Justin Trudeau, Vladimir Putin,
Angela Merkel and Emmanuel Macron, they all display strong body language and
have used it to create an imposing presence. Physicality counts for a lot in
the business world, too. Body language is an integral component of Executive
Presence.
Defined as a non-verbal form of communication, when used
effectively it can be your key to greater success as it

(i)   Conveys interest, helping you build rapport
with stakeholders,

(ii)  Helps develop positive business relationships,

(iii) Influences and motivates your team members,

(iv) improves
productivity, and

(v)  helps
you present your ideas with more confidence and with greater impact.

 

Personal
branding:
In today’s day and age, and a highly
digitised and virtually connected world, personal branding and image management
have become ever so important. Chances are that you are working on your
personal branding – without even realising it. Every Facebook post or tweet on
Twitter is an opportunity to let others know who you are. Unlike traditional
meetings or conversations, our digital footprints are here to stay for a very
long time. They not only create a lasting impression on internal and external
stakeholders, but also help ensure better networking for the individual, which
is an important factor for success in today’s world. The word branding conjures
up an image of logos, advertising and models, which till today forms a large
chunk of how companies spend on a brand. Think IPL – look at the millions spent
by team-owners and their battery of consultants to ensure they look different
from the other teams and their fans recall their brand. For the past decade,
each IPL team has ‘invested’ millions on its logos, cricketers, sponsorships,
parties and cheerleaders.

 

(A) The leader as a statesman: There’s something about Mr. Deepak Parekh that inspires confidence.
Maybe it’s his serious demeanour or his succinct manner of communicating, but
when he makes a suggestion people listen and act on it. This explains why he is
invited on the boards of the best companies and by the government’s most
important policy-making committees. How has he managed to create this aura of
calm energy around himself? In his long career as a banker and head of HDFC,
the country’s premier housing finance company, he has built an impeccable
reputation for his integrity and decisiveness. Following in his footsteps is
the younger Mr. Uday Kotak, CEO, Kotak Bank. If he makes a comment in the
press, it is respected, if he is on a committee to define corporate governance,
investors believe he will steer it along the right path. Mr. Parekh and Mr.
Kotak are the most mature kind of leaders we call ‘statesman’ and it is
gravitas on display.

 

As per research
done at Princeton University, people decide on your trustworthiness within
one-tenth of a second. Whether it’s at an office meeting or a large social
gathering, successful leaders have an uncanny ability to command the room. They
get noticed when they walk into a room, and as they work their way through the
room, they make a connection with everyone they meet. They look people in the
eye, give them their full attention, listen to their story and say things that
make the other person feel good about the interaction. Interestingly, they
linger in your thoughts even after they have left. Clearly, leaders are in
complete agreement with American poet and civil rights activist Maya Angelou
who had famously remarked, ‘People will forget what you said, people will
forget what you did, but people will never forget how you made them feel.’

 

(B) In a virtual
world:
Today, managers and their teams are finding
it challenging to transition from high-contact, face-to-face meetings to remote
interactions. Despite the circumstances which have led to this sudden shift, it
may prove to be the new ‘normal’ for the next few months, maybe even forever.
Today, it has become a forced reality. The organisations of the future may not
need a physical location as their employees collaborate from remote locations,
creating new opportunities for both people and companies.

 

Leaders are
expected to add value by inspiring and motivating remote teams; the traditional
role of the leader as a supervisor is no longer relevant. As team members are
capable of solving their own problems, they need a leader who is both a coach
and a mentor. Simply put, leaders of remote teams have to make things smoother
for their teams to achieve their targets and stay engaged with the
organisation.

 

TEN WAYS TO ENHANCE YOUR EXECUTIVE PRESENCE

1. Embrace structure: As a leader, create a structure which allows smoother flow of
information. Spend time both at the individual level and at the group level
getting to know your team members better.

 

2. Focus on
enhanced communication:
We have to make changes in
our communication style to less distant and more accessible to our colleagues.
Communicating using technology requires a slightly more enthusiastic greeting,
speaking a tad bit louder, using a few extra gestures and spending a little
more time setting the context.

 

3. Encourage
participation:
A common complaint by all leaders is
that team members appear distracted during face-to-face meetings. With remote
teams, this problem has increased several fold. To encourage participation,
assign and allocate agenda items to team members. Ask specific questions to
individuals, e.g., ‘what was the highlight of your last week’s project?’ ‘what
more did you learn about this problem after speaking with the client?’

 

4. Redefine
trust:
When you can see team members sitting across
the corridor, you automatically assume that they are working. On the other
hand, if you see them once a month or twice a quarter, you might start doubting
their productivity. Managers will have to learn to trust their remote teams by
focusing on the deliverables, a major shift from the old order which gave
credit to the number of hours spent at the desk.

 

In the virtual
world, leaders tend to connect for task-based agendas, relying on technology.
However, humans need face-to-face interactions to trust and share their ideas.
Push for video calls – both at the individual level and at the group level.
Video calls are ideal for client meetings and internal reviews as they allow
screen-sharing and increased participation. Be quick to catch cues from members
who could be feeling lonely, appearing less motivated or possibly facing mental
health issues. Being clued-in enhances the leader’s ability to sense conflicts
and discontent at an early stage.

 

5. Micromanaging
is passé:
Check in frequently, but resist
micro-managing. Maintain clarity of communication, track the deliverables and
let your teams take ownership for their work.

 

6. Maintain
transparency:
Create a culture of being
non-judgmental and learn to manage biases. In the virtual world, it’s easier to
create sub-groups and alienate others. As a leader, you have to be sensitive to
this and nip it in the bud.

 

7. Enhance your
listening skills:
As a leader, an integral part of
your job is listening to your teams and clients. With remote working, leaders
are expected to further sharpen their ability to listen, offering support and
encouragement. Listen effectively, focus on vocal intonations, summarise and
repeat, ensuring you have a good grip on the ‘real’ problem.

 

8. Create a
sense of togetherness:
Like a traditional business
meeting, start remote interactions, too, with small talk. Ask pointed questions
to individual members, e.g., ‘How was your weekend?’ ‘What is the news from
your city?’ or ‘Give us a visual trip of your work zone.’ Small talk creates a
bridge, works as an ice-breaker and helps build relationships. Scheduling a
‘Zoom coffee’ for one-on-one interactions or a ‘Happy Hour’ for team drinks is
an excellent way to bond.

 

9. Civility
remains non-negotiable:
Some members will be
comfortable using technology while others may be awkward as they view it as a
physical barrier, leading to aggressiveness, rudeness and off-hand comments. As
a leader, be firm about acceptable behaviour and set the boundaries.

 

10. Promote a
culture of sharing:
Email, phone call, video call
or social media – what is the right communication tool for this query? Matching
the technology to your communication query requires planning. Plan the levels
of escalation and communicate them to your team.

 

CONCLUSION


It’s important to
note that Executive Presence can be developed through a combination of
self-awareness and coaching. In other words, you can learn to be a
leader who can influence and inspire and energise those around you. Is it
possible to build Executive Presence? Yes, it’s something you need to
focus on and you can develop it. Like any other skill, once you build awareness
on your strengths and weaknesses, you can get coached on your shortcomings. As
billionaire Warren Buffet said, his number one tip for success is: ‘Invest
in yourself.’

 

(Ms Shital
Kakkar Mehra is an executive coach, speaker and writer. She is the author of
‘Business Etiquette, A Guide for Indian Professional’ and has recently released
‘Executive Presence: The P.O.I.S.E. Formula for Leadership’, in July, 2020)

 

 

Life is a song – sing it

Life is a game – play it

Life is a challenge – meet it

Life is a dream – realise it

Life is a sacrifice – offer it

Life is love – enjoy it

                                                                        — 
Sai Baba

COLLABORATE TO CONSOLIDATE’ – A GROWTH MODEL FOR PROFESSIONAL SERVICES FIRMS

In today’s times,
when the market is seeking lower cost alternatives in every spend and the
otherwise not-to-be touched area of audit fees or tax fees of a CA firm is
increasingly being questioned by CFOs and business owners, with ever-increasing
need for specialist advice, the refrain is to come together with like-minded
professionals.

 

Consolidation of
professional services firms is a prerequisite for professions to grow. It is a
huge challenge and an uphill task for a lot of firms to grow as disaggregated
practices. Covid-19 has actually altered the course and changed the rules of
the game and advanced the time for these discussions. If you are not growing
consistently, there is a case for a relook. If you haven’t thought through
succession planning for your firm, now is the time to do so.

 

This article is an
attempt to provide some ideas and suggest a framework to proprietorship firms
and partnership firms providing professional services such as chartered
accountancy firms, law firms and other professional services firms to come
together, collaborate and work together for their common growth.

 

Consolidation of
accounting firms requires a fair bit of thought, analysis and a sustained
positive outlook. The mindset of growth has to be foremost for any
consolidation to be productive and value accretive. And to start this process,
collaborating with like-minded firms may be a good way to proceed.

 

(I) PREREQUISITES OF CONSOLIDATION

 

(i) Mindset

It is of paramount
importance that the mindset to collaborate, consolidate and grow is clear and
positive. Having a positive, open mindset means that one is willing to work
together under a conducive framework;

 

(ii) What can one consolidate?

Consolidation
doesn’t only have to be by merger. One can consolidate mindsets, expertise,
people, teams, functions, technology, markets, HR, brand building, finance and
accounts, administration and various other aspects which can make the
professional services firms nimble-footed and adaptable to change and growth.

 

(II) GETTING STARTED

It is also not lost
on any of us that coming together for a common client or referred client may be
a good way to get started.

 

For example:

When there is a
referred client, where a professional refers some matter to another
professional, although the other professional will be the primary service
provider, the referring professional should contribute actively by providing
the background knowledge on the basis of his / her experience and the
relationship aspects of dealing with the client, so that the other professional
can benefit from the referring partner’s experience and expertise.

 

If this is
addressed in a manner which is sufficiently engaging, powerful, organised and
delivered in a properly thought through manner, then you have the right
prerequisites for a successful consolidation.

 

The thesis is that
enthusiastic collaboration is a vital ingredient and a prerequisite for
sustained, organised growth. I have no doubt that professional services firms
will pursue the above with a lot of enthusiasm and momentum once a road-map is
given and a framework is created.

 

 

(III) MODELS OF CONSOLIDATION

 

(A) Referral
model

This is a simple,
‘start with’ model. ABC & Co has a client to whom it is providing audit and
tax services. The client needs MIS services. Given that ABC & Co is an
auditor, it may not be able to provide MIS services as then the firm may no
longer be independent. So, ABC contacts XYZ & Co and refers the client’s
MIS work. XYZ delivers and invoices fees.

 

XYZ will in turn
ensure that it will not pitch for any other services to the client. If the
client comes for any other work, it will get referred back to ABC. This is an
unwritten code that is based on trust.

 

If this is done
well, trust develops and this lays the ground for both firms to collaborate. If
XYZ ever crosses the line, ABC will not work with XYZ in the future. That
itself is a good deterrent in this model.

 

The code of conduct
and rules of professional engagement may prohibit payment of referral fees and
this needs to be respected.

 

(B) Preferred
partner model

This is an
extension of the referral model, where ABC and XYZ consider each other as
preferred firms to collaborate with. If ever there is work coming to ABC which
it cannot deliver, ABC will refer it to XYZ as the firm of first choice.

 

Conversely, XYZ
will refer work to ABC for any engagement where it needs help / support. In
this model again, it is a very clear way of supporting each other in such a way
that the sanctity of the preferred firm model is maintained.

 

There could be
exceptions where XYZ is not able to service a client of ABC, in which case ABC
is obviously free to choose any other firm.

 

(C) Associate
firm model

An associate firm by definition is a form of membership where
like-minded firms agree to come together under a common association and agree
to abide by the principles and rules of working under a larger umbrella. The
associate firm continues to work under its own brand and will not need to
change its constitution nor its key areas of work.

 

The associate firm
agrees to collaborate with other member firms in a manner that encompasses the
referral model and the preferred partner model with more formalised meetings,
exchange of knowledge, use of resources, common marketing collaterals and a
greater speed of response and alignment.

 

The associate firm
model has been in existence for many years and has proved to be a very credible
alternative to the member firm model and the network model. The biggest
difference is that members are free to continue their own brands and they have
far more independence in what they choose to do or not to do, including the
choice of work, business areas, office locations, client servicing and choice
of sharing of information.

 

Effectively, there
are no compulsions and there are no territorial restrictions. Each firm is free
to expand into any territory and is free to conduct or practice any service
area without any pre-approval or without worrying about a centrally
administered bureaucratic process.

 

The main
disadvantage of an associate model is that it may not always be tightly
integrated and associate firms can choose not to fall in line citing whatever
compulsions they face and there is very little that other firms can do.

 

(D) Network
model

A network model is
one of the best ways to grow professional practices. Each firm is a member of a
global network or a national or regional network, using a common brand, using
common tools and having signed a member firm agreement which binds them with
the central leadership, a common partner pool and, most importantly, a common
identity.

 

Indeed, over a
century it has been proven that the network model has the ability to grow the
fastest and to become the largest amongst all prevalent models of
collaborations amongst professional services firms.

 

In a network, the
biggest consideration is giving up one’s brand where the professional services
firm agrees to use the international brand or the national or regional brand
and accepts that its own brand will play second fiddle. All marketing
collaterals and service delivery are under the common brand; except where
regulations may not permit a foreign brand. In such cases, the network pushes
for alternate options and finds a way to co-exist within the rules.

 

In a network model,
member firms are often guided by common rules of engagement. Conduct of shared
work, sharing of knowledge, territorial restrictions, respect for an office,
its location and its territorial boundaries, firm-wide dissemination of
developments and a governance structure where partners align with the central
leadership form the daily core of network firms’ activities.

 

Whilst there are
several perceived disadvantages such as loss of one’s own brand, the associated
loss of identity and integration into common practices which one may take some
time to evolve, understand and add up to, the network model has stood the test
of time. It has proven and validated the concept of ‘collaborate to grow
manifold’ and critics have accepted the formal network models.

 

(E) Merger model

In a merger model,
the referral firms, the associate firms, the preferred partner firms and the
network firms effectively amalgamate into a single firm with a single bank
account. Effectively, one is ‘all in’. That means it is truly a ‘one firm,
firm’ and partners can grow or not grow driven by the collective performance of
the larger firm. There are no real silos, there are no individual mindsets, nor
any individual practices.

 

Each partner works
for the larger collective firm under the belief that as long as one is
contributing to his or her best abilities, the larger collective will grow. As a
partner, I am benefiting from the expertise and the common delivery processes
of the firm.

 

In a merger
situation, the rules of the game are very different and may appear overwhelming
to start with. One should get into a merger only after detailed due diligence
and after a few years of working together with one of the above models. It is
like a marriage; there are sacrifices to be made, there are positions to be
gone away from and yet there’s the harmony and beauty of the collective.

 

A partner may not
need to be spending time on areas outside of his or her core focus. What it
does is provide partners with adequate time to build, consolidate and grow.
Focus on service areas, with administrative or functional work percolating down
to the teams, is a positive outcome.

 

(IV) Road-map for consolidation

 

Having looked at
the various models of consolidation, it is now time to look at the execution
road-map for consolidation:

 

(i) Each firm
should identify its own skill sets, expertise, specialisation and the firm’s
USP. Clarity of expertise and USP is critical.

 

(ii) The objective of the collaboration should be
very well defined. What are we trying to achieve? Is it growth of revenue,
growth of profitability, growth of skill sets, working with the best minds,
professional growth, sharing of knowledge, newer geographies, recognition of
the changing market place and demands of the client? Clarity on the objective
is very critical. Often, in the haste of coming together, the main objective is
forgotten. That’s to be avoided at all costs.

 

(iii) Once the firm
is clear on who is best at practising a particular area, the automatic next
step will be to have one or two partners from each of the firms to collaborate
intensely and with the purpose of achieving a target of identifying a few
like-minded yet unique firms to integrate with. These one or two partners have
the responsibility of ensuring that the objectives of the collaboration are
fulfilled.

 

(iv) One of the
better ways to start is by working together on actual projects. That normally
provides a good way to get an insight into the other firms. It also provides an
easy and operational way to get to know the practices and processes of other
firms. Taking the first baby steps is important.

 

(v) Once some early success is seen, the
foremost assumption that all partners are aligned for collective growth will be
tested. It will be hard for partners to sit on the fence. Thus the acceptance
of a preferred firm model or even an associate firm model will not be too
challenging. Keep moving forward to a point where trust is created and
enhanced. Each model should be given adequate chance to work and succeed. At
some point, an associate firm model can give way to a network firm model.

 

(vi) The partners
leading this initiative for their firms have to be at it. It’s a constant
effort. Take small steps but keep moving forward. It won’t get done overnight.
But achieving small successes will pave the way for larger integration. If all
cylinders are aligned, the practices will see merit in a merger and move
towards a one firm, firm model.

 

CONCLUSION

It is no longer
okay to continue the status quo. During Covid-19, survival itself is
akin to growth. But, what next? Perhaps, it is time to understand and
introspect. It is time to move forward from working as disaggregated practices.
It is time to work together. It is time to consolidate.

EXCEL IN WHAT YOU DO – SOME PERSONAL TIPS

I covered some
perspectives on Business Excellence in my previous article1.
In this one, I will share the flavour of Personal Excellence. Often, we
hear people say, ‘follow your heart, pursue your passion, and you will excel’.
How true! That is indeed the way to go. Not only will this lead us seamlessly
on the path of excellence but we will also be happy and derive great
satisfaction. Volumes have been written on how to turn your passion into your
vocation. There are distinguished role models, too, such as Walt Disney, Warren
Buffett and Steve Jobs. If you have cracked this code, great! And perhaps I may
not have anything meaningful to add here.

 

However, life
is not always so simple. Let’s take two viewpoints:

a) Firstly, do
I know what I am passionate about? If yes, how do I make this my true calling?

b) And if this
does not seem doable at least in the foreseeable future, what do I do to excel
in my chosen path and be happy?

 

The
growing up years

A child growing
up gets fascinated about multiple things she gets to see, experience or be
impacted by. These come from various quarters – parents, siblings, relatives,
friends, the larger eco-system, television, movies, media, books, success,
appreciation and, of course, now, the internet. Resulting from these,
impressions get formed in the mind of what she would love to do. It is common
for relatives and well-wishers to ask a child ‘Beta, what do you want to
become when you grow up?’ Innocently, children give impromptu answers
which vary across professions – a teacher, a pilot, a judge, a scientist, a
doctor, an environmentalist, an actor, a hotelier, a police officer, an
astronaut and so on. These turn out to be casual conversations and are not
followed through in establishing the real passion or any planning for it. If it
is not a clichéd vocation, some other questions prop up, e.g., will it provide
economic stability? And what about social acceptance? These and more come in
the way of a child moving in the desired direction.

 

Traditionally,
we have grown up looking at set patterns. The preference is for the science
stream in the senior school curriculum; perhaps this gives the option to switch
later, whereas vice versa is not done. Conventionally, children pursuing
education find themselves propelled towards a closed ABCDE option, that is,
choose between becoming a (chartered) Accountant, (lawyer) Barrister,
Civil services, Doctor or Engineer. Peer pressure has an
influence and in some cultures youngsters are expected to follow the
family tradition, business or profession. It is not uncommon to find a family
of lawyers, Chartered Accountants, doctors or business people to encourage their
kith and kin to follow the family vocation. But the times have changed now. One
could start up in any field from A to Z and be successful. The critical success
factor is personal excellence.

 

At work

Fast forward
now to life where one has chosen to follow a selected path. By this time, there
could be a growing realisation that our interests lie elsewhere. Sometimes we
may not even feel deeply about this, as daily life gets demanding and time
whizzes by. A simple exercise can be tried out for identifying areas of keen
interest, by connecting the desires with skills as illustrated below (Figure
1)
.

 

 

In the above
matrix, we aim to position the areas which bring us little or immense enjoyment
vis-à-vis the qualities intrinsic / developed in the person. Every
individual has unique qualities or areas where s/he is strong or most confident
about. Not only is it important to recognise these, but also necessary to play
to these strong qualities as we go about life. It is also quite possible to
convert areas which need to improve into strengths in the spheres that one
enjoys doing. This, however, is an arduous task or a journey which needs to be
pondered about.

 

Leveraging
one’s strengths can lead to multiple options and the sweet spot lies in
utilising these in the work area/s which give the most gratification. Such
item/s, which depict confluence of desires and skills indicated in the green
shaded quadrant, will be areas that the person is passionate about and would
derive greatest satisfaction and joy. This ensures that there is a connect
between the enjoyable areas and the required qualities which are necessary to
excel. For example, a person with a feeble voice is unlikely to excel as a
professional singer and his love for music is best kept listening or singing as
a hobby for private enjoyment.

 

Consider cases where people are keen to
undertake this journey but quite some distance away in getting to convert their
passion into their life purpose. In the foreseeable future, one will therefore
want to excel in the selected sphere of work. In this journey towards personal
excellence
in the chosen engagement, here are some specific tips on actions
or paths that one could find helpful.

 

GET THE BIG PICTURE

It is important
to comprehend the larger purpose of the activity / function / enterprise that
one is working with. While the day job would be focusing on the nitty-gritty,
the true enjoyment will come from the understanding and the joy of relating to
the higher-level goal. The classic example is of the mason building a mansion,
feeling the pride of building a marvel, while his daily routine may comprise
mundane activities such as laying bricks with cement for a wall.

 

I have found
great power in communicating this across the organisation so as to touch every
person down the line on the firm’s purpose and facilitate individual connect
and alignment. An impactful way of achieving this is depicted in Figure 2.

 

 

 

While every employee may be clear on their
individual Goals or Key Result Areas (KRAs), this process enables an individual to connect these to the overall organisation purpose.
This whole process executed well is a co-created one involving every person in
the organisation as well as with inputs from key stakeholders. Very briefly
explained, it begins with the organisation’s purpose, the Vision, Mission and Values which are translated
to a Strategic Vision and articulated in a clear, concise manner. Every year,
the Enterprise Balanced Scorecard2 is made which defines the
Strategic Themes and the key Strategic Interventions across four perspectives –
Financial, Customer, Internal Processes and Learning and Growth. These are
cascaded into departmental or functional Strategy Deployment matrices which are
then detailed out into key projects which will deliver the objectives. Every
employee then who is linked to projects is able to derive individual goals for
setting the year’s priorities. At every level there is a linkage to the
relevant processes with the KRAs most aligned to the Level-3 processes. This
way there is a structured alignment amongst individual, departmental, business
and enterprise goals and finely integrated so that the entire organisation
pulls in one direction. At every stage and interval there is a two-way
communication which is the bedrock of a robust cohesive enterprise.

 

If this process
is not practised in a mature manner, I would suggest that every individual
takes the lead to ascertain this linkage. Like the mason who takes pride in
laying every brick knowing that he is an integral part of creating a wonder,
every individual would then discover a different meaning to their daily routine
which otherwise may seem dreary.

 

CRAFT A PERSONAL &
PROFESSIONAL GOAL

Equally
important will be to set one’s personal goals. These can be broadly set into
short-term and long-term goals. Like the Balanced Scorecard done in businesses
as referred to above, it may be worthwhile to also cast a personal scorecard.
The perspectives, however, could be different:

 

(i) Work: What do I wish to achieve on the work
front? Where do I wish to see myself in five to ten years’ time?

(ii) Self: How do I look at improving self over
time? One could consider different aspects such as Health, Finance, Hobby,
Skill-Building, Me-Time and so on.

(iii)
Family:
What are the
various aspects around my immediate and extended family I want to focus on?
Again, it could range from Health to Property to Relationships to Marriage to
Friends.

(iv)
Community:
How can I
contribute to and engage myself for the larger good? With companies engaging in
meaningful CSR activities, it is quite easy to volunteer; as also in this
well-connected world there are many options available for one to venture out
for a greater purpose.

 

A rounded and
clearer work-life covering the above enhances one’s life’s journey. In all of
the above, the word Balanced may imply that there is equal weightage
given for all the perspectives. While this could be ideal, typically, depending
on one’s needs and stage in life, the weightages can vary. But what must be
borne in mind is that there must be some focus given to each of the four
perspectives.

 

SHARPEN ONE AREA – BE KNOWN FOR EXPERTISE IN YOUR AREA OF
STRENGTH

Choose one area
and let it be the one which is of interest to you and you enjoy digging deeper
into it. Of course, it should be important to your role and business, e.g.,
GST. Make a conscious effort to develop expertise in that area, so much so that
you begin to be known as the domain expert in that within your team and
enterprise. Furthermore, keep re-skilling yourself in this area so that you
move ahead with the times. By itself, this will open several doors for your
life’s journey.

 

PICK ONE AREA WHICH IS BOSS’S KEY BUT DESERVES ATTENTION

While it is
imperative that one understands one’s own role thoroughly and does a good job,
it is important to have a broader appreciation of seniors’ roles, in particular
that of the supervisor. It is the desire of every superior to have a deputy
whom he can trust with some critical areas of work; if you can identify one
aspect where you can do a decent job which your supervisor does not have much
inclination for, it is a winner. Not only would you be executing some critical
component of the supervisor’s role, but also be acknowledged for doing it
better. Boss will begin to recognise your potential for taking up higher
responsibilities. Work will take an interesting turn and you will equip
yourself steadily to launch yourself up the ladder.

 

REINVENT YOURSELF

To make your
job interesting, it is not always necessary to switch. Make a conscious effort
to bring newness into your job. There needs to be a mindful endeavour to
evaluate and improve in a consistent way. If that becomes your way of life, you
will not only see that your job is not really monotonous but also feel it
differently over time. Every period in the role will be different albeit
in the same job. For this process I have found Benchmarking with peers
or the best-in-class a good way to go. This opens up the mind on how others are
progressing and going about things which can be emulated. In today’s times, the
not invented here mindset has no place, and in fact people
copy with pride. Obviously, this is not about infringing patents but
getting inspired from best practices in the public domain as well as learning
from others’ mistakes. The trend today is at the next level of open
innovation
whereby you could put your issues out there for any expert to
opine and help you with innovative ideas.

 

PREPARE YOUR EXIT

An important
element in making progress is paving the way for moving forward while excelling
in the current role at the same time. Here, both the elements of making oneself
ready for the next superior role as well as grooming the successor are important.
Without this approach, one may find oneself getting stuck in one role or area,
thereby bringing in drudgery and stagnation over time.

 

Personal
excellence, a perspective

Let me conclude
with a stirring narrative. There are several inspiring examples on personal
excellence
from the Silicon Valley, Fortune 500 Companies, Global Leaders,
Startups or Nobel Laureates, but I chose one from Bollywood – Kishore
Kumar! (Disclaimer: I am a die-hard Kishoreda fan).

 

Writer Javed
Akhtar3 opines that personal excellence is driven by striving
for next-level performance for one’s own fulfilment and not just for proving it
to others. He recalls an incident. R.D. Burman (Panchamda) hummed a
song, Mere naina saawan bhaadhon (film Mehbooba) which he had
composed based on Raag Sivaranjini. Listening to the tune, Kishoreda
reacted, saying this was meant for Manna Dey. But after some convincing he
agreed to sing; however, he told Panchamda: ‘Isn’t Latabai also
singing this? Do that, I will sing later’. His recording was deferred and Lata
Mangeshkar rendered it first.

 

Kishoreda
heard this version and practised continuously for seven days! He added his
touch, to make it one of his finest renditions that is cherished to this day.
What is noteworthy is that Kishoreda was at his career peak at that time
and need not have put in such a punitive effort. It would have been a hit
number anyway. But the humility, self-confidence, commitment and the
determination to excel stand out and perhaps this personal excellence
attribute of Kishoreda makes him stand tall amongst the few shining
stars widely remembered in Bollywood even today after so many decades.

 

ENDNOTE

There is no
perfect occupation, no right time. Just waiting for this to happen may end up
being quite expensive.

 

The specific
steps enunciated above consciously nurtured will rekindle interest in your
selected path and result in better appreciation and recognition. Who knows, as
you make progress the current engagement itself could become the area you excel
in and turn into your passion.

 

Is it one way
or the other? Certainly not. While progressing on the selected path, you can
and should also pursue your passion. How do you do this? People often say ‘my
work is so demanding; I have other pressures… I must get some key priorities
in order, and then I will switch to what I love doing’. Unfortunately, this is
a never-ending process and waiting for the perfect time can mean that you are
endlessly in a restive mode. So, do allocate some time outside of work to
follow your passion, whatever it may be. This may challenge your work-life
balance, and could mean doing it in personal space over weekends and holidays.
But in due time satisfaction is bound to come and could even create the
platform for a switch.

 

So, dream your
passion and… realise your dream!

 

References:

 

1. Governance
& Internal Controls: The Touchstone of Sustainable Business – Part II
;
Pp 11-15 BCAJ, June, 2020;

2. The
Balanced Scorecard: Translating Strategy into Action
by David P. Norton and
Robert S. Kaplan;

3. https://youtu.be/U6L8hnsNMak (16:10 – 20:05): Javed Akhtar
remembers Magical Pancham
– Part 02.

 

WORKING CAPITAL CHALLENGES FOR CA FIRMS IN COVID TIMES

Historically, in India Chartered Accountants
have practised as proprietary concerns or partnership firms. But since the
introduction of the Limited Liability Partnership Act (LLP) and the permission
of the ICAI for Chartered Accountants to practise as LLPs, many members of the
Institute in practice have either formed LLPs or have converted their
partnership firms into LLPs. Most of the Chartered Accountant practising units
(the firms) were small or of medium size and their working capital needs were
fully taken care of by funding from the partners and the retained profits.

 

As the size of many of these firms grew and
the number of partners increased, they started needing more space to operate.
Given that the investment for purchase of office premises, especially in
metropolitan cities, was high, many firms started using rented premises.
Furnishing of these offices was carried out using partners’ capital and
borrowing from banks and other lenders. In many cases, the purchase of vehicles
was also done by borrowing from banks or from Non-Banking Finance Companies
(NBFCs). Most of the firms hardly needed to borrow for their working capital as
their income was in the nature of service income being generated from a number
of clients and spread uniformly. Borrowing for office premises, furniture,
equipment or vehicles was common but if a firm borrowed for working capital
needs, it could have been an indication that either the proprietor or one or
more of the partners had overdrawn their capital.

 

REVENUE CYCLE TURNS
CYCLICAL:
With the mandate to compulsorily follow
the fiscal year by the government, the revenue cycle of Chartered Accountant
firms also became somewhat cyclical. The major part of the work is required to
be performed between April and November and the major billing starts happening
between May and December every year. This has resulted in a majority of the annual
cash inflow of the firms coming in during the second and third quarter of a
financial year. Generally, the months of February, March and April are ‘dry’
with regard to billing and recovery of funds. This results in low liquidity in
firms after the payment of advance taxes in March, which lasts till the end of
May / June, depending on the practice areas of the firms. However, the firms
are conscious about this unevenness of the fund flow and they accumulate the
required cash during the peak work season to pay for taxes as well as expenses
in the lean months. This discipline keeps most of the firms away from borrowing
for working capital.

 

However, Covid-19 has changed the scenario
for firms and even the individual practices of professionals. The lockdown,
starting from 25th March, 2020, potentially has serious
repercussions on the working capital of firms. Most of the firms are cushioned
until the month of May as they have provided for low recoveries in the
beginning of the year as usual. However, due to postponement of the due date of
completion of audits, tax audits and filing of various returns, the billings
are getting postponed by at least two to three months. Further, most of the
clients may not be able to pay the expected fees promptly due to the squeeze on
their working capital and profitability on account of the prolonged lockdown.
Small businesses are suffering due to temporary closures and a steep fall in
demand. The competition from online suppliers and from certain larger
suppliers, who can manage the logistics of home delivery, has further eroded
their business.

 

FATE OF SMALL-SCALE
MANUFACTURERS:
The fate of small-scale
manufacturers is no different. This has substantially affected the capacity of
small clients to pay fees to their chartered accountants, though generally
their fees are cleared promptly. The larger businesses in key sectors have also
suffered due to the lockdown and this may result in delay in payment of the
bills of the firms. The clients will use their funds primarily for their
business priorities before allocating them to payments for services such as
those of chartered accountants. This is likely to result in delayed recovery of
fees, and in some cases even bad debts. It is likely that as in many other
businesses or professions, the F.Y. 2020-21 is likely to be tough for chartered
accountants in practice.

 

The delay in recovery of fees and some
recoveries turning doubtful can cause strain not only on the profitability of
the firms but also on their working capital. The laws have not reduced any
compliances or any complications but many due dates are deferred due to the
lockdown. Therefore, the same volume of services needs to be delivered by the
firms to the client, though with extended deadlines. This scenario will keep
the expenditure of the firms at the same level as that of the earlier years, as
they will not be able to get their work done with fewer man-hours or overheads,
unless well-directed efforts are made in that direction. However, income for
the firms may come down and be likely to be recovered late. This may result in
a major working capital gap for the firms, especially between the months of
June and December.

 

It appears for now that the need of working
capital will be temporary in nature. The squeeze may last the current financial
year with the possibility of spilling over to the next year. Generally, the
need of working capital augmentation should be around 50% of the annual
expenditure of the firm, though in many cases depending upon the size and
practice areas, an amount equal to 25-30% of such expenditure should allow the
firm to sail through smoothly. This is so mainly because the lag of billing and
recovery is likely to be around three to four months but in
case of some firms it can extend to six months. The working capital of firms
can be augmented from the following sources:

 

BORROWING FROM THE
PARTNERS:
This is the simplest way of raising
working capital if one or more partners are willing to contribute the required
amount. Interest can be paid to such contributing partners based on the
partnership agreement, or based on the prevailing bank rate, or as mutually
agreed by the partners. It may also be possible to borrow against the fixed
deposits of the partners from banks if facilitated by one or more partners.
Such an arrangement can result in low interest cost and it may prevent
disturbing the personal finances of the partners. The partners may also agree
to bring deposits from their family members or even from friends which may be
interest-bearing or interest-free, based on the mutual agreement between the
partners.

 

BORROWING FROM
BANKS:
Most of the banks are willing to extend
working capital facility to Chartered Accountant firms but the question of
security may crop up. Banks are not happy to grant such loans without any
security and it may not be easy for the firm to provide such security because
the firm may not have such acceptable assets and it may not be desirable to
request one or some of the partners to give security of their personal assets.
These borrowings can come under MSME loans and in that case may be subject to a
charge of reduced rate of interest. If the firm already has existing loans
taken for its premises or its furniture and fixtures, it may be possible to
take a top-up loan on the said loan, with accelerated equal monthly
instalments, or by increasing the term of the loan. In such a case, the
security remains the same and the documentation can be quick and easy. While
borrowing from banks it is essential to keep in mind that the borrowing should
be done just in time to reduce the interest liability. The working capital need
is not going to be front-loaded and it will be consumed month after month for
monthly expenses. Therefore, a staggered drawing of the loan amount would be
more desirable as against securing an upfront term loan.

 

BORROWING FROM
NBFCs:
Non-Banking Finance Companies can be a good
source of borrowing for the short-term working capital needs of a firm. A loan
from an NBFC is generally more expensive than that from a bank, but it can be
procured faster with fewer formalities. Similarly, partners can negotiate and
combine their individual unsecured borrowing limits into the borrowing limit of
the firm, but such a loan will attract personal guarantees of all the partners.
Borrowing against security of assets can be much easier if a firm or its
partners can offer the same. Such an arrangement can be made with an
appropriate understanding between the partners. As the expected working capital
requirement is for a short term, in case of insistence of security by the
lender, it is advisable to grant security of moveable properties, which can be
pledged faster and at less cost as compared to an immoveable property.

 

USE OF CREDIT
CARDS:
A firm can use credit cards of the firm or
those of its partners for making various payments for utilities, telephone
bills, stationeries, books, etc. Though these expenses do not make up the major
working capital needs of a firm, they can partially mitigate the working
capital gap. When the working capital cycle improves, the firm can repay the
credit outstanding along with interest. It should be kept in mind that funding
from credit cards is the easiest, but it is one of the most expensive avenues.
Further, credit card liability would have to be paid in instalments as per the
terms of the credit card and delays can attract substantial penal charges and
can also affect the CIBIL rating of the card-holder.

 

REDUCING,
STAGGERING OR POSTPONING WITHDRAWALS BY PARTNERS:

In most of the firms, partners draw fixed amounts every month to meet their
normal expenses. The excess credit balance in their capital account is drawn
either towards the end of the year or at the beginning of the following year.
Though it is difficult to get back the money paid earlier to the partners as
such amount may be invested, committed or spent, the partners can agree to not
draw their normal drawings for a few months, or draw lower amounts for those
months so as to conserve the working capital of the firm. Such an arrangement
does not change the profit share of the partners but it does postpone the
outflow of funds from the firm. This arrangement can help the firm to partly
cover its working capital gap.

 

POSTPONING PART
SALARIES OF SENIOR STAFF:
The partners of a firm
can also make arrangements with senior staff of the firm who are drawing
salaries above a certain threshold, to defer a part of the salary payments for
a certain period to overcome the working capital gap. The arrangement can be different
from employee to employee. They should take appropriate care of the minimum
monthly needs of the employees, including their respective loan instalments. In
the current times of lockdown and gradual unlocking, the actual expenditure of
many people has reduced because there are fewer avenues for meaningful
spending. People are also in the mood to save as the future remains uncertain.
Therefore, this type of arrangement may not be out of place. Further, in case
of specific needs of an employee, some flexibility or modifications in the
payment schedule can be made by the partners of the firm.

 

DEFERMENT OF BONUS
FOR THE YEAR:
Many firms give an annual bonus at
the time of Diwali. It is possible that the financials of the firms at this
year’s Diwali may not be strong enough to pay out a large amount as annual
bonus. This difficulty can be overcome by partly or fully deferring the bonus
payment till the end of the financial year, by which time the finances of the
firms are likely to improve. Such a deferment can only give partial relief to
the firm by reducing its working capital gap at a crucial time.

 

RECEIVING FEES IN
ADVANCE FROM SOME CLIENTS:
A firm can also request
a few large net worth clients or companies to pay their fees in advance, or
grant an advance against future billings. The long-standing clients of a firm
with good liquidity may be able and willing to oblige. However, such advances
should be avoided from audit clients – and the provisions of the Companies Act
and the Code of Ethics of the ICAI should be properly observed. While taking
such advances, GST repercussions may also be considered.

The Covid-19 pandemic has raised several
issues related not only to the physical and mental well-being of people, but
also related to the financial stability of individuals, businesses, companies
and even the government. The financial planning of many individuals and
families has suffered a serious setback and nobody has a clear answer as to
when things will improve. In the current situation, the Chartered Accountant
professionals are comparatively more protected as the major part of their
revenue is earned out of statutory compliances that have not been done away
with.

 

Medical professionals are working very hard
and they can expect their finances to remain steady as their services are in
high demand. However, other professionals providing legal, architectural,
engineering, designing services, etc. may have much more serious working
capital problems as compared to a firm of chartered accountants. Their mismatch
of working capital may not get resolved by the end of the current financial
year and it may take longer to get back on track. Such professionals and their
firms will need to secure long-term working capital arrangements from banks or
NBFCs to tide over their needs, unless the partners can make up the deficit in
the working capital by capital induction or otherwise.

 

Undoubtedly, Covid-19 has caused and is
going to cause even further disruption in our professional activities. It may
cause a turnover of the staff as many may prefer to work at places as near as
possible to their homes. Senior staff may be ready to take temporary reductions
in their take-home salaries. Clients are likely to feel the pinch in their
businesses and requests for reduction in fees are going to be very common. The
work volume may not be reduced at least during F.Y. 2020-21 as most of us will
be working on the transactions of the clients entered into in F.Y. 2019-20,
which were at normal levels. The request for lower fees may continue for one
more year as the turnover and activities of F.Y. 2020-21 are likely to be on
the lower side as compared to the previous year. So the pain is likely to last
for a couple of years for our profession. In the given circumstances, our
profession needs to rationalise and control costs and stand by our clients
gracefully, accepting reduction of fees in deserving cases. This will result in
a lower bottom line for the profession, but the gesture may go a long way with
the client.

 

The times are
unprecedented, tough and full of uncertainties. In such times, innovation,
caution and thrift will go a long way to take the professionals out of the
crisis, physically, mentally and financially, without much damage. 

SELF-QUARANTINE YOUR MIND WHILST ‘WORKING FROM HOME’

Uncertain times call for decisive
actions, and decisions need to be taken at a much quicker pace than one would
do in the normal course. Both data points and market news point to a
catastrophe with the coronavirus (COVID-19) outbreak; there are public health
challenges confronting the leaderships of several countries and nearly all
businesses at large. As leaders of professional service firms, how we respond to
the challenges will largely drive our respective firms’ growth and positioning
in the market and ensure that our teams and the communities around us remain
safe and healthy. As part of a functioning society, the question to ask is:
have we done our bit as a responsible firm and as a responsible professional?

 

Increasingly, either by safety
concerns or by regulatory enforcement, most firms have already grounded their
teams to a partial or a complete work from home (WFH) mode, or are in the
process of doing so. By definition, WFH means that one needs to be working from
one’s confines and not be ‘surrounded’ by people. This also means that teams
will need to be effective in their pursuits whilst working from home.
Can we therefore practice quarantine in its truest form, i.e., meditation,
which is nothing but quarantine of the mind, and to think better? Aligning
one’s mindset to WFH needs practice and some good refreshing ideas.

 

TECHNOLOGY

Here are some thoughts on increasing
effectiveness during these WFH times.

Imagine a situation where you are
not allowed to access your office servers or data files for a prolonged period of time.

(i) How
will you conduct your professional engagements?

(ii) How will you discharge your tax and regulatory compliance obligations?

(iii) How will you ensure data protection and exchange of client
information without running the risk of privacy breach, or confidentiality
invasions?

 

Using cloud technology has
never been more needed than in today’s times.

Experts have long argued for
cloud-based systems to address efficiencies that help in remote working and
active collaboration. Hosting your data on the cloud and having virtual
desktops seems to be the right way to think. A lot of products are available in
the market for cloud servers, right from IBM to Alibaba Cloud and a host of
local service providers.

 

Collaboration and conferencing tools
such as Zoom, Google Meet, Skype and Microsoft Teams and many others allow
teams sitting remotely to interact with each other on a real-time basis,
without having the need to meet physically.

 

Technology
is all-pervasive and, during such times when we have no choice, the adversities
bring out solutions that help firms to adapt and align their practices to be
benchmarked to global standards. It may need a change in mindset and a
commitment to unlearn and relearn, but in the end it is all worth the while.
Imagine, if everything you can do in your physical office is now available in
the comfort of your homes and your teams don’t have to commute or travel for
getting their work done, the additional productivity would mean that so much
more work can be accomplished.

 

Traditional VPN-based models may
also be effective with static IPs. There could be challenges of too many people
trying to access the network at the same time and resultant delays and output.
For this, Microsoft Office 365 itself provides a host of applications.

 

ROBUST PROCESSES

Of course, you may explore any
technology that works for the firm. Being smart about it and investing the
right mind space and resources in technology usage will yield good dividends
for the practice in times to come, much beyond the WFH period.

When a firm is adopting WFH, one of
the key elements to a successful strategy is to ensure that it has robust
processes in place for exchange of information, planning for an engagement,
conduct of fieldwork, review of work performed by the team members and final
delivery of an engagement. Processes should include the following:

(a) Planning
for remote working, rules and to-do’s: HR teams should send out early
notifications of what teams should do whilst a WFH is in place;

(b) The
fieldwork stage of engagements during WFH would mean that you are not monitored
at every step, nor can you expect to reach out for assistance ‘on call’. You
will have to brace for individual efforts much more than what you are normally
accustomed to in a team environment. This calls for processes for increasing
individual performance such as:

(1) Planning
the day for specific and achievable goals and targets whilst having to WFH;

(2) Prioritisation
of what comes first and focusing on the task at hand;

(3) Organising
conference calls with the team lead / manager to ensure that you have a
sign-off on the work you are performing;

(4) Challenging
your abilities to work individually by extensive reading and applying your
knowledge to a given client solution;

(5) Writing
down areas of the work product that need a review during the collaborative
phase of the day;

(6) Scheduling
those reviews such that the time spent is optimised without impairing the
manager’s schedule for his / her own tasks of the day.

 

DATA PRIVACY AND CONFIDENTIALITY

Quite often, firms have got into
trouble for breach of data, data leakages, confidentiality breaches and similar
violations, mostly inadvertently and something that is discovered much later in
the day. Clients have strict clauses and firms have an obligation to protect
client data as much as the firm’s own data.

 

How do you do it? The first
step is to sensitise team members to your data privacy and your confidentiality
policies. These would have pre-existed the current catastrophe in most firms.
For firms where these policies were not well articulated, now is the time to do
it.

 

The next step is to ensure that
these policies are implemented.
Get the best minds in the firm to work on
these. Give them the tools they need to achieve 100% compliance to standards
such as GDPR. Encourage them to benchmark best practices from the market. Get
outside technical help as and when necessary.

 

Clients don’t like any of their
stuff to be discussed or leaked outside. They will sue for breaches. They will
fire your firm if it is found guilty of violation. You may end up losing an
account if motives are ascribed. This has happened in a public company in India
in 2019. There are many past instances of data breaches.

 

And finally, ensure that these
actions are monitored
and a monthly review is undertaken to make course
corrections when needed. There are current standards in place and there will be
stricter norms prescribed; the firms need to take this very seriously.

 

TEAM ALIGNMENT

Getting
your teams ready and with a mindset to work from home is all about alignment.
Just like when you are forced to sit at home to prepare for an event or to run
an errand, when professionals have to sit at home and think about delivery of
work, there could be an initial mental block. That’s where the mindset to be
effective has to be upper-most. There will be challenges and this is when the
firm’s leaders, HR teams and technology champions all have to collaborate and
communicate constantly, to reassure the teams to be in alignment at all times.
A help-desk should be established to mentor and guide the team members with
answers to their questions. When team members know who to turn to for help,
half the crisis is solved.

 

It is the firm’s leadership’s job to
set the tone on alignment during WFH. It is the manager’s job to monitor
execution. It is the team member’s job to ensure that he gives his all to be in
alignment for achieving effective results.

 

REFLECT ON PAST LEARNINGS

Reflect on past learnings, on what
lies ahead and channelize available time into research.

(A)   What lies ahead:

(i) Firms
will need to reorient their processes;

(ii) Setting
billing goals, with billable hours for advisory engagements;

(iii) Setting goals on completing specific audit areas for the day, along
with conducting audit steps / audit procedures as needed;

(iv) Tax teams will need to think about aspects of their engagements that
will need discussions and use online databases to good effect;

(v) Firms
will need to communicate with clients to expect disruptions in delivery and to
convey the firm’s preparedness;

(vi) How will the firm want to appear before its clients?

(vii) How can you increase your effectiveness in such a situation?


(B)   Past learnings:

We
have all had our fair share of experiences with managing crises, managing
turbulent times, managing stressful clients, facing challenging times and so
on. Can we put that to good effect when we are designing our WFH days?

(a)
What does the market want?

(b)
What does the client expect?

(c)
Is the firm equipped to service the
client?

(d)
What needs to change?

(e)
What will I do to make a difference?

(f) What will my partners need to do to
achieve the results we seek?

 

(C)   Research:

Can we self-quarantine our mind
whilst at home and focus on some interesting ideas, such as completing projects
that were long conceived but could not be finished:

 (I) That
new product or new service offering?

(II) Video podcasts of strategic insights for clients?

(III) Evolving latest thinking and converting it into frameworks?

(IV) That thought leadership article?

(V) That
white paper on latest developments in your area of expertise (Vivad se
Vishwas, GST interpretations, MLI, etc.
)?

 

But above all we must remember at all times to
stay safe, to stay healthy and to stay effective.

TEAM PERFORMANCE REVIEW IN PROFESSIONAL SERVICE FIRMS

People in professional service firms are
their greatest asset. In that context, we need to ask:

 

(1) Are we doing everything we can to
provide our teams the best of career and personal growth opportunities that
they deserve? (2) Do we spend the necessary time on reviewing our team’s
performance, giving feedback and offering it the mind space and focus that is
necessary?

 

This article is a take on how professional
service firms should review performance, encourage team members to perform
better and reward them for the performance that they deliver for the firm.

 

The Context

Professionals at every stage of their career
are normally inquisitive about their next phase of growth. Sometimes, even
without spending sufficient time on thinking through the roadmap for their
practice area development. It is important for partners to take the onus of
providing leadership, mentorship, guidance and a roadmap to the professionals
in their team so that they are not left scampering without a direction. It is
the obligation of partners and firm leaders to provide a high-quality
environment in which merit and performance are rewarded, apart from offering
experience and seniority. It is binding on the partners to ensure that they
work with the millennials in understanding how they think and work and, through
that understanding, to develop a framework that enables individual development
and provides a career roadmap to the persons involved.

 

GOAL – SETTING


The first step in the process of a
performance review is to ask the question: What do we measure the
performance against?

 

The objective of performance assessment is
served only when team members have clarity of thought and vision. Hence, each
individual in the firm should be provided with written, clear and specific
goals for the upcoming year, clearly highlighting where and how each individual
is supposed to perform. Key performance indicators should also be highlighted.
Effectively, one is developing a scorecard for an individual, relative to the
individual’s capacity and capability to execute and develop on a
mutually-agreed set of goals.

 

So, how does one really set achievable and
measurable goals? Here are five steps that one can consider:

 

  •    The first step in the
    process is to look at the past twelve months and analyse: How did the
    individual perform?
  •    The second is to identify
    the individual’s core strengths and where he/she needs improvement;
  •    The third step is to agree
    upon a process and timeline to streamline those areas which need improvement by
    making actionable plans and which should be discussed with the team members
    threadbare;
  •    Next, the partners must
    identify the roles a team member can play in areas which are relevant and
    critical for the practice in the coming year and incorporate them in the
    scorecard;
  •    The final step is to hold a
    discussion with team members and agree upon mutually acceptable goals and close
    it with documentation.

 

PERFORMANCE REVIEW MECHANISM


Once the goals are set, it is important that
these goals are actually pursued and they get reflected in individual and
team performances.
For this purpose the firm must establish a proper
performance review mechanism. It is not enough to just hold an annual review at
the end of the year – by then, the damage could already have been done. Quarterly
reviews
ensure a gradual step towards improving performance by quicker
admission and follow-up on the areas which need improvement.

 

But how should one go about assessing
employee performance? The process of assessment can be divided into two parts:

    Facilitating self-evaluation, and

    360-degree feedback.

 

The employee must first exercise his own
judgement and rate his performance on the parameters and goals previously set.
He must question himself: Have I worked on my weaknesses? Have I met my
performance targets? What was my contribution to the firm? The employee must
appreciate and be able to see areas that need improvement.

 

External feedback is also necessary to
assess actual performance. The firm’s seniors and reporting managers must
comment on the improvement seen with respect to the pre-decided,
mutually-agreed goals.  At the same time,
feedback should be obtained from the entire eco-system in which the employee is
working. The employer should seek feedback from other team members, juniors and
clients to know how an employee has performed on various fronts. With
concurrent, self, upward, downward and external feedback, the employer now gets
a 360-degree review of the actual performance of the employee. The employer can
now discuss his observations with the employee and jointly decide the areas
which need further improvement.

 

ATTRIBUTES AND MOTIVATION


The key attributes which a leader must focus
on while reviewing performance are integrity, team spirit, attitude, the
individual’s orientation to the firm’s goals and performance management.

 

The attitude of the employees is a very
critical factor driving the performance of the firm. The partner must ensure
that all the employees feel good about what they do and that they perceive the
firm’s growth to be in consonance with their personal development. Such
motivation should also be seen at the team level by having a team-first
attitude.

 

FEEDBACK


Communication is the key to any process. The
way the employer conveys feedback influences the way the feedback would be
perceived.

 

Firstly, the
firm must create a culture where giving and receiving feedback (both positive
and constructive) is the norm. Secondly, acknowledging the importance of the
manner of delivering feedback; the partners must attempt to deliver even
negative feedback in a constructive way. Simple experiences can help us to
learn how to deliver constructive feedback. For instance, recall an experience
in which you were given constructive feedback. Now delve into the reasons why
the experience was positive or negative. What did the giver say or do that made
the experience positive or negative? Work on the areas which made the
experience negative and imbibe the qualities which made the experience
positive. This way, one can provide at least reasonably well-communicated
feedback.

 

Being emphatic and understanding while
providing feedback will ensure greater acceptance and improvement.

 

A PLAN FOR NEXT YEAR


An integral part of the performance review
process is to develop a plan for an individual. Let’s call it an Individual
Development Plan
(IDP). This plan should ensure that the scorecard, the
individual development sheets, and the KPIs, along with the goals, are
documented after a joint discussion between the team member and the partner.
This annual plan will serve as the guiding plan for the next year’s evaluation.

 

The key aspect in completing the IDP and
planning for the season ahead is that the team member’s SWOT analysis should be
conducted and a joint IDP should emerge from it.

 

HAPPY TEAM MEMBER


The process of a performance review is meant
to enhance employee morale and give the firm a chance to evaluate the team
member. It is essential for the partners to understand how the employees
perceive the review process because it will make all the difference.
A
performance review should be thought of as constructive feedback for individual
and organisational development. At the end of the process, the employee
should feel that the review actually contributed to his individual and team
learning.
The best outcome of the review should be that the individual
comes out as a happy team member. Happiness stems from the fact that he/she has
a clear set of goals and a roadmap in mind which is directly in consonance with
his goals and needs.

 

ASPIRATIONAL TEAM MEMBER


Team members should be encouraged by
partners to achieve the highest standards of performance and integrity that
will help them to grow individually and also as a team. Aspirational team
members wish to see themselves ahead from where they were before. They need to
believe they are headed somewhere in life and have a purpose. A performance
review should, therefore, aim at a convergence 
of individual development goals with the organisational goals to provide
value to each individual.

 

MEANINGFUL OUTCOMES


The ultimate objective of a performance
review is to get meaningful outcomes.
Outcomes
don’t just mean improvement in the firm’s revenue and operations. The clear
identification of each team member’s strengths and weaknesses, improvement in
employee efficiency and alignment of the practice goals with the employee goals
is effectively the right step in the right direction. These outcomes are what
constitute a well-rounded and comprehensive performance review mechanism.
Professionals must strive to achieve this consistently.

 

Performance review is a process to help team
members evaluate: How did the year go by? What could he/she have done
differently? What are the learnings carried forward to the next year? While
executing this process, there will be emotional and professional upheavals
which a team member should accept with dignity and grace. Therein lies true
learning for a professional.

 

While all of the above may sound daunting,
is it worth the effort? Totally. 
 

 

HIRING FOR TALENT – PROCESSES AND TECHNOLOGY

If one were to keep processes and technology
aside, then recruitment is all about people – and, guess what? Inherently, most
people are hilarious! Nothing like the pressure of a job interview to bring out
the most awkward, silly and mystifying behaviour in us. So, while we often
celebrate the victories – perfect referrals, nailing your LinkedIn search on
the first try, the candidate saying yes as soon as they are offered the job –
let’s take some time to get to the basics.

 

RECRUITMENT AND
SELECTION

Many a time I have noticed even the best
using recruitment and selection interchangeably. In very simple terms,
recruitment is the process of finding and hiring the best-qualified candidate
(from within or outside of an organisation) for a job opening, in a timely and
cost-effective manner. The recruitment process includes analysing the
requirements of a job, attracting employees to that job, screening and selecting
applicants, hiring and integrating the new employee in the organisation.

 

Hiring for the right talent is incomplete
without a thorough job analysis before recruiting someone and a periodic
job evaluation later. Job analysis is a family of procedures to identify the
content of a job in terms of activities involved and attributes or job
requirements needed to perform the activities. Job analysis provides
information about organisations which helps to determine which employees are
the best fit for specific jobs. Through job analysis, we can understand what
the important tasks of the job are, how they are carried out and the necessary
human qualities needed to complete the job successfully.

 

A job
evaluation
is a
systematic way of determining the value / worth of a job in relation to other
jobs in an organisation. It tries to make a systematic comparison between jobs
to assess their relative worth for the purpose of establishing a rational
pay structure.
 

 

Job evaluation
needs to be differentiated from job analysis. Every job evaluation method
requires at least some basic job analysis in order to provide factual
information about the jobs concerned. Thus, job evaluation begins with job
analysis and ends at that point where the worth of a job is ascertained for
achieving pay equity between jobs and different roles.

 

JOB DESCRIPTION AND
SKILL NEEDS

In the light of changes in environmental
conditions (technology, products, services, etc.), jobs need to be examined
closely. For example, the traditional clerical functions have undergone a rapid
change in sectors like banking, insurance and railways after computerisation.
New job descriptions need to be written and the skill needs of new jobs
need to be duly incorporated in the evaluation process. Otherwise, employees
may feel that all the relevant job factors – based on which their pay has been
determined – have not been evaluated properly.

 

COST OF BAD HIRING

Misrepresentation
is the way employers end up making bad hires. It is not that you go and
deliberately hire the worst candidate. As per a study conducted by global human
resource consultancy CareerBuilder, 88% companies in Russia said they were
affected by bad hiring last year, followed by 87% in Brazil and China, and 84%
in India.

 

The study further said that three in every
ten Indian companies (29%) reported that a single bad hire – someone who turned
out not to be a good fit for the job or did not perform well – cost the company
more than Rs. 20 lakhs (USD 37,150) on an average. Apart from these study results,
there are many other aspects which get affected in an organisation because of a
bad hire, such as productivity, employee morale, increased turnover and the
financial costs of replacement.

 

CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS –
DEMAND VS. SUPPLY

After looking at the generic process and
impacts of hiring right, let’s take a step backward and look at the scenario of
chartered accountant professionals in India.

 

In a country of 125 crore citizens and 6.80
crore taxpayers in 2017-18, close to three lakh CAs serve as the finance
guides. As of 2018, there are 2.90 lakh CAs in India of whom only 1.30 lakhs
are in full-time practice – that means about 44% of the total number of CAs.

Growing
industry

The
demand for CAs in India has been on the rise because more businesses are being
established and the government has been making policies and regulations to
monitor the market. As of January, 2019, more than one crore taxpayers have
registered in the GST regime. However, there are not many professionals to
guide
these taxpayers.

 

There is an immediate need to tap the talent
and to skill them in advanced tax calculations. Training in Artificial
Intelligence to participate in the growing automation of auditing process is
also needed.

 

The demand is not just because of the change
in the economy but also because of the crucial job roles that CAs have been
playing, catering to, for instance, Internal Audit, Tax Audit, tax planning,
cost planning, due diligence, audit under various state and Central
legislations, government audit, management audit, etc. Around 98 lakh
businesses have been registered under the GST regime and every business
requires a professional to manage the accounts- related matters. ‘Under the GST
regime all the taxpayers whose annual turnover is above Rs. 2 crores will
require to have a GST audit carried out by CAs’.

 

Lack
of professionals

India produces a large number of engineers
and doctors, despite the fact that there are no jobs for skilled students. But
even after having a long-term scope of professional security, the accounting
sector faces a crunch of trained professionals. ‘The recent push and incentives
being provided for startups, where students get full
control of their businesses, is another reason why commerce students are
looking beyond chartered accountancy’.

 

The struggle during the exams and low
stipends at entry-level jobs and limited job opportunities are some of the
reasons that have pushed students away from pursuing the professional field of
chartered accountancy. The crisis here is also that demand is ever increasing,
but the supply is not at par because of the salaries when compared to MBA and
other niche degrees.

 

The problem also lies in the curriculum
which largely is theoretical and not in sync with the industry requirement.
‘The rigorous practical exposure during the course of study is missing, which
makes most of the CAs feel that they are not ready for the corporate world,’
says Raghav Bhargava, Director, Taxmann.

Low
pass percentage

While
there is no glamour associated with CA as a career, the low pass percentage is
yet another reason that the number of professionals is not high. The pass
percentage for the May, 2018 final CA exams was recorded at 14% as compared to
7.63% in May, 2019. Due to the challenging nature of the industry, the vast
syllabus and the absence of a strong, formal setup of classes, there is a high
dropout rate which leads to the low pass percentage.

 

ICAI has a uniform level of scaling as per the
demand. The number of students passing the CA exams depends on the demand
calculation through ICAI’s survey. Moreover, there is no formal setup for CA
education and students have to depend on coaching centres. Aspirants from Tier
II and Tier III cities have limited chances to qualify for the CA entrance exams
because quality coaching is not available.

 

The
secret

We all know the theories of demand and
supply and I truly believe that a prestigious course like CA through the
Institute has adopted those theories very well. Hence, not everyone becomes a
CA and those who do, end up commanding a premium given the demand-supply
dynamics. Hiring for the niche role performed by CAs is very difficult and
those with additional skill sets in forensics, fraud, complex structuring deals
come at a premium.

 

TALENT VS. PEOPLE

While all of the above holds true, the
constant challenge that organisations face is hiring the right talent in their
workforce. The solution is the ever-evolving recruitment strategies, tools and
disruptions. There is a change in the spectrum of activities that were followed
a decade back and now, leading to better hiring, and we are not yet there!
However, many factors, including CSR by organisations to social media, are
playing a big part now. Let’s look at the age-old hiring style vs. the
situation now.

 

The
legacy recruitment

The recruitment process has remained
somewhat resilient to the changes in technology and the social revolution of
the new generation. Over the last two decades, recruitment was about publishing
ads in leading classifieds, both print media and websites, placing candidates
for interviews, comparing them with scores on common selection criteria and
arriving at a decision.

 

However, the time taken to hire then and now
is different, now being much less. The systems and tools without the modern AI
and analytics had a rework to be done for every new role sourcing. The early
2000s already had some job portals but these were sparsely used, so the
database of prospective employees was also individually controlled by each firm
and was limited. LinkedIn came into the picture by 2009-10, breaching the gap
between the employees but still keeping it formal.

 

The candidates did not have any idea about
the internal culture, work scenarios and access to some facts of their
prospective new employer before joining the firm until ‘Glass Door’ or ‘Hush’
arrived recently.

 

All in all, both the employer and employee
were at a higher risk of finding wrong matches for themselves because of lack
of information, although the time spent in hiring and getting hired was higher.

 

The
new-age hiring

The hiring process has transformed
dramatically over the years, due in large part to technological advancements.

 

Beyond the rise of the internet, tools like
video interviewing and interview scheduling software have helped to streamline
the hiring process, saving both time and money and making an employer’s life much
easier.

 

But there are some other, more subtle
differences between how people acquire talent now versus a decade ago. Here is
how the hiring process has changed over time:

 

Reach
is much more expansive

Before social media and the internet, a
person looking to expand his team had to hope that a qualified professional saw
his job posting in the local newspaper or trade magazine. Their reach was
somewhat limited when it came to recruiting and employers felt that they were
talking to the same candidates over and over when it came time to fill a
vacancy – or worse, choosing less-than-qualified individuals for open roles,
simply because there was no one else available.

 

The internet has truly revolutionised
recruiting. There are so many more touch points available to an employer
looking to fill an open role. From LinkedIn to your company’s website to
Twitter, Facebook networking groups and beyond, it’s never been easier to
access a deep pool of qualified candidates.

 

In some ways this might feel overwhelming,
as it means you’re sorting through more resumes than ever before, but it also
greatly increases your chances of finding someone who’s the perfect fit for the
role in question.

 

If you don’t like the applications you’re
getting from those in your immediate area, you can go beyond your city and even
your state until you find the ideal candidate.

 

Drastic improvements in interviewing
technology

Video interviewing has become a dramatic
time and money saver for those looking to hire. Instead of having to fly a
candidate in for an interview or rely on the phone to get a sense of what the
person is all about, the employer can now utilise video interviewing technology
for the process. This enables him to see and hear  the professional without having to pay for
airfare and hotel costs. It’s much easier to schedule interviews. Thanks to the
arrival of interview scheduling software on the scene, employers are now able
to take the legwork out of bringing a professional in for an interview. This
enables them to shift their attention to preparing for the interview and making
the best hiring choice possible for the business.

 

An
increased focus on cultural fit

From an employer’s perspective, experience
and education matter, but they’re also taking a deeper look at who that
candidate is as an individual.

 

Those in charge of hiring have realised that
you can have the most qualified and experienced candidate available, but if the
person’s attitude is going to cause tension among clients or with veteran
employees, it’s probably best to look elsewhere when hiring.

 

They need to be in search of someone who
will add to the team in a positive way, not just someone who is competent
enough to get the job done. One person directly contributes to the morale of
the entire company, so choosing someone who will fit in well is essential.

 

Technical skill can be taught, the right
outlook simply can’t be

 

Greater
emphasis on employer branding

With the rise of the internet, it has become
easier than ever for job-seekers to gather information about the companies to
which they’re applying.

What kinds of clients does this company
typically work with? Based on pictures, blog posts, tweets and homepage
content, what kind of atmosphere does the office seem to exude? This is
something employers must constantly be mindful of and work to monitor. Your
online presence can either attract or deter talent, so make sure you’re using
these resources wisely.

 

Everyone within the company, especially
those tasked with interfacing with the public on behalf of the business, should
be aware of the organisation’s vision and values.

 

Being creative,
firms are using social media and their websites to show off that creativity and
attract job-seekers who want to be in a place where their ideas are allowed to
blossom.

 

Candidates
run the show

Today, job-seeking is much more tailored to
the candidate’s experience, particularly when a hiring manager is vying for
top-tier talent. Hiring managers have realised that if you want the attention
of a valuable would-be employee, you can’t make them bend over backwards to
move through your hiring process.

 

This is why allowing them to do a video
interview when it’s conducive to their schedule has become a popular option.
Instead of forcing a candidate to take time
off from work or make up an excuse about why they’re stepping out of the office
for two hours, they’re able to record an interview from the comfort of their
own home at a time that works for them. This shows that the hiring manager
respects their time and sends a subtle signal about what it would be like to
work for that company.

 

Additionally, many hiring managers have
become focused on moving through the talent acquisition process as quickly as
possible. They also understand the importance of keeping all candidates
informed as they go.

 

Years ago, you could wait months to hear
back about whether you landed a second or third round interview. If you didn’t
get the job, you might never find out about it at all. This put your job search
process into a constant, frustrating limbo.

 

Now, people tasked with hiring realise the
importance of being transparent with applicants. They want to find the best
candidate for the open role as quickly as possible, and when that person is
selected, they understand they owe those who weren’t chosen the courtesy of an
email or phone call so they can continue with their job search.

 

SUMMARY

To sum it all up, we can say that chartered
accountant hiring is a meticulous process of getting the right individual for
the right job. The contributors to this are the whole socio-economic conditions
created by the government, the educationists and the organisation.

 

Though a little tough with the numbers, we
surely will get there soon with all the advancements in technology – education
and India’s growth story. As I sign off, here is one for the road – this
article was written by a Bot (Robot), cannot believe it? Right? Well, he is
named the Ghost Rider! Did you just believe me? Ask yourself how you would
react when a Bot has a telephonic interview with you and you still think it’s a
human.

TOP BOOKS ON PROFESSIONAL SERVICES MANAGEMENT: THE QUINTESSENTIAL McKINSEY WAY

INTRODUCTION


In the December, 2018 issue of the Journal, Nitin Shingala wrote an
article that highlighted the need to read a number of books on management of
professional services firms and also curated a list of must-read books on the
subject. He summarised key lessons from The Trusted Advisor by David
H. Maister, Charles H. Green and Robert M. Galford.

 

This article seeks
to summarise and highlight key learnings from another classic — The McKinsey
Way
by Ethan M Rasiel.

 

THE McKINSEY WAY


The McKinsey Way is
one of the most recommended, read and referred books on consulting as it
delivers crisp insights into the working of one of the most successful
consulting firms in the world. The book is teeming with amusing anecdotes which
make it quite different from the usual dry management literature on similar
subjects. The book provides an honest account of how one can be a successful
consultant and how can consulting firms grow themselves in the footsteps of
McKinsey & Co.

 

Ethan M. Rasiel was
a consultant in McKinsey & Co.’s New York office. His clients included
major companies in the finance, telecommunications, computing and consumer
goods sectors. Prior to joining McKinsey, Rasiel, who earned an MBA from the Wharton School at the University of Pennsylvania,
was an equity fund manager at Mercury Asset Management in London, as well as an
investment banker.

 

THEME


McKinsey & Co,
(“the firm”) is arguably the most celebrated consulting firm in the world.
Since its founding in 1923, it has now grown to 65+ offices in 130+ countries
and employs 4,500+ top minds. The book provides the reader a keyhole view of
how the firm thinks about business problems and the process through which it
solves them. The book also provides insight into how the firm markets its
services without “selling”. The final section of the book helps the reader
reflect on how to survive at McKinsey and how is life after working with the
firm.

 

The most important
learnings from each of these parts in the book are highlighted in this article.

 

PART ONE: THE McKINSEY WAY OF THINKING ABOUT BUSINESS PROBLEMS

When team members
meet for the first time to discuss their client’s problem, they know that their
solution will be:

  •    Fact-based
  •    Rigidly structured
  •    Hypothesis-driven

 

Fact-based

The firm loves facts for two key reasons. First, facts compensate for
lack of knowledge since most McKinsey-ites are generalists rather than industry
specialists. They bridge this industry knowledge gap through extensive
research. Second, facts bridge the credibility gap. The CEO of a Fortune 50
company will not give much credence to what some newly-minted, 27-year-old MBA
has to say.

 

Rigidly structured

Further, the
section explains a sine qua non for problem-solving at McKinsey –
“MECE”.

 

MECE stands for
mutually exclusive collectively exhaustive. Every list that the firm comes up
with in the process – problems with client, possible solutions or probable
outcomes – needs to be MECE. This ensures that while all possible items are
covered, none of them overlaps any other to add just redundant pointers to a
list.

 

Hypotheses-driven

The initial
hypotheses (IH) is an important pillar to McKinsey problem-solving which
involves 3 steps:

  •    Defining the IH
  •    Generating the IH
  •    Testing the IH

 

Defining the IH

The essence of the
IH is “Figure out the solution to the problem before you start”. While it may
sound counter-intuitive, IH is not the answer – it is just a theory which needs
to be proved or disproved. If IH is proved to be correct, it will become the
first slide of the presentation to be delivered a few months later. If proved
wrong, however, the process will give enough information to move on towards the
right answer.

 

Generating the
IH

The hypothesis is
then broken down into key drivers. Next, making an actionable recommendation
regarding each driver. For the next step, each top line recommendation is
broken down to the level of issues. If a given recommendation is correct, what
issue does it raise?

 

Testing the IH

Finally, the
hypothesis is tested to check whether anything is being missed out or any
issues are being ignored or all drivers of the problem have been considered?

 

Don’t reinvent the wheel and don’t boil the
ocean


McKinsey, like many
other firms, has developed a number of problem-solving methods. These
techniques are immensely powerful and allow the consultants to quickly fit in
raw data into frameworks and quickly begin to work towards the solution.
Further, the firm has a database of cases they have solved in what they call PD.net.
Here, the consultants can often tap into solutions to similar problems and
sometimes save days of effort. Further, sometimes it’s good to take a break
from the problem and resume later rather than sitting at a place and trying to
“boil the ocean”.

 

80/20 and other rules


80/20 is a rule
that has wide applicability and is one of the greatest truths of management.
80% of sales come from 20% of customers, 80% of the wealth is owned by 20%
people and 20% of a secretary’s job will take 80% of her time. The 80/20 rule
can provide the much-needed jumpstart in solving a problem as one can focus on
the few items that create maximum impact on the business and work on them
rather than going through a sea of data which has little impact.

 

The elevator test


Know your solution
(or your product or business) so thoroughly that you can explain it clearly and
precisely to your client (or customer or investor) in 30 seconds. If you can do
that, then you understand what you’re doing well enough to sell your solution.
You never know how long you might have with the CEO or a top investor to tell
him about your idea and keep them interested enough that they will come back to
know more.

 

Pluck the low hanging fruit


Clients can get
impatient during longer assignments. In such cases, rather than waiting to
present all findings and solutions in that final presentation, it is better to
present easy initial victories to the client. They boost team and client morale
and give the firm added credibility by showing anybody who may be watching that
you are on the ball and mean business. This rule is really about satisfying the
client in a long-term relationship.

 

Just say “I don’t know”


As professionals,
we think we are expected to solve challenges and answer queries at the drop of
a hat. I observe many professionals falling prey to this delusion and often
offering shallow or incorrect advice just to save face. A much better approach
is to just accept that you do not know something and that you will get back on
it. This helps build trust in the long term as people see you as somebody who
will not comment without adequate facts and credence.

 

PART TWO: THE McKINSEY WAY OF WORKING TO SOLVE BUSINESS PROBLEMS

How to sell without selling?

McKinsey is one
firm that does not advertise itself or have a sales team to constantly call and
reach out to prospects to grow their practice. However, it has still been one
of the most successful consulting firms in history. So how does the firm sell
without selling? The secret is that McKinsey constantly produces high quality
reports and newsletters which make their way onto the desks of CXOs. So, when
they have a business problem, who do they think of? You guessed it right! This
is how McKinsey markets itself but without selling.

 

Conducting interviews

Interviewing the
employees and management of the client is one of the most important tasks of
the firm’s engagements. They ensure that they use the best of their client’s
knowledge to assimilate processes and provide the most apt solutions. The
author advises that interviews should begin on a broad note and graduate to
specific questions as it progresses. This helps the interviewee to be more
relaxed in the process. Further, the interview should be a two-way process for
sharing information so that it makes the most of the time of all parties to the
interview. The author has also given advise on how to conduct difficult
interviews where the interviewee refuses to participate and has recommended
escalation of the issue to managers as a final resort.

 

Brainstorming

The firm is known
to think and provide solutions as a team. The whole team may sometimes spend a
whole day together in a room brainstorming on the solution. They also ensure
that the discussion points are being noted by someone in the room or by use of
digital whiteboards. The firm’s strength lies in its teams and how its best
brains work together.

 

“My experience at
the firm (and that of the many McKinsey alumni I interviewed for this book)
taught me that IHs produced by teams is much stronger than that produced by
individuals. Why? Most of us are poor critics of our own thinking.”

 

PART THREE : THE McKINSEY WAY OF SELLING SOLUTIONS

Making presentations

Client
presentations are where the firm presents its solution. They also print their
study and solution in ‘blue books’ which are handed over to each person in the
board room as they take them through the presentation. The author recommends
the client should be kept abreast of developments and findings in the study so
that the final presentation does not come as a surprise but rather, the client
has already begun to buy into the solution by the time the final presentation
takes place.

 

Rigorous implementation

A strategy is only
as good as how it is implemented. The author has suggested that the person in
charge of implementing the strategy at the client level should be thorough,
precise and with the propensity to get things done by people. This will ensure
that the strategy gets implemented in a timely and effective manner. Rigorous
implementation ensures that the strategy is able to see the light of day.

 

PART FOUR: SURVIVING AT McKINSEY

Finding a mentor

The author has
suggested that every person in the firm should have a mentor who can provide
necessary guidance and feedback to help them grow in their career. The mentor
could be the manager in the team or some other person who has considerable
experience at the firm. The mentor helps them see a different perspective, find
their place in the firm and grow in the required direction.

 

Recruiting at McKinsey

McKinsey invests
considerable time, attention and resources to hire nothing but the best brains
across top schools around the globe. They also recruit people from varied
backgrounds and disciplines to add diversity to their teams. The author has
also given various examples of how the firm goes to different lengths (like
taking them to the best fine dines in town) so that who they recruit are
nothing short of the best.

 

PART FIVE : LIFE AFTER McKINSEY

“As one former
McKinsey-ite told me, leaving McKinsey is never a question of whether — it’s a
question of when. We used to say that the half-life of a class of new
associates is about two years — by the end of that time, half will have left
the firm. That was true in my time there and still is today. There is life
after McKinsey, however. In fact, there may be more life, since you are
unlikely to work the same hours at the same intensity in any other job. There
is no doubt, however, that the vast majority of former McKinsey-ites land on
their feet.

 

A quick scan
through the McKinsey Alumni Directory, which now contains some 5,000 names,
reveals any number of CEOs, CFOs, senior managers, professors, and
politicians.”

 

The drill that
consultants go through at the firm and their interactions with the best minds
of the world in absolutely unforgiving scenarios helps McKinsey-ites flourish
long after they have moved on from the firm.

 

CONCLUSION


The book is a rare,
honest and striking account of what consultants and firms can learn from “The
McKinsey Way” to grow their careers and practice. The anecdotes dotted across the
book keep the readers’ attention alive and also quickly endorse the opinions
presented by the author. The book runs across multiple vertical facets like
practice-building, presentations, marketing, client management, psychology and
productivity while still not coming across as generic. These directly
applicable tools and advices hit the nail on the head rather than beating
around the bush.
 

 

IMPORTANCE OF CYBER SECURITY FOR MID-SIZED ACCOUNTING FIRMS

INTRODUCTION

We live in a
world that is networked together; and network protection is no longer an option
but a prime necessity for small and mid-sized accounting firms that deal with
sensitive client data. It should be seamless and thorough, regardless of
business or organisational standing. We have our own set of measures in terms
of practices and policies (that we have enlisted here) which are essential for
the right amount of preparation vital for optimised security, damage control
and recovery from the consequences of any possible cyber breach episodes.

 

IMPORTANCE OF CYBER
SECURITY FOR SMALL AND MID-SIZED ACCOUNTING FIRMS

Cyber
security is among the top issues currently on the minds of managements and
boards in just about every company, large or small, public or private,
including the small and mid-sized accounting firms. It becomes especially
challenging because while dealing with clients’ sensitive data, there is no
scope for taking things leniently.

 

Cyber
attacks may result in:

(i)    regulatory actions;

(ii)   negligence claims;

(iii) inability to meet contractual obligations; and

(iv) a damaging loss of trust among clients and
stakeholders.

 

Consequently,
it may bring commercial losses, as also loss of reputation, disruption of
operations and sometimes even business closures. Small breaches, if not
addressed adequately, could lead to insurmountable problems. Therefore, it is
better to take preventive measures at the organisational level.

 

By
definition, accounting firms are trusted with some of the most intimate
personal and financial information of their clients. And hackers are
continually trying to get their hands on such critical, private information.
This is a challenge for them but not really too difficult; in fact, it is
extremely simple for them to hack into firms that don’t have appropriate cyber
security measures at the core level. This is the reason that accountants need
to be motivated even more and to be cautious about protecting their client
data.

 

Understanding
the basics of cyber security ensures not only the safety of client information,
but also the longevity of the firm. Accounting companies thrive on their
reputation for privacy, just as much as their ability to crunch numbers, and
cyber security is a vital part of this reputation.

 

As the owner
/ manager of a small accounting, bookkeeping or finance firm, you’ve probably
faced questions about your cyber security and whether your firm could get
hacked in the same way that any larger financial institution might have been
hacked. The short answer is, yes!

 

THE CHALLENGE FOR ACCOUNTING FIRMS

Cyber-criminals
usually target small and medium-sized accounting firms because such
organisations place relatively less emphasis on data security, controls and
risk evaluations; they are, therefore, more vulnerable than the big firms. In
many cases, such firms don’t have sufficient staff in the IT function and not
all staff has the ability to spot these issues, which can prompt further risks.
The senior partners are especially at risk since they are both effortlessly
identifiable on the web and are most likely to conduct online banking
transactions for their practices. Any savvy cyber-criminal knows the steps for
hijacking access to accounts, as well as the security features associated with
online banking.

 

WHY ACCOUNTING FIRMS ARE AT HIGH RISK FOR
CYBER ATTACKS

(a) They hold massive private data

Cyber
attackers understand that accounting firms have total information as privileged
data from HNI clients or organisations. In addition to tax documents, financial
records, PAN and direct-store data, accountants may also serve as sources for
years of private data. Actually, some accounting firms hold virtually the
complete individual accounts of their customers, transforming these practices
into important targets.

 

(b) They have productive corporate information

While
numerous accounting firms deal exclusively with tax documents and related
personal and business documents, different practices handle high-stake
corporate issues. Accounting firms that frequently deal with mergers,
acquisitions and corporate rebuilding hold data that might be of considerable
‘interest’ to cyber-criminals.

 

(c) Firms do not assess security risk

Unlike large
accounting businesses, small and medium accounting firms often do not implement
robust security measures. However, they are all vulnerable to a variety of
targeted security attacks regardless of size and location. Many cyber-criminals
today execute malware attacks by targeting small and medium accounting firms by
taking advantage of inadequate data security.

 

No
accounting firm can combat and prevent emerging security threats without
assessing its security risk on a regular basis. The security risk assessment in
the accounting firms will help them to check the nature of client data being
accessed by each employee and assess the effectiveness of the employee’s device
to prevent targeted security attacks. Besides, the risk assessment will help
the firm to evaluate and improve its security strategy according to the
security vulnerabilities.

 

(d) Small firms tend to have insufficient security

While one
may expect that big accounting firms have far more resources and also face the
maximum risk of cyber attacks, small and mid-sized firms are far more
vulnerable to cyber threats. Indeed, a few criminals target small accounting
firms since they would have installed far fewer security systems than needed.
Some hackers launch strong, sustained attacks on small, poorly secured firms to
the point that they breach the company’s restricted protections. When they get
access to an organisation’s system, cyber-criminals can regularly steal
virtually any type of documents, from financial records to emails.

 

(e) Small accounting firms may not recover from hacks

For small
accounting practices, recovery may prove fairly tough if not impossible to
achieve. Clients pay accountants for their skills; however, in return they
expect trust and tact. Once a firm has demonstrated that it can’t give
satisfactory information data security or guarantee customers’ protection, the
organisation may never have the capacity to return to its earlier level of
business.

 

ACTION PLAN TO PROTECT YOUR FIRM FROM CYBER
ATTACKS

1.       Know The
Applicable Laws

Any effort
to strengthen cyber security for accounting firms starts with an understanding
of the applicable laws. Every accounting firm is expected to protect its
clients’ Personally Identifiable Information (PII) or details which, if
disclosed, ‘could result in harm to the individual whose name or identity is
linked with this information.’ In such a case, the data can be stolen for
financial fraud and in some cases can cost you three times the damages.

 

The following is a list of your
clients’ PII that your firm could be in custody of: PAN; Aadhaar number / data;
digital signatures; bank account numbers; residential address; residential or
mobile phone numbers; date of birth; place of birth; mother’s maiden name;
financial records; and so on.

 

2.       Perform
Regular Risk Assessments

Prevention
is indeed better than cure. New threats emerge every day and you need to
re-adjust your safeguards to adapt to these new threats. For your firm an
annual risk assessment should be sufficient.

 

And at the
minimum your risk assessment should include the following:

(a)   A review of the client information your firm
is currently collecting, categorising which are regulated PII and sensitive
data;

(b)   Identification of new laws and the applicable
commitments and requirements that your firm needs to fulfil for compliance;

(c)   Partner with a Managed Services Provider to
make sure your risk is limited and make sure your systems are protected and
secure;

(d)  Any change in your firm’s practices concerning
the acquisition, storage and sharing of client data that could open new
loopholes for financial identity theft;

(e)   New developments in the regulatory and
business environment; and

(f)   New technologies that your firm could be
maximising.

 

3.       Create A Written Financial
Identity Protection Policy

It’s easier for your accountants
to follow cyber security protocols if it’s a formal memo, part of your
employees’ handbook, or clearly outlined in your standard operating procedures.
A written cyber security policy can also serve as your springboard in training
employees to be more cyber security savvy.

 

4.       Update The
Operating System

Whether you
run on Microsoft Windows or Apple Mac OS, the operating system requires
frequent or continuous updates for strengthened security. System updates are
especially significant for server operating systems where all patches and
updates require to be looked at and refreshed repeatedly. Regular updates of
OS, upgraded firewalls and anti-virus in your workstations can provide for more
reliable protection against threats.

 

5.       Email
Security

Many
accounting firms rely on email to communicate with clients, even to send tax
documents or personal data. As email hacks have become increasingly common, it
is crucial to secure professional email accounts, especially when transmitting
important documents. This has also raised the requirement for efficient
encryption software, which is hard to decrypt by an untrusted third party.

 

More than
90% of cyber attacks begin with a phishing email. A vast majority of people
open an email from an unknown individual’s name without browsing or verifying
the actual sender’s email address. Having your email shielded from unauthorised
access is of prime importance.

 

6.       Anti-Virus
Updates

Accounting
firms need to ensure that anti-malware applications are set to check for
updates frequently, scan the devices on a set schedule in a mechanised manner,
along with any media
that is inserted
into any user computing terminal. In bigger firms, workstations must be
designed for reporting the status of the anti-virus updates to a unified
server, which can push out updates when released subsequently.

 

7.       Internet
Security

Browser downloads are another
leading method of cyber attacks. Internet searches can lead you to compromised
websites which infect your network with viruses and malware. To prevent this
type of attack, install all the latest security patches into your computers and
servers. Install a hardware firewall router with gateway anti-virus, gateway
anti-malware and intrusion protection system to stop the virus before it gets
into your private network. Routers provided by your Internet Service Provider
do not have this type of security. While these might be adequate for your home,
they are not designed for installation and application in any business
organisation.

 

8.       Protection
For Mobile Devices

As commerce
moves into the mobile space, so do hackers. Make sure that any employee that
uses mobile devices is encrypting data, password protecting the device (with a password
that is different from any other being used) and using the latest security apps
on the phone to ward off malicious third-party users.

 

9.       Protection
For Usb Devices

USB drives,
also known as pen drives, have become a popular form for storing and transporting
files from one computer to another. Their appeal lies in the fact that they are
small, readily available, inexpensive and extremely portable. However, these
same characteristics also make them attractive to attackers. And it’s not just
pen drives that are the culprits, any device that plugs into a USB port,
including electronic picture frames, iPods and cameras, can be used to spread
malware.

 

There are
numerous ways for attackers to use USB drives to infect computers. The most
common method is to install malicious code, or malware, on the device that can
detect when it is plugged into a computer. When the USB drive is plugged into a
computer, the malware infects that computer. Often, an organisation’s biggest
weakness might not be a malicious insider but rather an employee who simply
doesn’t understand the potential security risks of his / her actions.

 

There are
steps you can take to protect the data on your USB drive and on any computer
into which you might plug the drive:

 

(i)    Take advantage of security
features

Use
passwords and encryption on your USB drive to protect your data and make sure
that you have the information backed up in case your drive is lost.

(ii)   Keep personal and business
USB drives separate

Do not use
personal USB drives on company computers and do not plug USB drives containing
corporate information into your personal computer.

(iii) Use security software and
keep all software up to date

Use a
firewall, anti-virus software and anti-spyware software to make your computer less
vulnerable to attacks and make sure to keep the virus definitions current. It’s
also important to keep both the operating system and other software on your
computer up to date by applying any necessary patches.

(iv) Do not plug an unknown USB
drive into your computer

If you find
a USB drive, do not plug it into your computer to view the contents or to try
to identify the owner.

(v)   Disable Autorun

The Autorun
feature in Windows causes removable media such as CDs, DVDs and USB drives to
open automatically when they are inserted into a drive. By disabling Autorun,
you can prevent malicious code on an infected USB drive from opening
automatically.

(vi) Develop and enforce USB
drive-related policies

Make sure
employees are aware of the inherent dangers associated with USB drives and what
is your organisation policy on their proper use.

 

10.     Backing Up
Data Religiously

If all your
data is in one place, it is nowhere. Back up all of your most important data on
a regular basis. This may seem counter-intuitive to the concept of security as
you’re creating another copy of data that could be hacked. However, if the
backup is also stored securely over a proprietary or public network to an
off-site server, it drastically minimises chances of a breach or data loss.
There are additional fees associated with this type of backing up, but it’s
currently one of the best methods of security.

 

11.     Encrypt
Backup Data

Firms should
encrypt any backup media that leaves the workplace and also validate that the
backup is complete and usable. They should frequently review backup logs for
completion and restore files randomly to ensure that they will actually work
when required. Hiring an IT specialist is advisable to set up your firm’s
network and ensure your data is encrypted and secured. As a professional, your
responsibility is to ensure that data is secure when it’s in your custody.
Moreover, a backup is a definite must for any business.

 

12.     Educate
Employees

Most
breaches into accounting companies occur because of a backdoor innocuously left
open by an employee. Although hacking systems are becoming more sophisticated,
the majority of these systems are not able to force their way into a properly
managed security perimeter.

 

Security
education is a must and should be conducted once a year. In addition to looking
into the firm’s approaches, employees should be regularly instructed on current
cyber security attack techniques such as phishing and dangerous threats
including ransomware and social engineering used by hackers to gain access to a
user’s PC. Note: NEVER share your login, password or confidential
information over the phone with people whom you don’t know. Firms should review
IT / computer usage policies and provide reminder training to employees at
least once a year for all the new and updated policies.

 

13.     Wireless
Security

Secured
remote / wireless access into your network system should be planned, tested and
then implemented. Obviously, deploy a strong password policy, along with having
a guest network which should be set up for visitors (to your office network)
that need internet access via your wireless network system. This prevents any
guest user access to the system and resources on your network. This is
particularly required (to protect) in case one of the workstations or gadgets
used by the visitor is infected.

 

14.     Move Your
Data To The Cloud

Transporting
data using a USB drive is not secure. Data stored on the cloud has greater
protection than data stored on company servers. The move to such cloud services
can change business habits that help ensure a more secure accounting firm. For
example, if all company data is stored on the cloud, then there’s less need for
workers to email attachments to one another. When team members become less
reliant on email, it helps minimise the risk of falling victim to phishing
emails. Cloud accounting can make your business more efficient. It lets you
provide basic accounting services more easily – and in a cost-effective manner.

 

If you
haven’t moved your accounting practice to the cloud, you most likely believe it
is a complicated thing to do. But it’s not that hard to migrate your practice
to the cloud; it will improve your efficiency, save money and make your clients
feel safer than what they are feeling right now.

 

15.     Test
Security Measures

Hire security specialists for
proper configuration when implementing firewalls and security-related features
such as remote access and wireless routers. Chances are, your internal IT
people have not been exposed to ideal security training, or have no experience
with setting up a new device. External resources can likewise be called upon to
do penetration testing to recognise and lock down any system vulnerabilities.

 

16.     Byod Policies

The bring
your own device (BYOD) trend has seen rapid growth in offices throughout the
country. Since many accountants do get to access company and client data on
their personal devices, it is essential for firms to have policies with regard to
cyber security for such individual devices. Some accounting firms have decided
to completely prohibit the use of personal gadgets for organisation matters,
while others have imposed limitations to the data that can be accessed on them.
Furthermore, such devices can be easily targeted or exposed to cyber attacks by
hackers seeking confidential client data. Thus, it is in the best interest of
the accounting firms not to allow BYOD so that the data never leaves the
office.

 

17.     Remote
Working And Cyber Security

Large accounting firms deploy
resources for management of threats related to cyber security. They are well
equipped with infrastructure as well as manpower to keep such threats at bay.
But small and mid-sized firms may not enjoy similar privileges and could be
relatively more vulnerable to cyber threats.

 

Many firms
leverage cloud-based computing to enable employees to access accounting
software and client data remotely over the internet. The cloud-based services
and solutions even help accounting businesses to operate in distributed
environments. However, remote data access makes it easier for hackers to steal
and misuse sensitive financial data of clients.

 

Firms must
require employees to access the computers and business solutions over a secure
Virtual Private Network (VPN). A secure VPN will help the business to protect
data by avoiding the security risks.

 

Along with
that, it is recommended to use genuine and trusted software solutions, such as
Microsoft Remote Desktop, remote access. Apart from this, the firm must
implement multi-factor authentication to ensure that any unauthorised user does
not access the data stored in the cloud.

 

Recently, a
huge number of accounting firms have turned to remote staffing and hired such
staff to work for them. This could increase their anxiety about client data
even more as they won’t be able to monitor all the setups personally. In such
cases, the role of the remote staffing agency becomes all the more important.
Since the remote staff is actually working from their remote offices, these
need to be secured in terms of both policies as well as practices.

 

CONCLUSION

Isn’t
technology a crucial factor in cyber security for accounting firms? Some may
even go so far as to say that technology is at fault for all the modern-day
data espionage. However, you need to understand that it’s not technology per
se
, but the poor implementation of the technology that is responsible.

 

One way that
accounting firms are jeopardising their own cyber security is by burdening
their employees with overseeing the implementation, management and maintenance
of these technologies. Between servicing your clients and fulfilling internal
administrative tasks, adding cyber security to your accountants’ long to-do
list is hitting a nail into your data-protection coffin. Something is bound to
fall through the cracks. It would be best to partner with a managed services
provider to take care of your cyber security and tech management needs.

 

All
professionals owe a duty to their clients, managers and other employees to
address digital security. Active contribution is the key to addressing the
risks of illegal cyber activities. Understand your data and focus efforts on
the most critical information, implement encryption, become compliant with
cyber security regulations, educate employees about mobile devices and devise a
basic set of desktop security policies. These steps are a good initial move,
but they do not completely cover the gamut of standards and protocols seen in a
high-quality Cyber Security Risk Management System.

 

Accounting firms
that also have teams working from remote locations need to select their vendors
after due research and assurance that the data shared would be as secure as
demanded by their clients.
 

 



RAINMAKING – ISSUES WITHIN PROFESSIONAL SERVICES FIRMS

A firm’s success or failure truly
boils down to three things: Finders, Minders and Grinders. For any firm to be
successful at all, it needs these three speci?c types of professionals.

 

1.     Finders-
Rainmakers who provide the work

2.     Minders-
Mid-level supervisory employees who manage the Grinders and are accountable for
their output

3.     Grinders-
junior level employees who are required to run assignments and matters

 

The Finders,
being an integral requirement in today’s hypercompetitive service landscape, pose
a special challenge to the otherwise collegiate culture that prevails in
professional services firms. More often than not there is a misplaced sense of
indispensability experienced by Finders who see themselves as the primary
generator of clients, and consider themselves extremely important to the
survival and success of the business. This attitude can generate some conflict
between the Finders and the Minders.

 

Role of Finder

Finders provide business and work
that keeps a firm running. They are extroverted by nature, enjoy networking and
making new connections and are able to generate business through new avenues.
Finders are not just salespeople or marketers but ‘people’s people’ who know
how to ?nd clients and what to say to them. Although primarily business
generators, they are also sometimes involved in executing the work since
clients have a high degree of comfort with them and repose more faith in their
abilities and competence.

 

Role of Minder

Finders cannot carry the firm on
their shoulders alone; a crucial element for success is being able to inspire
people to go through the journey with them. Minders are those employees who are
technically sound and expected to know every detail of their practice area.
They are focused on details of matters and are excellent at supervising
engagement teams. Finders need to be the captain of their Minders, steering the
vessel straight on course, adapting where necessary, and enabling them to
succeed.

 

A poor concept Finders have of
Minders is the stereotype of a micro-manager ruling over others with a task
list. However, it is the job of the Finders to enable their Minders to succeed
and intervene only at strategic points.

 

Role of Grinder

If the Finders are the Queen Bees
of the service industry, Grinders are the Worker Bees. They are responsible for
the heavy lifting of the workload, executing finer details of transactions and
are a very important cog in the wheel of the service industry.

 

Fees and revenue generated by a
firm are a combination of the talent and effort of all the above three
stakeholders. It is a well known fact that compensation increases with age and
competition. However, in many firms compensation can be disproportionate and
not entirely commensurate with the effort involved in the work.

 

This often causes feelings of
jealousy and insecurity among co-workers. Since people are the only asset of a
professional services organisation, it is imperative for the Finder to create
an environment of trust and fairness so there is a just and equal distribution
of work and compensation, which is commensurate with the skill and abilities of
the Minders and Grinders.

 

Compensation structures should
involve a proportion of fees to be distributed among the pool of employees in
addition to their salaries. There should also be incentives given to employees
who introduce clients and bring work to the firm. Some employees however, may
not have the contacts to generate revenue for the firm; they may have other
skills that would help them contribute to the growth of the firm such as
practice knowledge management, conducting training and learning programmes for
professionals and clients or contributing in other ways such as writing
articles for professional publications and journals. The management will also
need to find alternate ways of compensation for such skills.

 

The expectation of a Rainmaker is
to have a disproportionate share in the fees generated by his/her efforts to
bring in clients. Firms need to adopt best practices of profit sharing amongst
their partners to create a sense of fairness. This could include a number of
parameters such as rainmaking ability, execution capability, client
relationship management, promotion and marketing of the firm and contribution
by way of knowledge management.

While there is no “one size fits
all” approach to arrive at partner compensation, a balance of all these
indicative parameters may be the right approach towards achieving some
semblance of equity which would result in greater satisfaction and motivation
amongst the partnership.

 

At the end of the day, Finders, Minders and
Grinders need each other. One cannot exist without the other and all are
co-dependent on the others for their existence. In order to make a success of a
firm, Finders, Minders and Grinders must work together in a cooperative and
collaborative manner, each one knowing their place and purpose in the larger
scheme of things. As Henry Ford said, “Coming together is a beginning, staying
together is progress, and working together is success.”
  

ARE PROFESSIONAL FIRMS HEADING TOWARDS EXTINCTION?

The Industrial Revolution 200 years back
completely transformed the way businesses were conducted. Work was standardised
into small repetitive steps which increased productivity not by 20% to 30% but
by a factor of hundreds. The technology revolution is today similarly poised to
transform the way in which professional practice is organised.The existing way
of conducting professional practice is undergoing a paradigm shift and
proactively managing these changes is not a matter of choice but a question of
survival. In this article an attempt has been made to articulate some of these
fundamental changes and how we need to respond to the challenges.

 

THE OLD WAY


Professionals as a class emerged in the
nineteenth century and today they are an indispensable part of society. They
are highly respected for their knowledge and expertise and the apex body (ICAI
in our case) under which they function has the responsibility to ensure that
those who are admitted into their fraternity are not just professionally
competent, but carry the profession with integrity.There is a tacit
understanding that in return for their specialised knowledge, the professionals
would be granted the right of self-governance in their field of expertise.

 

In 1939 the sociologist T.H. Marshall
remarked; “the professional man, it has been said, does not work in order to
be paid: he is paid in order that he may work.”
So the core value of the
profession has been service and not profit. Some of our seniors remember with
nostalgia that we were in the profession of chartered accountancy
and not in the business of chartered accountancy.

 

The very foundation of the relationship
between a professional and a client is that of trust. Clients who seek the help
of professionals in matters of critical importance themselves lack the
requisite knowledge and expertise and would therefore follow implicitly the
advice of the professional. Similarly, the client would be in no position to
ascertain or even estimate what is the fair remuneration that must be paid for
such services. Indeed, the senior professionals would also reminisce about the
days when it was considered inappropriate to question a professional about his
fees.

 

The very basis of this relationship is now
under stress. The distinction between profession and business is getting
blurred and the concept that professionals will always put the interest of the
client above their own and act with utmost professional integrity is being
questioned. The very idea that certain tasks should be the exclusive domain of
professionals is also being questioned. Above all, technology is transforming
the manner in which professional services are rendered and professional firms
organised.

 

PROFESSIONAL AS THE GATEKEEPER


It is under this backdrop that one has to
try and understand the future of professionals, including Chartered
Accountants. The society expects us to be not just gatekeepers but conscious
keepers of the businesses we audit. We are expected to detect and flag off
financial impropriety and frauds; however, we continue to believe that this is
way beyond our scope of work. It has been ingrained in auditors that they are
watchdogs and not bloodhounds. However, this is a distinction that the world at
large does not understand. As John C. Coffee, Jr. asks in his book
Gatekeepers, “why did the watchdog not bark when Enron happened?”

 

Today, most professionals believe that
this so-called “expectation gap” needs to be bridged and that public awareness
needs to be created on the real role of the professional.
However, may be we need to look at this issue from the perspective
of the public and the regulator, who expect us to detect frauds and other
financial misdemeanors. We are expected to raise an alarm well in advance when
the entity is going under. Is it possible to fulfill these expectations by
using technology, artificial intelligence (AI) and data analytics? If not,
there is a possibility that alternatives will emerge as that seems to be the
crying need of the times.

 

THE FEES MODEL


Also what will come under stress is the
age-old fees model that professionals have employed, where fees are
predominantly charged based on “time spent”. Clients seek professional advice
for solutions to problems that they have not fully comprehended. So
professionals don’t just help solve problems, but often also help in
articulating the problem itself with clarity. If this be the case, how can the
client even estimate the time that is expected to be spent by the professional
on a given assignment? It is hardly surprising that more and more clients want
to know the fees upfront or want a cap on the fees. Their argument is that as
professionals we have a better understanding of the problem and its intricacies
and hence are best placed to estimate the time. In other words, the risk of
time overrun (and conversely the advantage of efficiency) should be borne by
the professional.

 

Of course, time basis is still the only
effective and preferred fee determinant, but as professionals we must make a
conscious effort to move away from this model wherever possible for the
following reasons:

 

1.   It is in the interest of the professional to
prolong the time, clearly leading to a conflict of interest situation.

2.   The client has no means of judging the time
required or actually spent for the job. So there is an inherent reason for
heartburn that the time spent was padded up.

3.   The system rewards the inefficient as those
who take more time are paid higher.

4.   It stifles innovation and the need to bring
about efficiencies as there is no incentive to reduce time spent on the
assignment.

 

Fees charged on the basis of time spent
focuses on effort rather than results and professionals should consciously move
towards a fees model based on “value provided”.After all it is in our interest
to communicate to the client the value derived by him rather than time spent by
us.

 

TECHNOLOGY THE GAME CHANGER


But these are relatively minor challenges
confronting the profession. The elephant in the room is technology and
artificial intelligence that is encroaching upon all spheres of human
enterprise. According to research by Frey and Osborne cited in a 2014 article
by The Economist, Accountants and Auditors were the second highest
vocation that would be affected by technology. One of the jobs that was 10
years back believed to be immune from technology was that of a truck driver. It
was argued that driving required human skills and hence it could not be
automated. Google has now turned that argument on its head. In fact, it is not
inconceivable that children 30 years from now may be amused and amazed that
their parents actually physically drove their vehicles.

 

The initial efforts of using artificial
intelligence (AI) was based on trying to replicate the way the human mind
functions and these efforts only met with limited success. But today machines
have become much more adept by following a completely different path. As
Patrick Winston, a leading voice in AI stated, “there are lots of ways of
being smart that aren’t smart like us”
. Chess for example was considered as
an epitome of human intelligence, intuitiveness and ingenuity. But the
programme “Deep Blue” beat the chess champion Gary Kasparov not by mimicking
the functioning of the human mind, but by applying brute computing power. The
machine lacked creativity or insights, but compensated by its ability to
analyse 200 million possible moves in seconds and winning with brute
number-crunching force.

 

In the light of these inevitable changes,
professionals will have to bring about transformative changes in the way they
conduct and organise their professional practice. A decade back it was common
to state that only those who will use technology effectively and integrate it
with their practice will survive. This meant the application of technology was
limited to automation and for incremental increase in efficiency and
productivity. This barely touched the tip of the proverbial iceberg in terms of
actual potential to bring about structural changes. The fact is that
technology today is no longer the enabler, it is the driver and it must be used
to bring about transformative changes. As professionals we must be prepared for
the future where judgement may be replaced by Big Data mining, experience by
analytical tools and intuition by computing logic.

 

BRUTE FORCE OF COMPUTING POWER


Moore’s Law predicted in 1996 that the
processing power of computers would double every two years. This sounded
improbable and certainly not sustainable, but the consensus today is that this
law will hold true for decades. Which means machines will be ever more
versatile and competent.

 

In the face of this, the argument often put
forth by professionals that however much one uses technology, the final
solution requires judgement and hence professionals will always be
indispensable, needs to be critically examined. The argument goes that routine,
repetitive work can be standardised and transferred to the machines, but tasks
requiring judgement and strategic inputs will still be the domain of humans.
However, the trend seems that machines with intelligent systems are bound to
become more and more sophisticated in making connections, identifying patterns,
forming correlations and finding solutions that may till now have been
considered well beyond human cognitive capabilities.

 

Already in a lot of areas, machines are
outperforming humans. By using their processing power, they are able to analyse
huge amounts of data to reach conclusions that are more accurate than those
reached by humans. As humans we make decisions emotionally/intuitively and then
justify them rationally. The ways of working of future machines are unlikely to
resemble the human way of working, but they will be effective and perhaps less
fallible. Deep Blue proved that human intuition and analytical capabilities are
no match for the brute computing and processing power of the computer.
Ominously, increasingly capable machines, using Big Data, AI or some other new
technology are poised to encroach upon more and more areas that were the
exclusive domain of human experts.

 

Audits can no longer be conducted behind the
shelter of test checks. 100% of the transactions can not only be verified, but
organised and analysed from different perspectives and this analysis can be on
real-time basis. Data can be drawn from varied sources, in different and even
unstructured formats. Analysis of this data collected both from within the
company and from other comparable businesses, may give remarkable insights into
the functioning of the auditee. At the core, Big Data is applying math to huge
quantities of data to infer probabilities and make increasingly accurate
predictions.

 

STANDARDISATION AND DELEGATION


Professionals also believe that their work
cannot be standardised beyond a point. It is highly intellectual and unlike
manufacturing work it cannot be spliced into small repetitive tasks. This
thinking is also under challenge and if one were to really break down the work
of a professional, a large portion can indeed be standardised and systematized.
Once that happens, it can easily be delegated to machines, and what’s more, it
can be digitised and be made available to be downloaded online. So tasks
considered as non-routine will increasingly be routinised and even genuinely
non-routine tasks may also be performed by smart machines of the future.

 

We have also seen that semi-qualified staff
with the aid of sophisticated technology are often as effective as highly
knowledgeable professionals. Paramedics with minimal training and good
equipment have transformed the health care in rural places. So it is not
difficult to visualise that a semi-qualified person with the help of
appropriate processes and systems will deliver the same end results as qualified
professionals. Technology-based companies could replace a lot of functions
performed by professionals with the help of semi-trained staff equipped with
the right technology support.

 

Would then professionals only be required to
tackle situations and problems where there are no clear-cut precedents? Without
precedents, the professionals would also be blind guessing and in such a
situation once again the computer would be better equipped to find solutions
through programmed simulation.

 

EXCLUSIVITY VS. COMPETITION


One big
protection for professionals is that they are insulated from competition. The
rationale is that professionals with intensive training alone can competently
handle complexities involved in a professional task. Opening out professional
tasks to non-professionals would expose the lay person to not just poor quality
of service, but to wrong and potentially damaging advice from quacks.

 

Surely, in
today’s knowledge world, it would be increasingly difficult to argue that
certain spheres of knowledge should be the exclusive domain of certain
professional bodies. Transparency ensures quality and as professional work is
standardised and streamlined, it is likely that in future customers will rely
more on peer review of fellow clients to decide the quality of the professional
service rather than a self-governing disciplinary mechanism.

 

So let’s not
be surprised if more and more tasks reserved for professionals are opened out
to others.

 

TO SUMMARISE


The present
form of professional practice is under threat from multiple forces:

1. AI through
brute computing and processing power is encroaching upon more and more areas of
professional practice and human endeavour.

2.  Machines with Big Data
analytics are poised to produce consistently better results than those possible
by the best of professionals in ever-increasing areas.

3.  Even intellectual work can be
defragmented into smaller tasks that can be standardised and hence be
machine-programmed.

4.  Para professionals with
sophisticated access to databases and technology can do a large amount of work
that till now was the domain of qualified professionals.

5.  The exclusivity protection to
professionals from regulators may be under threat and public opinion may compel
changes to allow many more service providers.

So the big
question: are professionals doomed to extinction? Probably not, but
professionals who are unwilling to transform their professional practice
in response to the above challenges may find it difficult to survive. Nobody
can predict the future. Yet, in a technology-driven world that premise is
nuanced as there may not be any future things that may have flourished for
centuries. As Peter Drucker put it, “the only thing we know about the
future for sure is that it will be different”
.

 

Note: Some of the thoughts in this article
are inspired from the book “The Future of the Professions” by Richard Susskind
and Daniel Susskind.
 

TOP BOOKS ON PROFESSIONAL SERVICES MANAGEMENT

INTRODUCTION


When compared to
the study of business management, the study of professional services management
is of recent vintage. While business management education is most sought after
the world over, the knowledge and skills required for managing professional services
are usually acquired on the job,and many times through trial and error.
Professionals study technical subject, but often leave out the management
aspects, which impact their growth and profitability. It is therefore
imperative to keep in touch with the developing management thinking and best
practices about professional services.


David Maister, an
authority on this subject, emphasises that professional services involve a high
degree of customisation with a strong component of face-to-face interaction with
the client. A former Harvard Business School professor, Maister argues that
management principles and approaches from the industrial or mass consumer
sectors, which are based on standardisation, supervision and marketing of
repetitive tasks and products,are not only inapplicable to professional
services but may also be dangerously wrong.


Thankfully, there
are many books to study and learn the art and science of professional services
management. Some of the top books which also feature on several recommendation
lists are:

Title

Author(s)

The Trusted Advisor

David H. Maister, Charles H. Green and
Robert M. Galford

Managing the Professional Service Firm

David H. Maister

Flawless Consulting: A Guide to Getting
Your Expertise Used

Peter Block

Million Dollar Consulting: The
Professional’s Guide to Growing a Practice

Alan Weiss

The McKinsey Way

Ethan Rasiel

The Consultant with Pink Hair

Cal Harrison


This feature
attempts to summarise and highlight key learnings from some of the above books.
This article presents the summary of the first such book.


The Trusted
Advisor by David H. Maister, Charles H. Green and Robert M. Galford


THEME


The central theme
of this book revolves around the fact that the key to professional success is
not just technical mastery of one’s discipline, which is most essential, but
also the ability to work with clients in such a way as to earn trust and gain
their confidence.


At one time, being
a professional automatically carried prestige and easily win clients’ trust.
However, things have changed. The notion of embedded trust has been affected.
These days, professionals often find that they need more client access, more
ways to cross-sell and more opportunities to show the quality of their work
(beyond price considerations). Many clients now treat professionals as
untrustworthy, because they question the advisors’ motives or do not see them
as experts.


To break out of
these boundaries, one must become a “trusted advisor.” This requires
developing an ever-deepening relationship with each client. As such a
relationship evolves, the client will involve you in a broader range of
business issues. Along the way, you can progress from being a subject-matter
expert, to being an associate with expert knowledge and additional valuable
specialties. Moving from one level to the next is evolutionary, but once you
become a trusted advisor, your client will openly discuss both personal and
professional issues with you.

As an example of a
“trust-based relationship”, the book narrates the case of sports
agent David Falk and basketball star Michael Jordan. In 1977, Falk helped
negotiate Jordan’s $2.5 million endorsement deal with Nike. As Jordan’s career
progressed, Falk negotiated more endorsements. Eventually, Falk sold his agency
for $100 million, but he still collects 4% of Jordan’s earnings. Falk earned
Jordan’s trust and friendship by knowing what his client wanted, including
Jordan’s opinions about his fees. There were a few times when Falk waived his
fee without any discussion with Jordan because Falk knew Jordan might object to
the cost. He continues to work with Jordan today mainly due to the trust with
Jordan that Falk built.


With deep insights,
examples from real life and practical tips, the trust and behaviour framework
from this book has become a key element of management education for
consultants, and it has been helping a large number of professionals to pursue
the right approach and technique in their journey of being trusted advisors to
their clients.


PERSPECTIVES ON TRUST 


Ambitious
professionals invest tremendous energy in improving their specific expertise
and gaining experience, but do not give adequate thought to creating and
strengthening the trust relationships with their clients. Many professionals do
not know how to think about or examine trust relationships. A useful framework
is provided to gauge the depth of the client relationship:

Depth of Relationship

Focus is on

Energy
spent on

Client receives

Indicators of success

Service Based

Answers, expertise, input

Explaining

Information

Timely, high quality delivery

Needs-based

Business problem

Problem Solving

Solutions

Problems resolved

Relationship-based

Client organisation

Providing insights

Ideas

Repeat business

Trust-based

Client as individual

Understanding the client

Safe haven for hard issues

Varied; e.g. creative pricing


The three basic
skills that a Trusted Advisor needs:

  • Earning Trust
  • Building Relationships
  • Giving Advice Effectively


Key characteristics
of trust are:


1.  It grows instead of just appearing – it
results from accumulated experiences over time.


2.  It is both rational and emotional – trust is
lot richer than logic alone and is a significant component of success.


3.  It presumes a two-way relationship – between
two persons and is highly personal.


4.  It is intrinsically about perceived risk –
creating trust entails taking some personal risks.


5.  It is different for the client than it is for
the advisor – just because you can trust does not mean you can be trusted.
However, if you are incapable of trusting, you probably can’t be trusted.


6.  It is personal–trust requires being understood
and having some capacity to act upon that understanding which can be performed
only by individuals and not institutions.


A sound advice
requires asking the following critical questions:

1.   What options do we have for doing things
differently?

2.   What advantages do you foresee for different
options?

3.   How do you think relevant players would
react?

4.   How do you suggest we deal with adverse
consequences of an action?

5.   Other people have encountered difficulties
when they tried that. What can we do to prevent such things from occurring?

6.   What benefits might arise if we tried a
different approach?


A good process for
the advisor to follow is:

1.  To give them their options

2. To educate them about the options
(including enough discussion for them to consider each option in depth)

3. To give them a recommendation

4.To allow them flexibility to choose


Building a business relationship involves similar elements you would use
to build a personal relationship. You need to be sympathetic, understanding,
available, reinforcing and respectful. You need to understand the clients’
business and know what a decision involves. When you get to know a client, you
will often be able to tell when your advice is being sought and when it is not.
Both matter. Do not assume you can solve everything.Trusted advisors have
strong professional and personal relationships with clients.


A trusted advisor
must develop appropriate attitude or “mindsets”, the most important of which
are:


1.  Client-focus — instead of “how this
reflects on me”, “solving my client’s problem”, make that
transition from the power of “technical competence” to the power of
“facilitating competence”.


2.  Self-confidence — instead of worrying about
insecurity, focus on the problem at hand.


3.  Ego-strength — instead of assigning
credit/blame, focus on bringing about the solution. “It’s amazing what you
can achieve when you are not wedded to who gets the credit”.


4.  Curiosity — instead of “knowing”,
develop an attitude of inquiry.


5.  Inclusive professionalism — seeing the client
as a peer and solving the problem together.


Sincerity is
crucial to both trust and relationships. If you have it and can show it, you
will do well. If you try to “fake it”, it will show up, making it not only
ineffective, but also creating an adverse reaction.


Getting into the
right mental frame of mind happens in two ways, simultaneously:

  • “from within” —
    feeling a genuine interest/caring for the client and their success
  • “from without” —
    acting in ways that express interest/caring for the client.


Sometimes you have
to start with one end or the other; “from without” is easier to initiate.
You can have genuine human contact without being a personal friend. In very
rare cases, you may not be able to work with someone. One of the most important
lessons to learn is that to earn trust, you must bet on the long term benefit
of the relationship. The hallmark of trusted advisors is that they don’t bail
out when the times get tough.


THE STRUCTURE OF TRUST BUILDING


The most critical
learning from this book is the ‘Trust Equation’. The authors suggest that there
are four primary components of trustworthiness, as shown below:


These components
have to do with the trustworthiness of words, actions, emotions, and motives,
as shown in below table:

 

Component

Realm

Trust behaviour

Trust failings

Credibility

Words

I can trust what he says about…

Windbags1

Reliability

Actions

I can trust her to…

Irresponsible

Intimacy

Emotions

I feel comfortable discussing this…

Technicians

Self-orientation

Motives

I can trust that she cares about…

Devious


Credibility – The notion of credibility includes notion of both accuracy and
completeness. Accuracy, in the client-advisor world, is mostly rational.
Completeness, on the other hand, is frequently assessed more emotionally. While
most providers sell on the basis of technical competence, most buyers buy on
the basis of emotion. What we tend not to do is to enhance the emotional side
of credibility: to convey a sense of honesty, to allay any unconscious
suspicions of incompleteness. The best service professionals excel at two
things in conveying credibility: anticipating needs, and speaking about needs
that are commonly not articulated.


Reliability – It is one component of the trust equation that is action-oriented
and that distinguishes it from credibility. Reliability in the larger rational
sense is the repeated experience of links between promises and action. It also
has an emotional aspect, which is revealed when things are done in a manner
that clients prefer, or to which they are accustomed. In this emotional sense,
reliability is the repeated experience of expectations fulfilled.


Intimacy – The most common failure in building trust is the lack of
intimacy. Business can be intensely personal surrounded by obvious human
emotions related to issues at hand without involving private lives. It is the
extent to which a client can discuss difficult topics/agendas with you.


Self-orientation – There is no greater source of distrust than advisors who appear
to be more interested in themselves than in trying to be of service to the
client. The most egregious form is to be in it for the money – it extends
beyond greed and covers anything that keeps us focused on ourselves rather than
on our client.


DEVELOPMENT OF TRUST IN FIVE STAGES 


It is important to
understand how trust-based relationships are developed; indeed, when examined
closely, you can see five essential stages that lead, consistently, to trusting
relationships.

__________________________________

1   a person who talks at length but says
little of any value


1. Engage – Give your clients and
prospects individual attention. Offer customisation. Make personal, timely,
topical connections with clients about their business challenges. Find out all
you can about new prospects. Seek opportunities to discuss activities of mutual
interest. Discuss more than factual content, because that can pigeonhole you as
a technician, instead of as an advisor.


2. Listen– Sometimes an advisor’s most
important job is to listen, sympathise, integrate and get involved. Listening
is an activity and not a passive process. When arranging a meeting, set an
agenda. That can help you prioritise various decisions, prompt a conclusion and
foster action. When clients share the agenda, they become involved in the
meeting and gain a vested interest in its outcome.


3. Frame – Once advisors can clearly
state their clients’ problems, they are more than half-way toward reaching a
solution. Framing a problem is challenging, but when you do it correctly, it is
very rewarding. You can frame problems in a rational or emotional context.
Rational framing breaks a problem down to its component parts. It works best
when it reveals a new perspective. Emotional framing uncovers any personal
feelings that may be linked to a decision. This can often be uncomfortable since
it involves saying things that have been left unsaid, often deliberately.


4. Envision – Articulating a possible new
reality opens a client’s imagination to new ways of doing things; it can spark
creativity or challenge the status quo. Envisioning, which is crucial to
problem solving, sets the stage for future actions.


5. Commit – Once you frame a problem,
shape a vision and determine a general course of action. Explain the
implementation details to your client. Covering all the pitfalls and barriers
is an essential part of getting the client to agree to future action. This
links the plan to the nuts-and-bolts of execution. Manage the client’s
expectations on what will happen. Restrain excess anticipation by clearly
stating what you plan to do and what the client should do. Give details to
avoid misunderstanding.


PUTTING TRUST TO WORK


The following behaviours can help a professional gain trust that would
have the highest impact, or fastest payback:


1.   Listen to everything: Force yourself
to listen and paraphrase, in order to get what the client is trying to say.


2.   Empathise (for real): Anyone who
understands us has earned the right to engage in discussion or even debate;
anyone who empathises with us has earned the right to disagree and still have
our respect. Listen to where the client is coming from, understand that
perspective and acknowledge that understanding.


3.   Note what the client is feeling: Note
what clients say and do in your interactions with them. Make careful deductions
about what their feelings might be. Acknowledge your own feelings and voice
them as well, but carefully.


4.   Build a shared agenda: Whether you are
in a large or informal meeting, share your ideas for an agenda and ask the
client to add their ideas as well. This creates buy-in and shows you have a
“we, not me” attitude.


5.   Take a point of view: Go out on a limb
with an idea or perspective, even if you are not entirely sure of it. Such
articulation stimulates reactions and crystallises issues, serving as a
catalyst to draw ideas out of your client.


6.   Take a personal risk: Put yourself
“out there” for your client — reveal something about yourself, even though such
revelations carry with them risks of personal loss, even ridicule.


7.   Ask about a related area:
Advisors who notice and express interests outside their particular realm of
experience make an impression on their clients. They show that they care enough
about the client to not merely focus on the narrow realm of their professional
issues and interests, but to expand that focus to address a wide array of
client needs.


8.   Ask great questions: Open-ended
questions allow you to probe the client’s needs without artificially framing
the client’s response or biasing them one way or another. The objective is to
hear what the speaker has to say, in the speaker’s own terms. By doing this,
you show the speaker respect by allowing him or her to set the frames of
reference, not contorting them to fit your viewpoint.


9.   Give away ideas: Expertise is like
love — not only is it unlimited, but you can destroy it by not giving it away.
It cannot be scanned into a database; rather, it is the unique human ability to
redefine a problem and come up with creative solutions for solving it. It is
what a successful advisor brings to every situation, and it only gets better
with practice.


10.  Return calls with unbelievable speed:
Getting back to the client, fast, could be the most trust-creating thing you
do. No one expects it, and it demonstrates how much you value your client.


11.  Relax your mind: Critical meetings with
your client can be stress-inducing environments; it is crucial to rid your
mind, however temporarily, of internal distractions prior to entering into such
situations. Think about one saying or one question at a time. Write out your
feelings about the one you choose, or talk through it, aloud, prior to a client
meeting. Doing so will help cleanse your mind of distractions or internal
conflicts prior to heading into a potentially stressful situation.


SUMMING – UP


The experience
suggests that trusted advisors form a strong professional and personal bond
with their clients. They focus on their clients’ needs and believe that doing
the right thing has long-term benefits.


Trusted advisors
place the client relationship first and foremost, even if a current project
fails. This often means that the professional makes a substantial commitment to
the client even when there is no immediate prospect of a profit. Successful
trusted advisors continually explore new ways to help, define problems and work
on solutions.


In an organisational context, the
behavioural framework is also helpful to the subordinates in gaining greater
trust from their seniors.

Rainmaking – In The Monsoon Of Our Time


In traditional parlance, a rainmaker has been a
term used to allude to the Native American practice of dancing to encourage
deities to bring forth the rain necessary for crops. In summertime during a
drought, for instance, the rainmaker would dance and sing songs on the plains,
and this activity was believed by others in the tribe to magically cause clouds
to come and bring the life-giving rain.

 

In today’s environment, a rainmaker is someone
with a Midas touch who ‘magically’ brings new business and clients to a firm or
generates more revenue from existing customers and donors, and rain is a
metaphor for money.

 

Having a rainmaker on your team can be a huge
asset, as well as a liability. As assets, there is the obvious: rainmakers can
bring in unprecedented amounts of revenue into your practice, making money flow
through your firm like actual rain in a Mumbai monsoon. Typically, they are
confident individuals whose optimism is infectious, making sure your firm is
constantly high on positivity. Because they are very good at positioning you in
front of clients, rainmakers can raise the image of your firm, and make sure
that they close deals.

 

Unfortunately, rainmakers have a downside as well:
they are typical good at doing the job, not so much as explaining how they got
it done, which makes them poor mentors and teachers. They can be high
maintenance and arrogant, and find it difficult to work with people in
authority. The biggest disadvantage of rainmakers however, is that they are
well aware of their own importance to the firm, and can hold it hostage, making
outrageous demands and throwing huge tantrums. 

 

Rainmakers are outgoing, social and well-connected
individuals, always looking to make connections and open new avenues for fresh
business opportunities. While all of us may not be Harvey Specter (the
rainmaker on the popular Netflix show ‘Suits’), over 20 years in the profession
have taught me that we all need to ignite the rainmaker within us in order to
survive and stay relevant in today’s hyper-competitive market.

 

With the exponential growth of the Indian economy
in the past 20 years, there has been a corresponding increase in demand for
legal, accounting, trusteeship secretarial and administrative services. The
impact of this has been two-fold: on one hand, there has been a further
expansion of the Big 4 firms and their service offerings. Conversely, there has
been a break-away of the old guard and a mass migration of rainmaker
professionals who take with them, highly experienced leadership teams and go on
to set up boutique Indian firms (with a pan-India presence), and in some cases,
Indian tax advisory firms with global offices. This surge in entrepreneurship
has caused a huge disruption in the way in which larger, more established firms
attract new business and retain existing client relationships.

 

In the legal services market there has been
consolidation of some of the national legal firms with footprints across India.




Parallelly, the emergence of young entrepreneurial
firms, many of which are break-aways from old firms who start their independent
practices which offer a one-stop solution to their clients, has caused a
fragmentation in the market.

 

The traditional approach in business development
of professional services firms has had an unwritten rule: a strong aversion to any form of promotion, marketing or any other form of
solicitation of new clients or work.



In fact, the term ‘business’ was seldom used by
seasoned tax and legal professionals in the course of describing the nature of their work. Most professionals have held on to an image of being ‘service
providers’ who are sought after and approached by clients for their expertise
and advise.

 

The evolution of the legal and regulatory
landscape, along with increased transparency in procedures and initiatives by
the government resulting in “ease of doing business in India”, has impacted the
traditional sources of (bread and butter) work and revenue for
professionals.The professional services industry has also witnessed rapid
changes and development in the regulatory landscape with the introduction of a
new Companies Act and Good & Services Tax. New areas of practice such as
forensic accounting, competition law and trade law have developed, creating
additional opportunities for super-specialisation and novel service offerings
such as pre-emptive and strategic advice to clients. Artificial Intelligence
and technology have mechanised and caused the commoditisation of several
service offerings, forcing firms to cut fees and costs charged to clients.
There is innovate software available in the market that has automated the work
that was previously achieved by human effort. To further compound the
situation, the number of chartered accountants, lawyers and company secretaries
that have entered the profession over the past decade is also rising
exponentially, and all this while the pie of work has not grown proportionally.

 

The costs of doing business by professionals
(office rent and overheads, salaries, etc.) have also increased substantially.
The escalation in costs have well exceeded the growth of businesses and there
is a huge gap between the two. All these factors have resulted in a
hyper-competitive environment with price wars between firms and significant
undercutting of fees to capture market share and clients. There is no longer
any rationality between the fees that can be charged for a piece of work and the effort taken by the professional to perform the work.

 

Given the compounded effect of business disruption
by technology and automation, increase in competition and price wars amongst
professionals, it is imperative for professionals to adopt marketing strategies
to develop their practice, remain relevant and stay ahead of the curve.

 

This can be achieved in relatively simple ways and
with proper planning does not necessarily require significant time and effort.

 

Contribution of Articles: There is nothing as ego-boosting as a
by-line! The law and all legal matters have moved beyond the realm of purely
legal journals and sections dedicated to law and all things legal, and into the
regular broadsheets of almost all publications. Contributing articles and
opinion pieces to mainstream newspapers and magazines helps members of our
reticent community get into the public eye. The challenge is to make sure that
you avoid legalese and technical jargon, and write your pieces in a way that
appeal not just to your legal brethren but also to the public at large.

 

Quotes: A great way to make yourself visible is to
establish yourself as an ‘expert’ or ‘go-to’ person for journalists on legal
and tax issues and topics. All this would involve is the journalist calling or
emailing you for your comments on any issues that form the subject of your
article. It is a much simpler and more effective way of making yourself known,
with very little effort on your side. You would need to cultivate a few
journalists however, and make sure that you are available to them whenever they
need a quote.

 

Conducting Workshop for Clients: Clients look to you as experts who know
of the latest developments in the field. While the nitty-gritty of the legal
and tax world does not have to concern them, it is always useful to share basic
knowledge with your clients on these matters. When the Goods & Services Tax
was introduced across India in 2017, a number of professional services firms
organised workshops and seminars for their clients to explain the workings and
impact of this new tax regime to them. Most firms use these workshops as an
opportunity to network and touch base with clients, and hence they are invitee
events. A quicker, more cost-effective way to conduct such workshops is to host
webinars. All you need is a stable Internet connection, a webinar platform and
prior intimation to potential attendees.

 

Speaking at Conferences and Seminars: Speaking as opposed to attending
conferences and seminars, adds a lot more value to the brand equity of a
professional. This is one of the most effective, yet under-rated ways of
marketing oneself and ones’ services. Professionals who excel at this have got
their name on the speaker circuit and are often invited to prestigious events
as a keynote speaker or part of a panel, or even as moderator for a panel
discussion. Whichever role you get invited for, conferences and seminars are a
great way to get in the limelight and network with a large audience who could
translate into clients. The best way to organise this is to liase with event
organisers specialising in legal and tax conferences and seminars, and become
an indispensable part of their list of speakers.



Newsletter: Sending out a newsletter to clients is a great
way to be in regular touch with them. The newsletter needs to be attractively
presented, contain short snippets and articles and need not be more than 1-2
pages long. Alternatively, the newsletter could be a shorter update on recent
developments in the field or event alerts.

 

Change is the only constant in life, and as legal
and tax professionals, it is imperative that we let go of the old guard and
embrace new ways to networking and creating business for ourselves. ‘Those who
snooze, lose’, as the saying goes, so it is time we woke up, smell the coffee
and jumped on the marketing bandwagon so that we continue to stay relevant in
this dynamic and rapidly changing world. 
 

 

Building A Top Global Indian Accounting Firm

Introduction

During his address on the occasion of the CA Day on 1st July
2017 hosted by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI), Hon’ble
Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi exhorted the Chartered Accountants and said,

“There are so many accounting firms in India, but none had
managed to find a place among the top global players…By 2022, let us have a
Big Eight, where Four firms are Indian”. 

The ICAI, in its Vision 2030, states that it will develop
skilled professionals with competencies to service clients not only within
India but across the globe that requires technical skills as also
cross-cultural appreciation and understanding of global needs.

The above goals are audacious! While there are many Indian
Chartered Accountants who have become successful global professionals, our
profession will need to overcome many challenges and shortcomings to pursue
realisation of this goal of building top global Indian Accounting Firms (IAFs).

This article attempts
to present a current snapshot of the accounting profession in India with an
international benchmarking and discuss some of the measures required in
building a global accounting firm.

Indian Accounting Profession and International Benchmarking

Let’s look at the current
landscape of the accounting profession in India and how it fares in
international comparison to understand the enormity of the challenge presented
by the Hon’ble PM. Given our historical linkage and comparable size of our
economies based on the GDP in nominal US Dollar terms, the UK has been selected
for the international comparison.

Particulars

India

UK

1GDP,
current prices (USD Billions)
2017 est.

2,439

2,565

2Members
of Accounting Bodies

2,70,307

(1.4.2017)

3,50,912

(31.12.2016)

3Total
Accounting Firms

69,428

(24.9.2017)

43,700

(10.3.2017)

4Proprietary
Firms %

69%

49%

4Firms
with 2 to 6 Partners %

29%

45%

5Firms
with 50 or more Partners

9

21

5Firms
with 100 or more Partners

1

14

5Partners
in the largest firm

133

956

5Total
Partners in top 50 Firms

1,677

5,962

5Total
Partners in Big FourNetwork Firms

Not available

3,180

6Peer
Reviewed Firms/Registered Audit Firms

1,826

(11.08.2017)

6,010

(31.12.2016)

Peer Reviewed Firms/Registered Audit
Firms as % of Total Accounting Firms

2.63%

13.75%

6Recognised
Qualifying Bodies (RQBs) offering audit qualification

1

6

6Recognised
Supervisory Bodies (RSBs) responsible for supervising the work of statutory
auditors

1

4

Sources and notes:

1.  www.imf.org. India is catching up fast and
expected to surpass by 2019 as per the recent estimates by the IMF.

2.  www.icai.org and www.frc.org.uk. The total
number of members for the seven accountancy bodies in the UK and Republic of
Ireland (ROI) within these two countries.

3.  www.icai.org and www.ons.gov.uk.

4.  www.icai.org and www.frc.org.uk. The UK data
represents the registered audit firms.

5.  www.icai.org and www.accountancyage.com – UK’s
Top 50+50 Accountancy Firms 2017 by Accountancy Age.

6.  www.icai.org and www.frc.org.uk.

The Select Committee on Economic Affairs of the
House of Lords of the UK(the Select Committee) in its report “Auditors:
Market concentration and their role
” published in March 2011 notes that the
Big Four audited 99 of the FTSE 100 leading firms and around 240 of the
next-biggest FTSE 250 in 2010. They also had about 80% audits of the FTSE small
capitalisation firms. The Select Committee commented that it took 150 years
from the beginnings of modern audit in Britain around 1850 to the emergence of
the Big Four. The Committee added that internationalisation of business,
economies of scale and the reputational assurance to be the significant factors
that helped the dominance of the Big Four.

In contrast, the Big Four in India audited merely
26% of the total 1,519 companies listed on the National Stock Exchange (NSE) as
per a study report published by Prime Database in September 2016. The report
also stated the percentage of the companies audited by the Big Four was higher
at 47% in the Nifty-500 subset. Despite a much lower proportion (2.63%) of the
IAFs being subject to peer review, the percentage of the Big Four amongst the
NSE listed companies is much smaller.

The history of the Big Four in India is of recent
vintage, and the evolution of large IAFs is in early stages. There have been
several successful IAFs with a long history. However, very few of them have
been able to evolve beyond a set of individuals into an institution and expand
their footprint significantly.
A good number of such IAFs have become part
of the Big Four in order mainly in the wake of globalisation post-1991.

The statistics in the above table show that the
IAFs are much more fragmented with a higher ratio of the proprietary firms even
though the Small and Medium Practitioners (SMPs) form a large part of the
Accounting Profession even in a matured market. The economics of the SMP
practice is such that the intensity of competition exerts further pressure on
margins which results in inadequate investment required in turn hampering their
evolution into a large organisation. India has witnessed very few successful
examples of AFs coming together to build a bigger firm that could encourage the
consolidation in the accounting profession. A major impediment is the ability
of the founders/partners to grow beyond the personal capacity of serving the
clients and building the business.

The statistics in the above table also show a much
lower number of IAFs with 50/100 or more partners as well as the aggregate
number of the partners in such large firms in India when compared to the UK.
The advent of the Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) removing the restrictions
on the number of partners in India and possibility of forming
multi-disciplinary partnerships should give an impetus to open tremendous
growth opportunities for the IAFs.

Building a Top Global Accounting Firm

David H. Maister, in his well acclaimed book “Managing
Professional Services Firm
” writes that every professional service firm in
the world, regardless of size, specific profession, or country of operation,
has the same mission statement: “Outstanding service to clients, satisfying
careers for its people and financial success for its owners.”

Building a top global AF requires striving well
beyond these necessary ingredients of outstanding client service, nurturing a
winning team and ensuring the financial success. Research on what makes a
long-lasting global organisation shows that the following elements are critical
in building a top global IAF:

Core Ideology

In his book “Built to Last”, the author Jim Collins
narrates how their research revealed that the visionary company was guided more
by a core ideology—core values and a sense of purpose beyond just making
money—than the comparison company was. Jim says that a deeply held core
ideology gives a company both a strong sense of identity and a thread of
continuity that holds the organisation together in the face of change.

Another important learning from their research is that the architects of
visionary companies don’t just trust in good intentions or “values statements;”
they build cult-like cultures around their core ideologies. These learnings
apply equally to the AFs wanting to transform into a long-lasting organisation
that will transcend beyond individuals and to be regarded as institutions.

Marketplace Strategy

A successful AF will require evolving winning
strategy not only regarding whether to specialise or to generalise but also the
marketplace positioning. As an example, one may adopt “Cost leadership” as a
strategy given the India advantage or pursue a “Differentiation” strategy or a
research-driven “Focus/Expertise” as a strategy. Many IAFs cruise along and do
not exercise a conscious choice when it comes to this critical element. Several
firms take up every assignment that comes their way and not focus on a specific
segment/area where they wish to be. Research shows the business that are
focussed on specific market segments are able to build a stronger brand and
also are more profitable.

Eminence and Thought Leadership

Closely linked with the marketplace strategy are
the eminence and thought leadership strategy and plans. The AFs need to build
their reputation in a way that helps create new relationships and drive the
growth. In an increasingly competitive and complex world, an AF that can
showcase early-stage thinking and the unique expertise of an emerging thought
Leader to win the battle for ideas will stand to gain.

Partnership governance

The partnership governance is the most critical
factor. However, being a highly sensitive subject and perhaps due to conflict
of interest, there is minimal discussion around this. A strong Partnership
governance where the individual partners regard the organisational benefits
above self-interests is crucial to building a large, long-lasting organisation
.
The norm today is for the firm to be democratic whereby every member of the
Partnership, howsoever senior, should be required to abide by the majority vote
regardless of how they feel about a matter. The partners elect a governing
board and to strive for consensus on major issues, such as strategy,
compensation, hiring, training, organisation, and choice of service lines.

As part of the governance process, the AF should
evolve a structured approach to deal with partners’ compensation and promotion
that can be based on measurable performance usually adapting the principles of
the balanced scorecard.
 The measures could include quantitative as
well as qualitative criteria such as earnings, billable hours, collection,
cross-referrals, contribution to firm’s initiative such as building eminence,
etc. Such a performance appraisal process can raise contentious, confusing and
conflicting issues in many firms, but data-driven, objective and structured
appraisal process covering even the managing partner or the CEO can contribute
to long-term growth and success of an AF.

Collaboration

Building a global AF will require fostering a
culture of collaboration and ensuring the people do not work in silos. A higher
degree of cooperation is needed in the areas of staffing (cross-staffing, staff
rotation), client relationship, knowledge-sharing and training &
development to break through the silos and pursue growth. David Maister
describes the preferred model as “The One-Firm Firm”. Maister suggests that a
firm that cultivates an environment focused on the outcomes for the firm as a
whole rather than for the individuals only, will operate as an effective team.
Such a firm also needs to foster the culture of coaching and mentoring at all
levels starting from the top with the Partners actively helping to solve
problems, develop opportunities and provide inspiration.

Talent management

The importance of attracting the right talent and
nurturing them can never be over-emphasised. A typical SMP falls into the trap
of lower fees resulting in lesser ability to attract and retain quality staff.
A regular challenge faced by an AF is the inability of a senior member to
delegate appropriately. There is a core tendency of ‘professionals’, to assume
higher levels of expertise, find it necessary to do the work and that there is
less standardisation possible – a problem caused by insecurity or unresolved
ego issues. Building a right mix of the staff pyramid and ensuring appropriate
delegation with rewards and recognition at each level are crucial to the
success of an AF.

Technology

In today’s age, the technology has become an
essential enabler for an AF to success. Many firms are embracing cloud and
digital technologies for real-time collaboration with the clients and manage
the paperless workflow. The AFs need to groom and encourage younger leaders to
adapt to the changes and overcome the challenges thrown by continuously
evolving technology.

Conclusion

The successful global accounting firms, such as the
Big Four, present several lessons that can help IAFs embrace the opportunity
and pursue growth. There are several top global Indian information technology
(IT) companies, and India has emerged as the Worlds’ largest sourcing
destination for the IT industry. A large number of Indians occupy the
leadership positions in large global businesses.

These successes have led not only the economic
transformation of the country but also altered the perception of India in the
global economy. The rise of Indian multinational companies has been well
acclaimed and can provide a strong backbone to the IAFs in pursuing global
growth opportunities.

Let’s hope the nudge from the Hon’ble PM on 1st
July 2017 triggers the IAFs and the Profession at large to


reflect and pursue the goal of building a top global IAF in times to come.

Building The Firm Of The Future

We live in
an era of profound change. While change is inevitable, the continued success of
individual accounting firms is not.
To cope with an increasingly turbulent
environment, firms need to develop new strategies that are better adapted to a
modern marketplace.

Change is
arriving from many sources, and its pace is accelerating. One way to measure
this acceleration is to examine the half-life of knowledge — how long it takes
for half of humanity’s knowledge to be supplanted by new information.

For much of human history, this
half-life could be measured in hundreds of years. By the 1920s, the
half-life of knowledge was 35 years. In the 1960s, it was 10 years. By 2000, it
was down to 5 years. Today, it is estimated to be about 2.5 years, and experts
expect it to continue dropping.

Change can come from many
directions, as well. For instance, a simple change in the threshold that
triggers mandatory audits can decimate demand. And international competition,
deregulation and new business models can dramatically impact entire industries.
The winds of political change are often unpredictable.

Technology, of course, is a primary
agent of change. It has already made real-time communications inexpensive and
almost universal. Artificial intelligence can do your taxes and keep the books.
There is even speculation that block-chain transactions may replace the need
for required audits.

Demographics also drive change. The
workplace is steadily being taken over by individuals who have grown up with
digital technology. These digital natives have different life experiences and
expectations than the generation they are replacing in the workforce.

In this article, we will identify
emerging global marketplace trends that are most likely to impact Chartered
Accountancy practices. We will then identify specific strategies and tactics
that are effective today — and should continue to work for the foreseeable
future — at accelerating the growth and profitability of accounting firms
around the world. We believe that these proven strategies provide a practical
template for the firm of the future.

Market
Trends Shaping the Future of Accounting

While many forces are shaping
accounting’s future market environment, some carry more weight than the others.
We’ve identified five emerging market trends likely to have the biggest impact
on the industry.

1.    The
commoditization of routine professional services

There was a time when Chartered
Accountants were rare. Fees were stable and relatively high, even for widely
used services such as tax and audit.

But over time, many of these
services became widely available as accounting practices proliferated. In
addition, lower-cost alternatives, such as tax filing software, entered the
marketplace.

These innovations exerted downward
pressure on fees. Today, services are increasingly viewed as commodities and
providers as interchangeable. In this scenario, the only selection criteria of
significance are cost and payment terms.

How do we remedy this race to the
bottom?
The answer is expertise. Figure 1
shows the relationship between the level of perceived expertise and the billing
rates clients are willing to pay. It is anchored at US$100 for a professional
of “average” expertise. The results show that the higher the level of
expertise, the more clients are willing to pay.

Figure 1. Relative hourly rates buyers will
pay, by Visible Expert level1

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1.    Source: The Visible Expert,
2014, p. 42, https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/the-visible-expert


2.    The
expectation of full transparency

Today’s consumers expect complete
transparency, a trend that is driven by people’s daily experiences online. An
individual can go online and find ratings and reviews for everything from
restaurants and movies to cameras and cars, and — for better or for worse —
this crowd-sourced phenomenon is now being applied to professional services.
Buyers have begun to expect that they will be able to use websites, online
tools and social media to understand a firm’s services and approach, as well as
assess its strengths and weaknesses. If buyers aren’t able to find information
on a firm relatively quickly, they often move on.

In fact, a recent study of referrals
showed that over half (52%) of the prospects receiving referrals ruled out a
firm they were referred to before even talking with them. The most
common reason cited for ruling out a firm was that its website or online
presence did not adequately demonstrate how the firm could help the buyer
.2

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

2.    Source: Referral Marketing
for Professional Services Firms Research Report, 2015, p. 14,
https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/referral-marketing-for-professional-services-firms

3.    Specialized
expertise is assumed

Today’s sophisticated buyers have
come to expect that for any given problem they have they will be able to find a
specialized solution — and more often than not this solution can be found
online. From personalized services to downloadable apps, these solutions come
in many guises.

The same should apply to
professional services. If a company has a business challenge, it should easily
be able to find a firm that specializes in solving that specific problem.This
tilt towards specialists is already happening in the marketplace. In our recent
study of accounting firms, we found that specialists grew twice as fast as
generalists (see Figure 2).3

Figure 2. Median growth of generalist and
specialized accounting & financial services firms


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

3     Source: Accounting & Financial
Services Research, 2017, p. 10,
https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/2017-accounting-financial-services-research-summary-marketing-growth-insights

4.    Expert
advice is freely available

Have a question? Want to research a
business issue?  Free advice from a
knowledgeable expert is only a few clicks away — whether it is a blog post,
webinar, video or whitepaper.

We live in an age when professional
services buyers expect to be able to educate themselves for free on any
business issue they encounter.
 If a firm fails to meet this expectation, one
of its competitors will. A firm’s ability to develop and promote educational
content is important because when buyers are ready to hire a new firm, they
often will think first of the experts they have come to rely upon for the
information they need. Feeding prospective clients’ ongoing need for
information is a new and powerful way of building competitive advantage.

The power of this approach is nicely
demonstrated by a recent study of referrals. This study compared several of the
most common approaches to generating more referrals.

Figure 3 shows the probability of
receiving a referral based on each technique.4 Note that visible
expertise (i.e, sharing your expertise in an educational context) was the most
powerful approach — far more powerful than a referral from a client or a
friend.

_______________________________________________________________________

4.             Source: Referral
Marketing Study, 2016, p.9, https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/referral-marketing-study

Figure 3. Factors that increase the
probability of referrals


Figure 4 shows how referral sources
learn about a firm’s expertise5. Note how many of the activities in
this figure are ways of sharing knowledge and educational content.

 Figure 4. How referral sources discover experts


_________________________________________________________________________

5 Source: Referral
Marketing for Professional Services, 2016, p.11,
https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/referral-marketing-for-professionalservices-firms

5.    A
time-pressured marketplace moves online

“I want what I want and I want it
now” could well be the rallying cry of today’s overworked business
professional. Psychological studies have shown that managerial and professional
positions are among the most stressful and time pressured. And in many (perhaps
most) cases, these are your potential clients. No wonder they value getting
fast answers to their business questions.

Of course, there is no better medium
to satisfy this need for speed than the internet. Social media is faster than
face-to-face networking. And online search takes only a few seconds. “Faster”
and “easier” are very appealing concepts to prospective clients. As a result,
the business advantage of having a robust online presence is clear.

So what is the likely result of
these changing marketplace expectations?

Winners
and Losers in the Emerging Marketplace

If there is one clear consequence of
these emerging trends, it is this: there will be winners and losers. Some firms
will adapt to the changing marketplace and settle into market niches in which
they can grow and prosper. Other firms will ignore the changes around them.
Many firm principals believe (or hope) that these market forces will not affect
their clients, and they continue to rely on “tried-and-true” business
development techniques that have worked for them in the past.These firms are
not likely to thrive much longer.

This sorting into winners and losers
is not just a theoretical possibility. It is already well under way. Almost 10
years ago, my agency identified a group of firms that consistently outperformed
their peers on almost every measure of financial performance. We call them High
Growth firms.

High Growth firms grow five to ten
times faster than their average-growth peers, and this growth does not come at
the expense of profitability. According to our most recent study, High Growth
firms are twice as profitable as their peers. And they achieve this performance
while spending no more on marketing than their slower-growing competitors.6

___________________________________________________________________________________________

6.    Source: 2017 High Growth
Study, p. 10-11,
https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/2017-high-growth-research-study-research-summary

Far more often than not, firms that
achieve these levels of growth and profitability have a clear strategy that
gives them a competitive advantage. They also tend to receive much higher
valuations when they are acquired or merge with another firm.

One study of firm value showed that
High Growth firms receive valuations of multiples up to 10 times higher than
average.7

How are these firms able to
accomplish this impressive growth in the face of a turbulent, highly
competitive global business environment?

___________________________________________________________________________

7.    Source:
Top Dollar: How to Achieve a Premium Valuation for Your Professional Services
Firm, 2008, p. 8,
https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/high_growth_professional_services_firm_how_some_firms_grow_in_any_market

In our attempt to answer this
question, we have learned that there are certain principles and practices that
allow these firms to adapt quickly to emerging marketplace changes. While every
firm faces different business and market challenges, there are some practical
approaches that seem to cut across industries, markets and cultures. We explore
these approaches in the next section.

Becoming
the Firm of the Future

There is no single technique or
business strategy that guarantees future success. But our research has
uncovered several practices that significantly improve a firm’s ability to
align its business approach with the needs and expectations of an evolving
marketplace. Below are six strategies that a firm can begin using today to
prepare for the uncertainties of tomorrow.

1. Create a Culture of Learning and
Change

The biggest barrier to building the
firm of the future often lies between our ears. Fear of change and a desire to
minimize risk by avoiding the new and untested can blind us to the implications
of an evolving world. Instead of seeking to understand the change around us and
embracing it, many firms look to others in the accounting industry for
leadership and inspiration. They model their approach to business development,
marketing and operations after competitors whom they admire.

While such apparent caution may seem
less risky, it is in fact very dangerous. It will erode any competitive
advantage a firm has developed, stifle innovation and prevent a firm from
recognizing and serving emerging client needs.

A far safer course is to be
proactive and monitor the evolving marketplace. Equipped with this knowledge, a
firm can develop services and strategies that address emerging client needs
long before competitors catch on. In the next section, we will explore how to
achieve this level of market insight.

Before firms retool their marketing,
however, they must develop a firm culture that supports learning and change. One
way a firm can make learning an integral part of its culture is to implement a
training schedule.
For example, one of our clients — an international law
firm based in Mumbai — devotes one hour each workday morning to formal
training. While this level of training may sound excessive (and it probably
isn’t necessary at most firms), it sends a powerful message to potential
clients and employees.

Another way firms can foster a
culture of ongoing change is to adopt a practice of continually introducing and
testing new services. We call this the Test–Measure–Learn cycle.
When they assume this mindset, employees realise that innovations and
improvements are inherently uncertain and must be tested and refined.

Figure 5. The Test–Measure–Learn cycle

 

 For example, suppose you have an
idea for a new service that helps clients use financial information to improve
operational efficiencies. You start the cycle by testing the idea and measuring
the results. Did it work as expected?

What were the unanticipated results?
Over time, your accumulated insights allow you to learn from that experience
and apply that learning to your next test. Each successive iteration should add
value or reduce cost.

While some individuals may follow
this pattern instinctively, we find that most do not. Introducing a
Test–Measure–Learn policy makes learning and continual improvement a part of
the culture. Firms that institute this kind of process find that uncertainty is
less daunting and their approach to the marketplace becomes more flexible and
adaptable.

2.    Research
Based Marketplace Insights

Perhaps the biggest challenge in
becoming a firm of the future is finding a way to discover clients’ changing
needs and business priorities.
 Their industries, after all, are facing their
own risks and opportunities. So you should try to understand those first. The
problem is that most professionals feel as though they already know their
clients and their business challenges. However, this belief is an illusion.

As humans, we have blind spots. We
think we understand something when we, in fact, do not. Our clients don’t
always communicate their true feelings or concerns to us. And we bring our own
histories and motivations to every interaction. The net result is that almost
every firm operates with dangerously flawed assumptions about what clients want
and how they think about critical business issues.

The antidote for this problem is
research. Firms that conduct systematic research on their target client group
have a more objective view of their challenges and priorities. They are able to
base their decisions on empirical evidence rather than assumptions or
instincts. It equips them to anticipate trends and offer highly relevant new
services. In short, research reduces risk.

This effect is powerful: firms
that conduct formal research on their target client group grow faster and are
more profitable. In a recent study we found that 34% of High Growth firms carry
out systematic client group research at least each business quarter.
None
of their slow-growth peers did similar research.8

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8     Source: 2017 High Growth
Study, p. 17, https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/2017-high-growth-research-study-research-summary

Figure 6. Percent of firms, by type, that
conduct frequent research (quarterly or more often)


3.    A
Focused Strategy

The firm of the future will benefit
from a narrowly focused strategy. In a turbulent environment, the firm that
tries to be everything to everyone is likely to discover that it is nothing
special to anyone.

We’ve already seen this effect in
play — buyers favour specialists over generalists. While it may seem intuitive
that offering more services to more audiences creates greater opportunity for
growth, the opposite is true. The more a firm broadens its appeal, the bigger
its pool of competitors grows and the more difficult it becomes to stand out to
prospective buyers.

So how do firms establish
competitive advantage? By offering superior client service? In fact, this is a
very popular strategy, used by two thirds of firms today. Unfortunately, it
doesn’t work. Firms that attempt to differentiate themselves on superior
client service actually grow 250% slower than firms that employ other
differentiators.

Keeping in mind that every firm
operates in its own competitive environment and needs its own strategy, there
are a few differentiators that consistently work better than others. One approach
is to offer a niche service. Firms that take this approach are 25% more likely
to be High Growth firms. Another proven differentiation approach is to
specialize in an industry. These businesses are 89% more likely to become High
Growth firms.

Why are these niche approaches so
effective? We’ve identified three reasons:

First, having a niche allows a firm
to be more visible to its target audience. When an audience is smaller, it is
easier and less expensive to reach them.

Second, firms that specialize are
more likely to be perceived as top experts in their field. Top experts are able
to close business more quickly, are less likely to offer commoditized services
and can charge premium fees.

Third,a niche firm’s smaller,
well-defined market makes it easier to understand and monitor its market. As a
result, these firms are well positioned to introduce innovative solutions as
their clients’ needs evolve.

4.    An
Expertise Centered Brand

Perceived expertise is critical to
the future success of accounting firms. According to our research, expertise is
the number one selection criteria when prospective clients seek out a firm to
hire. Even more impressive, in nearly three out of four searches (72%)
expertise is the factor that tips the scale in favour of the final choice.

As evolving technology and
increasing global competition push more traditional accounting services into
the commodity category, expertise will become the primary way that the firm of
the future will compete.

But there is a problem with
competing on expertise. Expertise is invisible. A buyer cannot assess
expertise by looking at or meeting a person. To address this problem, firms
have to find ways to make their expertise broadly visible to their target
client groups.
The most effective way to build this visibility is to bring
their expertise directly to their audience, even before they are ready to buy —
by speaking at events, publishing educational articles and blog posts and
putting on free webinars, to name just a few common tactics.

Centering a firm’s brand on
expertise is not only effective today, it is a strategy that will contribute to
the firm’s future relevance and competitive advantage.

5. A Balanced Approach to Practice
Development

When reviewing Figure 4 above, you
may have noticed that referral sources learn about expertise in many ways. They
gather their information from a variety of offline (e.g., speaking engagements)
and online (e.g., blogging or social media) sources. In fact, firms that generate
leads from both online and traditional sources tend to grow faster and are more
profitable than those that solely rely on traditional sources. Our research
tells us that these firms can grow up to four times faster and be more than
twice as profitable than firms that follow an unbalanced approach.
9
These firms are also better prepared for an increasingly digital future than
those that rely heavily on traditional business development techniques.

__________________________________________________________________

9.    Source: Online Marketing for
Professional Services, 2012, p. 58,
https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/online_marketing_for_professional_services

6.    A
Magnet for Top Talent

Professional services firms are only
as good as their talent. After all, it is their professionals’ expertise that
firms are selling
. But many firms struggle
to attract and retain top talent. A lack of qualified job candidates can
severely limit a firm’s future prospects and put a ceiling on growth

For this reason, a firm would be
wise to invest in its employer brand: What is the firm’s reputation as a place
to work? Does the employer brand attract top talent or keep them away? Is it
consistent with the firm’s client-facing brand?

When building its employer brand, a
firm must first understand what job candidates are looking for in a firm. A
recent study on employer brands provides a few helpful clues. When asked what
they care about most, employees’ top response was to work with a growing firm.
Their next most common response was having the ability to work remotely or
telecommute. Interestingly, obtaining the highest available salary came in
third place.10

__________________________________________________________________________________________________

10.  Source: Employer Brand Study,
p. 18, https://hingemarketing.com/library/article/employer-brand-study.


Firms must also understand that
generational differences will play a growing role in the war for talent. While
many of today’s leaders lament the changing expectations and priorities of the
rising generation (those born after 1980 and sometimes referred to as
Millennials), these young professionals open up many opportunities for the firm
of the future.

For example, Millennials are eager
to build personal brands in their industry. This ambition is completely
consistent with a firm’s goal to make its expertise more visible. And firms
that encourage the development of their experts’ personal brands may have a
recruiting edge when competing for this demographic.

Millennials are also adept at
representing the firm on social media, an advantage in a world that is tilting
steadily towards online communication. Characteristics that may be an
uncomfortable fit in today’s firm are likely to become valuable assets to the
firm of tomorrow.

A Final Thought

Building the firm of the future may
seem like an impossible task. The future is always uncertain, after all, and
the pace of change has never been faster. But there are compensating factors.
Times of great change can also produce great opportunities.

We can see some of these
opportunities already in the extraordinary growth enjoyed by firms that have
embraced emerging market realities and are leveraging new business strategies
and tactics. There will be winners and there will be losers in this race to the
future. Which path will your firm choose to take?
_

On Not Building A Top Global Indian Audit Firm

Several thought provoking facts and figures have been presented recently in various forums on the captioned subject. However, some key perspective notes need to be added in, to make clear the present plight of IAF (Indian Audit firms). These are as follows–

 

The Vision

The Vision presented by our Hon. PM Shri Narendra Modi on the CA Day on 1st July 2017 is path-breaking in many ways. For the first time, in India, the recognition has come to the fact that the large firms in the country’s audit practice are not Indian Firms. While it is an open secret, the fact that it has been woven into a distinctive vision for Indian Audit Firms, and that too by the highest office, is what makes it path-breaking. There need be absolutely no confusion going forward that Indian Audit Firms have fallen far far behind. This is the obverse of the vision statement pronounced by our Hon PM. This fact simply cannot be stressed enough. It is the basis for the “wake up call”. It is not that India does not have audit and auditors. It is just that we don’t have Indian Audit firms providing auditing at the forefront – both domestically and globally – an unhealthy change that happened over the last two decades. What makes it all the more poignant and purposeful, is that such clarity and such vision did not come up from within the apex professional body of the country which found itself at the receiving end, instead of being in a position of claiming credit of having stood up for and presented a vision for Indian Firms versus Multinational Audit Firms (MAF).

 

The Structure

A comparative review of Firms in India and the UK or the USA is certainly required and has also been presented. However, this “landscape” requires a panorama photo to accompany it and complete the beautiful picture. Taking the population as a basis, India is truly far behind the West – absolute numbers are of limited value when the denominators are starkly different. The structure of the profession also is totally different in India. Non-regulated entities of the MAF operating in India dominate the scene. This is unlike any other country in the world. ICAI overseas only a small fraction of the head-count when one takes into account this factor. This brings in rampant non-regulation. It brings in a wide spread “non-level playing field” which is the term utilised in the two investigation reports approved by the Central Council of ICAI in 2003 and 2011 on the operations of MAF in India. And to say the least, all this has resulted into an attrition of goodwill and image for the professional bodies, so much so that Government has just finalised plans to create a new regulatory body which will reduce the present professional bodies to educational institutions.

 

Benchmarking

Coming now to the capture of Top 100 or Top 500 companies etc by the MAF, the numbers are very misleading if one does the calculations based on the number of entities. A credible analysis shows that the audit revenue of the MAF crosses Rs. 5,000 crores while the Top 20 IAF taken together stand at less that Rs. 200 Crores, pre-rotation. That is less than 4% market share. The most important fact however is missed when we only compare numbers, and that is the reality that in the West, the coverage by the MAF is a coverage by their own Western-headquartered Firms. While in India, the financial sector suffers a systemic risk since it is foreign firms that have the maximum majority of workshare. Apart from this systemic risk, it is a serious loss of space to generations of young future Indian CAs who find it impossible to enter into “own practice” as it happened for the first 50 years after our independence, before the MAF took over. Another huge issue of concern, is that when India becomes a global economic power 10 years hence, India will not have any global presence in auditing. These truly are our benchmarks. The post audit rotation numbers would be even more dismal – the present market share maybe less than 1 percent. Sometimes, in arguments driven by statistics, the baby does get swept out with the bathwater.

 

History

When we talk of the history of the MAF in India, we should not forget to bring up an important fact pointed out by the respected senior member of our profession, Shri S. Gurumurthy. (Books Unsquared, August 2017, Outlook Magazine, https://www.outlookindia.com magazine/story/the-books-unsquared/299171).
He observed that the RBI is the “original culprit” in allowing FDI into audit through automatic permissions in the consulting route by the MAF, which is not permitted. His prophetic predictions of the detriment to be caused to India through his White Paper of 2001 have sadly come to pass a dozen years later – be it the loss of our profession’s stature, or the many scams. Our Hon PM has said recently that this is a sad thing. This is also confirmed by ICAI in numerous adverse observations in the two Reports against the MAF operations in India. The gains made by the MAF are therefore illegally derived by acquiring as many as the Top 50 IAF over the last 20 years and steadily increasing market share through various means thereafter, and then to add fuel to the fire, using audit rotation to squeeze out IAF by various means, underpricing of services being one such. The errors of Brazil, Argentina, Korea and elsewhere, have got repeated in India – the practice base of local professional firms has been seriously negated.

Non-issues

The other issues on management, technology, thought-leadership and ideology are not relevant at this point. They can be caught up with fairly, for sure. When there is no business left in corporate India for audit by IAF, they are just niceties for the evening cocktail circuit. China has a vision of making its Top 50 CPA firms global and foreign FDI and firms are now banned in auditing of Chinese companies.

 

Conclusion

The horse has bolted – if you care to notice. Despite this, the time to act is now. The good news is that research in 2015 by IIM-A concludes that the advantage of the MAF is only a “market perception” and there is no superiority in the quality of the financial statements audited by MAF. Our policy maker’s vision is clear. India has come to its ‘patanjali’ moment, in terms of corporate consumers’ shift for auditing services to Indian audit firms. The process of making a global Indian audit firm has begun. _

 

Changing Face Of Practice Management

Generalisations
can be grossly misleading, but this one I will still make. We as Chartered
Accountants love to complain and project ourselves as victims. We genuinely
believe that we are tirelessly slogging away for unappreciative and
unresponsive clients. I find this a self-defeatist attitude stemming from a
lack of enjoyment and pride in the job we are doing. If there is a real problem
then let us fix it. As they say, if you are not lighting any candles, don’t
complain about being in the dark.

 

To fix the
problem, we need to ask some basic questions. As individuals, we often ponder
over some existential questions, but fail to ask similar questions relating to
our professional existence:

 

What is the
purpose of our existence and why are we making all these efforts?

  Where do we
see ourselves in the next 5/10 years and what efforts are we making towards
that end?

  How do our
clients and others see us?

 

These and
similar core questions will help us decide the strategy for managing our
professional practice.

 


Size Matters

Over the last
few decades, businesses have evolved and have got far more complex on the
backbone of technology. Indeed, the technology revolution has permitted
businesses to assume structural changes and scales never contemplated or thought
feasible before.

 

The unfortunate truth is that Chartered
Accountancy(CA) firms have not evolved at the same pace. The records of ICAI
shows that less than 10 % of the Indian CA firms are more than 4 partners
strong and hence most often incapable of providing the full range of
professional service to their clients.

 

Professional
firms have a choice; to either remain small and create a niche for themselves
or build scale and become a one-stop shop for their clients. A firm where
partners individually would create a niche for themselves, but the firm
collectively would cater to the full range of services. The reality however, is
that firms have chosen to remain small for all the wrong reasons. The chief
reasons are – unwillingness to give up the name, protecting tenancy rights,
fear of losing independence, etc.

 

Firms that
remain small get into the vicious cycle, often unable to retain clients that
are growing both in scale and in complexity.

Clients that
are growing, face ever more complexity in terms of their structure, operations
and compliance needs. This throws up tremendous opportunities for the CA firms
that have adapted to changing environment. Clients do not look for
one-dimensional solutions from the perspective of audit or tax or corporate
law, but from a comprehensive business viewpoint. The professional (even if he
is operating in a niche area) must therefore develop the competence to look at
the client problem in a holistic manner, thereby providing value to the client.

 

Perhaps, the
only way to build expertise over diverse areas of practice, each having its own
complexities, is to build scale, induct talent, and recognise that it is no
longer possible for a professional to have expert knowledge in all areas of
professional practice. Firms should also think of building multi-disciplinary
teams and collaborate with other professionals, such as lawyers, cost
accountants, information technology professionals, management graduates, etc.

 

Think
Strategically

Scale can be
achieved only if the CA firms think strategically and professionalise the way
they manage their practice, which is entirely different from rendering
professional services to clients. Many CA firms have grown up as family run
businesses, where the control and decision-making vests with the person who
started the practice and at best is handed down to family members. Outsiders
have very little chance of taking the leadership position and this creates a
serious impediment to attracting talent and consequently professionalising the
firm.

CA firms
compete in the professional space in two distinct areas: 1) To attract clients;
and 2) Recruit and retain competent staff. Perhaps, in a growing economy such
as India, attracting clients is a lesser problem. The bigger challenge and
determinant of success is the ability to attract, develop, retain & deploy
competent staff.

Today, the
Indian economy is doing well and the rising tide has lifted up all boats. It is
the right time to invest in internal competencies, put in place robust
processes and build scale, as that alone will help provide consistent quality
and value to the client, even when, inevitably, the tide turns. As Warren
Buffet said, “it is only when the tide goes down that you find out who is
swimming naked”.

 

Eventually,
clients will pay based on their perception of the value they have received.
Goods are consumed but services are experienced. In order to win client loyalty
and enhance reputation, CA firms will have to focus on customer experience. It
is said that: Satisfaction = Perception – Expectation. When a
client gives an assignment, he has certain expectations as to the quality of
service he ought to receive. At the end of the assignment, if the client
perceives that his total experience is better than his initial expectation,
then his satisfaction quotient remains high. In other words, if one can deliver
more than what was expected by the client, it helps cement relationships. One
of the best compliments is when a client introduces you as one who “delivers
more than what he promises”.

 

Standardisation
to leverage growth

CA firms need
to standardise their processes and procedures for rendering professional
services. Even complex assignments can be broken down to simple executable
steps. These steps can be standardised and templates/checklists can be prepared
for their execution. This would help in delegation of work, resulting in
improved efficiency in its execution. Of course, professional work requires
intellectual application and cannot and should not be totally standardised. However,
the portion that can be standardised – and most often this is the major portion
of the total work – should be standardised, so that the senior team can focus
on the critical issues where the actual value addition happens.

 

As the firm grows, standardisation also helps
maintain service standards and consistency in the stand and position taken by
the firm across locations and across partners in technical, legal, statutory
and operational matters.

 

Linked to
standardisation is institution building and positioning of the firm. A client
operating from multiple locations is happy to deal with a firm that can support
him in all the locations, but would necessarily expect the same service level.
Standardisation gives him that look and feel of consistency and assurance that,
across locations and partners, the service level will remain the same.

 

Professional
firms do rely on the individual brilliance and charisma of their partners.
However, to ensure continuity and to achieve smooth succession, it is important
to give confidence to the client that the firm, as an institution, will deliver
quality service in a predictable manner on a consistent basis. As Aristotle
said, “We are what we repeatedly do. Excellence, then, is not an act, but a
habit”.

 

We have
unfortunately seen many examples of reputed firms headed by highly respected
professionals wither away once that professional has completed his innings. One
of the critical requirements of growth is to build trust and confidence in the
institution, and not just in a particular individual. Standardisation goes a
long way in institution building.

 

Focus on
training and quality

CA firms are
integral part of the knowledge economy and can deliver quality service only if
they have trained, competent and motivated staff. Firms that intend to grow and
remain relevant will have no choice but to invest in their human resources.
Partners can leverage their ability to execute more work by delegating it to
competent trained juniors. Standardisation of work coupled with regular training
of staff would help a CA firm reach its full potential.

 

In order to
reap the maximum benefit of training, one has to create an atmosphere where
staff can work at their optimum level. High salary is only one facet of
motivation. If the staff has independence, challenging work, and a nurturing
environment, it will go a long way in retaining talent. A formal unbiased
appraisal system with 360 degree feedback mechanism, coupled with mentoring,
would help staff understand the expectations of the firm and do course
correction, when required. It would also help in the partners understanding the
aspirations, expectations and problems faced by the staff, creating a virtuous
circle. A well-defined path for rising in the ranks of the firm would provide
motivation and a sense of belonging.

 

The staff
members constantly deal with the staff of the client and often gain invaluable
insights relating to client expectations, opportunities for new work and
weaknesses in delivery of service. Honest feedback from the staff would be of
immense value in initiating remedial and even strategic decisions.

 

 A formal Human Resource (HR) approach will
ensure that all issues relating to staff are formally and systematically
managed. This will ensure that small irritants are addressed promptly without
festering into deeper problems. It will also result in a feedback system, where
information will flow both ways from management to staff and vice versa.

 

It is a common
complaint of CA firms that there is tremendous resistance from clients to fee
increases, and there is a hanging sword of losing assignments to fellow
professionals willing to work at a lower fee. There may be some truth in this,
but the fact remains that most clients do not change their CA unless there are
compelling reasons to do so, and fees is rarely one of them. CA firms should
focus on enhancing the quality of their service by knowledge building and
thereby raising the bar on efficiency. If the firm renders service at the
highest level of professional expertise, fees should never be a problem. The
problem is when CA firms demand premium fees without building on quality and
excellence.

 

Position your
firm

Further, the CA
firm should be clear about the area of practice that it intends to occupy and
the value proposition that it brings to the table. The operational strategy,
the pricing decision, the HR policies will all flow from this understanding.

 

David H.
Maister discusses a very interesting concept in his book entitled “Managing the
Professional Service Firm”. The services that professional firms render can be
broadly classified as:

 

Brains (Expertise) practice: Hire us because we
are smart.
Generally,
these are non-recurring assignments where the stakes are high and the client is
willing to pay a premium price, but wants the highest level of professional
expertise. The execution of the assignment would typically require intense
involvement of the partner and lightning quick response time. The assignment
would require innovative, out of the box thinking with minimal scope of
standardisation and downward delegation.

 

Grey Hair (Experience) practice: Hire us because
we have been through this before:
Most medium and small CA firms fall under this
category. They have the experience and have done similar assignments many times
over. It could be statutory audit or other recurring work like filing a tax
return or attending a scrutiny assessment. Each assignment may have its unique
features, requiring partner time, but also a large component that can be
standardised and delegated.The clients may believe that they can get the same
level of service or in any case have the same end result achieved by going to
another professional firm. Relationship, trust and comfort levels of the client
play a major role in ensuring an enduring relationship.

 

Procedural (Efficiency) practice: Hire us because
we know how to do this and can deliver it efficiently
: This practice could be akin to
business process outsourcing. Companies may want to transfer certain processes
to a professional firm as they may have dedicated and trained staff to do these
functions. These assignments would be repetitive and would necessarily need to
be standardised, with only exceptional matters required to be escalated to
seniors or partners’ attention. Profitability would be achieved by increasing
operational efficiency and quick turnaround would be the name of the game.

 

Firms that
carry out “Efficiency work” cannot expect the fee scales of the “Expertise”
firms. However, they could achieve the same level of earnings by improving
internal efficiencies, standardising, streamlining processes, and putting in
place quality review systems to ensure that mistakes are minimised and/or
detected early. It is not that any one of the above areas of practice is
preferable to the other and a CA firm may be in more than one of the above
spaces. The point is that the strategies, focus and approach would necessarily
have to be different for each of the above-mentioned areas.

 

Managing
knowledge

Professional
firms generate a great deal of knowledge material, which perhaps is one of
their most valuable assets. Yet, most often, there is no well-defined system or
process to manage this knowledge base efficiently without compromising
security. As the firm grows, the same research work or knowledge material
prepared by one partner/team is likely to be duplicated by other partners and
other locations. This results in not just inefficiency, but also exposes the
firm to risk due to different partners potentially taking a different position
on the same technical point. Managing knowledge and creating a structure where
this knowledge is assimilated, stored, updated and shared by all partners and
senior staff, easily and seamlessly can become a differentiator between a
successful firm and just any other firm.

 

Adopting technology

We are living
in times of technology revolution and yet many CA firms have failed to
adequately harness the power of technology. Size and scale would give CA firms
the ability to invest in technology that enables them to leverage their
professional expertise many times over. It would enable them to computerise and
delegate the repetitive tasks or tasks that require data mining and computer
aided analytics, leaving time to concentrate on matters requiring professional
acumen. In addition, technology can be used to analyse information and generate
reports in ways not possible until now, both with regard to client servicing
and practice management. Of course, technology poses its own threats and hence,
every upgradation should address concerns about data security.

 

CA firms should
make innovative use of technology to stay ahead of the curve and not
grudgingly, because it is no longer possible to function without it.

 

Think Global

In times where
the world has become a village, CA firms cannot remain local when practically
all their clients – big or small- have international connects. They will have
to maintain a global perspective, while enhancing their local expertise, so
that they can advice local businesses looking to expand globally and global
businesses looking to come to India.

 

Perhaps, the
obvious choice is to become part of an international network or association.
This sends a strong and clear message that your firm has the reach and connects
to handle cross border transactions.

 

Being part of
an international association gives the firm a chance to interact with other
professional firms from all over the world and imbibe the best of professional
practices across countries and continents. It gives an understanding that there
are many paths to professional excellence and it is for each firm to choose the
path that most suits its local environment and specific growth aspirations.

 

Attending the
meetings of the international association also provides an opportunity to bond
closely with fellow professionals and develop close friendships. This helps
both parties to understand the capabilities, practice standards and ethical
values followed by the respective firms. Clients often look up to a CA as a
confidant and a guide for all their problems and needs.

 

The CA firm can
recommend a reliable foreign firm in an alien jurisdiction with much greater
confidence, when it has interacted with the partners of such firm personally.
Such an international association also creates a framework for doing joint assignments requiring professional expertise in multiple geographical
locations.  Working together is much
easier and rewarding, when parties know each other at a personal level.

 

The truth is
that, insular domestic practice will fall short of client needs and expectation
and will struggle to
remain relevant.

 

To sum up

We are living
in exciting times where the environment in which we operate is constantly
changing. This throws up tremendous opportunities; but to capture them, CA
firms will have to take strategic decisions, be proactive and willing to
constantly adapt and innovate. The future will belong to those who break free
from old dogmas and are willing to constantly challenge themselves to achieve
excellence. _